Hypermesh 12 33453e

[email protected]

\altair\scripts\hm) and press the ENTER key. Or

3.

Type in a pre-defined alias that you or a systems has created in the . alias or .cshrc file in the home directory.

8

HyperMesh 12.0 Core Tutorials Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

Altair Engineering

Start Directory

By default, HyperMesh uses a "start directory" for files. HyperMesh reads and writes a number of files from the start directory: At start up, HyperMesh reads configuration files (hm.mac, hmmenu.set, etc.). Upon closing, HyperMesh writes out a command history file (command.cmf) and a menu settings file (hmmenu.set). By default, HyperMesh will read from/write to this directory for any open, save, save as, import, or export functionality. Image files (.jpg) created using the F6 key are saved to the start directory.

To determine the start directory on Windows, perform the following steps: 1.

Right-click the HyperMesh icon.

2.

Go to Pro pe rtie s .

3.

On the Shortcut tab, view the path in the Start In field.

On UNIX, the start directory is determined by the following: Location in which you typed the command to run HyperMesh Your "home" directory if configuration files are not found in the start directory

HyperMesh Help

To obtain help for a particular feature, go to the Help menu and select H y pe rW o rks D e s kto p or H y pe rW o rks H e lp H o m e . The help is organized by product and contains the following types of information: How to use individual functions Notes on interfacing HyperMesh with external data types Tutorials Programming guides

Model Files

Altair Engineering


9

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the < install_directory>\tutorials\hm\ directory unless otherwise noted.

10


Altair Engineering

HM-1010: Opening and Saving Files In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Open a HyperMesh file Import a file into a current HyperMesh session Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file Export all the geometry to an IGES file Export all the mesh data to an OptiStruct input file Delete all data from the current HyperMesh session Import an IGES file Import an OptiStruct file to the current HyperMesh session

Exercise 1: Opening and Saving Files

This exercise uses the following model files: bumper_cen_mid1.hm, bumper_mid.hm, bumper_end.igs, and bumper_end_rgd.fem. Each model file contains various sections, but the whole bumper model is shown, following.

Step 1: Open the HyperMesh model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm. 1.

Access the Open File… dia one of the following ways: From the menu bar, choose File > O pe n > M o de l. From the standard toolbar, click O pe n M o de l (

2.

)

Open the model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm. The model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm, is now loaded. This file contains mesh and geometry data.

Altair Engineering


11

HyperMesh model file, bumper_cen_mid1.hm, opened in HyperMesh

Step 2: Import the HyperMesh model file, bumper_mid.hm, into the current HyperMesh session. 1.

Access the Im po rt tab in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, choose File > Im po rt > M o de l. From the standard toolbar, click Im po rt M o de l (

).

2.

From the Import tab in the tab area, click the Im po rt H M m o de l icon already active.

3.

Under File selection, click the file icon ( bumper_mid.hm.

4.

Click Im po rt.

, if not

) and browse to select the file,

The file, bumper_mid.hm, is now imported into the session.

12


Altair Engineering

HyperMesh model file, bumper_mid.hm, imported on top of existing data in the HyperMesh session

Step 3: Import the IGES geometry file, bumper_end.iges, into the current HyperMesh session. 1.

From the Import tab in the tab area, click the G e o m e try icon

2.

In the File type: field, select IG E S from the pull-down menu.

3.

Click the file icon (

4.

Click Im po rt.

.

) and browse to select the file, bumper_end.iges.

Geometry data is added to the model.

Altair Engineering


13

IGES geometry file, bumper_end.igs, imported into the session

Step 4: Import the OptiStruct input file, bumper_end_rgd.fem, into the current HyperMesh session. 1.

From the Import tab in the tab area, click the Im po rt So lv e r D e ck icon

2.

In the File type: field, select O ptiStruct from the pull-down menu.

3.

In the File field, click the folder icon and browse to bumper_end_rgd.fem.

4.

Click Im po rt.

.

This OptiStruct input file contains mesh for the bumper’s end portion. The mesh is added to the existing data in the current HyperMesh session and will be located in the same area as the geometry representing the bumper’s end.

14


Altair Engineering

OptiStruct input file, bumper_end_rgd.fem, imported on top of data in the current HyperMesh session

Step 5: Save the HyperMesh session as a HyperMesh model file called practice.hm. 1.

From the menu bar, click File > Sa v e As > M o de l.

2.

Enter the name, practice.hm.

3.

Click Sa v e .

The data currently loaded in HyperMesh is now saved in a HyperMesh binary data file of the name you entered.

Step 6: Export the model’s geometry data to an IGES file called practice.iges. 1.

Access the Export tab in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, choose File > E xpo rt > G e o m e try . From the standard toolbar, click E xpo rt G e o m e try

2.

In the Export tab, click the E xpo rt G e o m e try icon

3.

Set the File type: field to IG E S.

4.

Click the folder icon in the File field, browse to the desired destination folder, and enter

Altair Engineering

if not already selected.


15

practice.igs. 5.

Click E xpo rt. All of the geometry loaded in HyperMesh (points, lines, surfaces) is now saved in an . iges file with the name you entered.

Step 7: Export the model’s mesh data to an OptiStruct input file called practice.fem. 1.

In the Export tab, click the Export FE model icon

.

2.

Under File selection, choose File ty pe : O ptiStruct from the pull-down menu.

3.

Under File selection, click the folder icon in the File field, browse to the desired destination folder, and enter practice.fem.

4.

Click E xpo rt. All of the finite element data loaded in HyperMesh (nodes, elements, loads, etc.) is now saved as an .fem file with the name you entered.

Step 8 (Optional): Delete all data from the current HyperMesh session by starting a new session. 1.

Access the New HyperMesh Model function in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, click File > Ne w > M o de l. From the standard toolbar, click Ne w M o de l (

2.

)

Answer Y e s to the pop-up question "Do y ou w ish t o de le t e t he c urre nt m ode l? (y /n)".

Step 9 (Optional): Import the IGES geometry file you created, practice.igs. Refer to Step 3 for detailed instructions.

Step 10 (Optional): Import the Optistruct input file you created, practice.fem, into the current HyperMesh session. Import practice.fem into the current session. The data in the file will be added to the existing data in the current HyperMesh session. Refer to Step 4 for detailed instructions. With the completion of Steps 8, 9, and 10, your current HyperMesh session should contain all of the geometry and mesh data that existed in the HyperMesh session that was saved to a HyperMesh file in Step 5.

16


Altair Engineering

Step 11 (Optional): Save your work.

Altair Engineering


17

HM-1020: Working with s A large portion of HyperMesh functionality is organized into s. Many s have common attributes and controls, so once you become familiar with the features of one , it is much easier to understand other s. In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Use the entity selector and the extended entity selection menu to select and unselect nodes and elements from the graphics area. Use the direction selector to define vectors along which to translate nodes and elements. Switch between different entities to select and methods to define vectors. Toggle between two options. Enter, copy and paste, and calculate numbers. Use the rapid menu functionality to execute commands with the mouse buttons rather than clicking buttons. Interrupt, but not exit, a to go to another using the keyboard function keys.

Exercise

Step 1: Open and view the model file, bumper.hm. Step 2: In the tra nsla te , select nodes from the graphics area. 1.

Open the Translate by clicking M e s h > Tra ns la te > No de s .

2.

Select a few nodes from the graphics area by left-clicking the corners of the elements.

Node selector

The cyan border around the node selector indicates that it is active; HyperMesh is expecting nodes to be selected as the next action. A node is positioned at each element corner. A selected node is highlighted with a small, white circle.

18


Altair Engineering

Node Handles

3.

Reset the selection of nodes by clicking the re s e t icon,

.

Step 3: Select and unselect elements from the graphics area. 1.

Click the entity selector switch ( e le m s .)

) and select e le m s . (Switch the entity selector to

Entity selector with its switch

The menu that pops up contains a list of entities that can be translated. 2.

With the e le m s selector active, select several elements from the graphics area. To select an element, click its element handle (the dot at the element’s center). The elements are highlighted in white when they are selected.

Altair Engineering


19

Element Handles

Unselect an element using the right mouse button.

Step 4: Select and unselect elements using the quick window selection method. 1.

that the elems selector is active.

2.

Move the mouse handle into the graphics area.

3.

Press and hold the SHIFT key + left mouse button and move the mouse to draw a rectangular window around a few elements, and then release the SHIFT key and left mouse button. All the element handles inside the rectangular window are selected.

4.

Unselect elements by pressing and holding the SHIFT key + right mouse button and moving the mouse to create a window around the selected elements.

5.

Press the SHIFT key and quick-click the left mouse button. A pop-up window appears, containing six icons as shown in the following image.

20


Altair Engineering

Quick window pop-up menu

6.

Select the inside polygon shape

.

7.

Press and hold the SHIFT key + left mouse button and move the mouse around a few unselected elements, and then release the SHIFT key and mouse button. This draws a polygon window rather than a rectangular window. All element handles inside this window are selected.

Step 5: Select and unselect elements by using the extended entity selection menu. 1.

Click the e le m s selector and select re v e rs e . (Select e le m s > > re v e rs e .) The selection of elements is reversed; the elements that were selected are now unselected and the elements that were not selected are now selected. The menu that appears contains a list of functions for selecting elements. Once you select a function from the menu, the menu disappears. If you do not want to select a function, move the mouse handle out of the menu.

Extended entity selection menu

2.

Select e le m s > > by a dja ce nt. Elements adjacent to the selected elements are now selected.

Step 6: Shade the elements, reset the selection, and select a few adjacent elements. 1.

On the Visualization toolbar, click Shaded Elements and Mesh Lines,

.

The elements are displayed in shaded mode, rather than wireframe mode. 2.

In the Translate , click the reset icon (

) to clear the elements selection.

3.

With the elems selector active, select a few elements that are adjacent to each other.

Step 7: Specify a direction vector (N1 and N2 only) along which to translate the selected elements.

Altair Engineering


21

1.

Click the dire ctio n selector switch

The Direction selector includes node selectors to define the direction vector.

The menu shown in the following image appears. It contains a list of vector and plane options for defining the direction in which to translate the selected elements.

Direction selector pop-up menu

2.

Select N1, N2, N3 from the pop-up menu.

3.

Click the N1 to activate the selector. N1 now has a cyan border indicating it is the active selector. The selected elements are displayed in gray because the elems entity selector is not active.

4.

In the graphics area, select any node for N1. The selected node is highlighted in green. The active selector advances to N2.

5.

Select a node near N1 for N2. The selected node is highlighted in blue. The active selector advances to N3. Do not select a node for N3.

Note:

Selecting the two nodes, N1 and N2, defines a vector for the direction of translation. This vector goes from N1 towards N2. Selecting a third node, N3, defines a plane. The direction of translation is the positive direction of the vector normal to the plane. The positive direction is determined by the right-hand rule.

Step 8: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then translate them. 1.

Click the toggle (

2.

Click tra ns la te + .

) to change magnitude = to magnitude = N2-N1.

The selected elements translate in the direction from N1 to N2 by N2-N1 units. 3.

Notice the thick black border around the translate + button. It indicates this is a rapid menu button; you can click the middle mouse button rather than click tra ns la te + .

22


Altair Engineering

4.

Click the middle mouse button. The selected elements are translated again by N2-N1 units.

5.

Click tra ns la te - twice. The selected elements are translated in the negative N1-N2 vector direction and are now in their original position.

Step 9: Measure the distance between two nodes. 1.

Press the F4 function key to interrupt, but not exit, the Translate and go to the Distance on the Geom page. The element and node you selected in the Translate are currently not visible. However, they are still selected. They will be visible again when you return to the Translate .

2.

you are in the two nodes sub. Notice N1 is the active selector.

3.

Select any node for N1. The entity selector advances to N2.

4.

Select a node near N1 for N2. Notice the distance = field value reflects the absolute distance between N1 and N2.

5.

Click in the distance = field to highlight the value.

6.

Press CTRL+C to copy the value.

7.

Click re turn to return to the Translate .

8.

Notice the elements and nodes you selected in the Translate before you went to the Distance are once again visible.

Step 10: Specify a distance to translate the selected elements and then translate them. 1.

Toggle from m a gnitude = N1- N2 to m a gnitude = .

2.

Click in the m a gnitude = field to highlight its value.

3.

Press CTRL+V to paste the distance = value copied from the Distance .

4.

Click tra ns la te + . The selected elements translate in the direction from N1 to N2 by the number of units specified for magnitude =.

5.

Click tra ns la te

Altair Engineering

once.


23

The selected elements are translated in the negative N1-N2 vector direction and are now in their original position.

Step 11: Calculate 5.5 * 10.5 and specify the resulting value for ma gnitude =. 1.

Right click in the magnitude = field.

2.

Click 5 . 5 (in that order) and then click e nte r.

3.

Click 10 . 5 (in that order).

4.

Click X. The calculated value in the calculator window is 57.75.

5.

Click e xit. The calculator closes and 57.75 appears in the magnitude = field. You can type a value in the magnitude = field by clicking in the field once to highlight the current value, then typing in a new value.

Step 12: Specify a new vector and translate the elements again. 1.

Click the reset icon (

) for the direction selector.

2.

Notice N1 is the active selector.

3.

Select three nodes for N1, N2, N3 to define a plane.

4.

Click tra ns la te + or press the middle mouse button. The elements are translated 57.75 units in the positive direction normal to the defined plane.

5.

Click re turn to exit the .

Step 13 (Optional): Save your work. With all of the exercise complete, you can save the model if desired.

24


Altair Engineering

HM-1030:Organizing a Model A large portion of HyperMesh functionality is organized into s. Many s have common attributes and controls, so once you become familiar with the features of one , it is much easier to understand other s. In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create geometry and organize it into components Organize elements into the components Rename components Identify and delete empty components Delete all the geometry lines Reorder the components in a specific order Renumber all the components, starting with ID 1 and incrementing by 1 Create an assembly Organize the constraint

Exercise

It is recommend to review the general overview before completing this tutorial.

Step 1: Retrieve the model file, bumper.hm.

Altair Engineering


25

Step 2: Create a component named ge o me try to hold the model’s geometry. 1.

Access the Component Collector in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, choose C o lle cto rs > C re a te > C o m po ne nts . Right click in the Model Browser and click C re a te > C o m po ne nt.

2.

Click the Na m e : field and enter geometry.

3.

Click co lo r and choose yellow.

4.

Leave the material and property unassigned and click C re a te to create the component collector, geometry. The message: "Com pone nt c re a t e d" appears in the status bar. Left-click once anywhere in the HyperMesh window (except on a button) to dismiss the message in the status bar. The component called geometry is the current component and is bold in the Model Browser.

Step 3: Create two geometry lines and organize them into different components.

26


Altair Engineering

1.

Access the Lines by clicking G e o m e try > C re a te > Line s > Sta nda rd No de s .

2.

With the no de lis t selector active, select two nodes, opposite and diagonal to each other, on the same element as indicated in the following image.

3.

Click cre a te to create the line.

4.

Notice the line is yellow, the same color assigned to the component, geometry. This is because the line is organized into the current component, geometry.

5.

In the Model Browser click the rigid component.

6.

Right click and click M a ke C urre nt in the menu. The rigid component is now the active component.

7.

With the no de lis t selector active, select two nodes, opposite and diagonal to each other on another element.

8.

Click cre a te to create the line. Notice the line is the same color assigned to the component, rigid. This is because the line is organized into the current component, rigid.

9.


Step 4: Move all the model’s geometry surfaces into the component, ge o me try. 1.

Click G e o m e try > O rga niz e > Surfa ce s to access the Organize .

Altair Engineering


27

2.

Go to the co lle cto rs sub if not already there.

3.

Switch the entity selector to s urfs if not already set.

4.

Click s urfs > > a ll. Displayed surfaces are highlighted in white indicating they are selected. Any surfaces that are not displayed are also selected because you selected s urfs > > a ll.

5.

Click de s t co m po ne nt= and select ge o m e try from the list of components in the model.

6.

Click m o v e to move the selected surfaces into the geometry component.

Step 5: Move all the model’s shell elements (quads and trias) into the component, ce nte r. You should still be in the Organize . 1.

Switch the entity selector to e le m s .

2.

Click e le m s > > by co lle cto r. A list of the model’s components appears.

3.

Select the components, m id1, m id2, and e nd. Select a component by left-clicking its name, color, or check box. A component is selected when it has a check in its check box. To unselect a component, right-click it.

4.

Click s e le ct to complete the selection of components.

5.

Set dest component = to the component, ce nte r.

6.

Click m o v e to move the elements in the selected components to the component, center. All of the shell elements should now be a cyan blue, the same color assigned to the component, center.

7.


Step 6: Rename the component, ce nte r, to she lls. 1.

In the Model Browser select the ce nte r component .

2.

Right-click and click R e na m e in the menu.

3.

Type shells for the component name and press ENTER.

Step 7: Identify and delete all of the empty components. 1.

Press F2 to open the Delete .

28


Altair Engineering

2.

Switch the selector to co m ps .

3.

Click pre v ie w e m pty . The status bar displays the message: "3 e nt it ie s a re e m pt y ." These are the m id1, m id2, and e nd components that no longer have elements in them.

4.

Click the entity selector, co m ps , once to see a list of the identified empty components. A complete list of the model’s components appears. The empty components are indicated with an activated check box.

5.

Click re turn to return to the Delete .

6.

Click de le te e ntity . The status bar displays the message, "De le t e d 3 c om ps."

Step 8: Delete all the geometry lines in the model. You should still be in the Delete . 1.

Switch the entity selector to line s .

2.

Click line s > > a ll.

3.

Click de le te e ntity . The two lines you created earlier are deleted.

4.

Click re turn to exit the menu.

Step 9: Move the component, ge o me try, to the front in the components list. 1.

From the menu bar click C o lle cto rs > R e o rde r > C o m po ne nts .

2.

Click the co m ps selector to see a list of the model’s components.

3.

On the right side of the , click the switch and select na m e (id). (Switch from na m e to na m e (id).) Notice the IDs of the components. The ID for shells is (1), the ID for rigid is (5), and the ID for geometry is (6).

4.

Select the component, ge o m e try .

5.

Click s e le ct to complete the selection.

6.

Activate the option m o v e to : fro nt.

7.

Click re o rde r to apply the reorder function to the component, geometry. The status bar displays the message, "T he se le c t e d c olle c t ors ha v e be e n m ov e d."

Altair Engineering


29

9.

Click the co m ps selector once to review the reordered list of components. Notice the component, geometry, is at the top of the list. However, it still has the same ID, (6).

10.


Step 10: Renumber the components to be the same as their position in the list. 1.

From the menu bar click C o lle cto rs > R e num be r > C o m po ne nts .

2.

Go to the s ingle sub.

3.

Switch the entity selector to co m ps if not already set.

4.

Click the co m ps selector to see a list of the model’s components.

5.

On the ’s right side, click co m ps > > a ll.

6.


7.

s ta rt with = is set to 1.

8.

incre m e nt by = is set to 1.

9.

o ffs e t = is set to 0.

10.

Click re num be r to renumber the components.

11.

Click the co m ps selector to review the model’s component list. Notice the components are numbered according to their position in the list. Set the view to name(id) if not already done to see the numbers.

12.

Click re turn to exit the . Having components with IDs that do not reflect their position in the model’s list of components will not result in errors. However, having components with IDs that do reflect their position in the model’s list of components can be helpful for organizational purposes.

Step 11: Create an assembly containing the components, she lls and rigid. 1.

From the menu bar click C o lle cto rs > C re a te > As s e m blie s .

2.

For Na m e :, enter elements .

3.

Select a Color for the assembly.

4.

Click C re a te to create the assembly.

5.

Select the rigid and s he lls components in the model tree.

30


Altair Engineering

6.

Drag the components with the left mouse button over the elements assembly until it highlights. The components are now added to the assembly.

Step 12: Create a load collector named co nstra ints. 1.

Access the Lo a d C o lle cto r dialog box in one of the following ways: From the menu bar click C o lle cto rs > C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto rs Right click in the Model Browser and click C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto r

2.

For Na m e : enter constraints.

3.

Click C o lo r and choose red.

4.

Click C re a te to create the load collector. The status bar displays the message: "Loa d c olle c t or c re a t e d."

5.

Left-click anywhere in the HyperMesh window (except on a button) to dismiss the message in the status bar. The constraints load collector is bold in the Model Browser showing it is the active load collector. Any loads that are created will be organized into this load collector.

Step 13: Move the model’s one constraint into the load collector, co nstra ints. The existing load collector, loads, contains several forces and one constraint. The Organize is used to move the one constraint in the load collector, constraints. 1.

From the menu bar click C o lle cto rs > O rga niz e > Lo a d C o lle cto rs .

2.

Go to the co lle cto rs sub.

3.

Switch the entity selector to lo a ds .

4.

Select lo a ds > > by co nfig.

5.

Click co nfig = and select co ns t.

6.

In the center of the , toggle from displayed to a ll.

7.

Click s e le ct e ntitie s .

8.

that dest = is set to the load collector, co ns tra ints .

9.

Click m o v e to move the selected (constraints) into the load collector, constraints.

Step 14: Create a component from the M o de l B ro w se r. 1.

Right-click in the white blank area below the list of components, materials, load collectors, and system collectors in the Model Browser.

Altair Engineering


31

2.

From the pop-up menu, click C re a te > C o m po ne nt.

3.

Enter the name component1 in the Name: field.

4.

Click the C o lo r icon and chose the component’s color as pink.

32


Altair Engineering

5.

Click C re a te to create the component. The component named component1 is appended to the list.

6.

In the Model Browser, click the + button beside the Components entity to see that Component1 is boldface in the list, indicating that it is the current component.

Step 15: Review the existing assembly elements from the Model Browser. 1.

Left-click the + button next to Assembly Hierarchy then click the + button next to elements to expand its tree. Notice that it contains two components, rigid and shells . Note that the Assemblies allows you to add components which are in one assembly to another assembly. The Model Browser does not allow you to do this, but you can create assemblies from it.

Step 16: Add the components, geometry and component1, to the

Altair Engineering


33

assembly, assem_mid, using the Model Browser. 1.

Left-click the component name, geometry, to select it.

2.

Press the CTRL key and left-click the component name, component1. if you accidentally select the wrong item, hold the CTRL key and left-click it again deselect it.

3.

Left-click any one of the selected components and drag the mouse pointer over the assembly, assem_mid. When assem_mid is highlighted, release the mouse button. The selected components are added to the assembly, assem_mid. Use the SHIFT key and left mouse button to select multiple items in the Model Browser list at one time. Left-click the first item in the list. Then press the SHIFT key and leftclick the last item in the list.

Step 17: Rename assem_mid to assem_geom in the Model Browser. 1.

Right-click assem_mid and click R e na m e . Assem_mid is highlighted and ready for editing.

2.

Type assem_geom and press ENTER.

Step 18: Delete component1 from the Model Browser. 1.

Right-click component1 and select D e le te .

2.

Confirm that you wish to delete the component by clicking Y e s in the delete confirm dialog. Component1 is deleted. Notice that in the list, there is no boldfaced component name. This indicates there is no current component specified.

Step 19: Set the current component from the Model Browser. 1.

Right-click shells and select M a ke C urre nt. The component name is boldfaced.

34


Altair Engineering

HM-1040: Controlling the Display When performing finite element modeling and analysis setup, it is important to be able to view the model from different vantage points and control the visibility of entities. You may need to rotate the model to understand the shape, zoom in to view details more closely, or hide specific parts of the model so other parts can be seen. Sometimes a shaded view is best, while other times, a wireframe view allows you work on details inside the model. HyperMesh has many functions to help you control the view, visibility, and display of entities. In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Control the points of view using the mouse and toolbar. Control the visibility of entities using the Display , Mask , and tools on the Utility Menu. Control how entities look by using the toolbar and the Model Browser. Rename components. Identify and delete empty components. Delete all the geometry lines.

Exercise

Step 1: Retrieve the HyperMesh model file, bumper.hm. Step 2: Manipulate the model view using the mouse controls. The CTRL + mouse keys are used to rotate the model, change the center of rotation, zoom, fit, and pan. 1.

Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area.

2.

Press the CTRL key + left mouse button and move the mouse around. The model rotates with the movement of the mouse. A small white square appears in the middle of the graphics area, indicating the center of the rotation. Release the left mouse button and press it again to rotate the model in a different direction.

3.

Press the CTRL key and quick-click the left mouse button anywhere on the model. The center of rotation square appears near where you clicked.

Altair Engineering


35

HyperMesh searches for one of the following conditions in the listed order and relocates the center of rotation at or near the first condition identified (if none of the conditions are met, the center of rotation is relocated to the center of the screen): A nearby node or surface vertex A nearby surface edge to project onto A nearby geometry surface or shaded element 4.

Press the CTRL key + left mouse button to rotate the model and view the change in rotation behavior.

5.

Press the CTRL key and quick-click the left mouse button anywhere in the graphics area, except for on the model. The center of rotation square is relocated to the center of the screen.

6.

Press the CTRL key + left mouse button to rotate the model and observe the change in rotation behavior.

7.

Press the CTRL key + middle mouse button, move the mouse around, and then release the mouse button. A white line is drawn along the path of the mouse movement. When the mouse button is released, HyperMesh zooms in on the portion of the model where the line was drawn. You can also simply draw a line to zoom in on a portion of the model.

8.

Press the CTRL key + quick-click the middle mouse button. The model is fitted to the graphics area.

9.

Press the CTRL key and spin the mouse wheel. The model zooms in or out depending on which direction you spin the mouse wheel.

10.

Move the mouse pointer to a different location in the graphics area and repeat #9. Notice the model zooms in or out from where the mouse handle is located.

11.

Press the CTRL key + quick-click the middle mouse button to fit the model to the graphics area.

12.

Press the CTRL key + right mouse button and move the mouse around. The model is panned (translated) according to the mouse movement.

Step 3: Manipulate the view of the model using the rotate functions on the toolbar. 1.

On the View Controls toolbar, left-click D y na m ic R o ta te .

2.

Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area. The center of rotation square appears.

36


Altair Engineering

3.

Press and hold the left mouse button, and then move the mouse around. The model rotates with the movement of the mouse, similar to the way the model rotates when you press the CTRL key + left mouse button and move the mouse.

4.

Click the middle mouse button on the model. The center of rotation square appears near where you clicked.

5.

Move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or right-click to exit the rotation mode.

6.

On the View Controls toolbar, right-click D y na m ic R o ta te pointer into the graphics area.

and move the mouse

Again, the center of rotation square appears. You can click the middle mouse button on the model to change the center of rotation. 7.

Press the left mouse button near the center of rotation square. The model rotates continuously in the direction of your mouse pointer, relative to the center of rotation.

8.

With the left mouse button still pressed, move the mouse around slowly. The direction and speed of the rotating model changes. The farther the mouse pointer is from the center of rotation, the quicker the model rotates. You can release the left mouse button, and then press it again to rotate the model in a different direction.

9.

Middle mouse click anywhere in the graphics area, except on the model. The center of rotation square is relocated to the screen’s center.

10.

Move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or left-click to exit the rotation mode.

Step 4: Manipulate the view of the model by using the zoom in and out functions on the toolbar. 1.

On the View Controls toolbar, left-click circle / dy na m ic z o o m ,

.

The status bar displays the message, "Circle the data to be zoomed in on." 2.

Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area.

3.

Press the left mouse button, move the mouse around, and then release the left mouse button. A white line is drawn along the path of the mouse movement. When the mouse button is released, HyperMesh zooms in on the portion of the model where the line was drawn. You can also simply draw a linear line to zoom in on a portion of the model. This function is similar to pressing the CTRL key + middle mouse button to zoom into a

Altair Engineering


37

portion of the model. 4.

On the Standard Views toolbar, click fit,

.

The model is fitted to the graphics area. 5.

On the View Controls toolbar, left-click z o o m in / o ut,

.

The model is zoomed in by the factor specified in the options . 6.

On the View Controls toolbar, right-click z o o m in / o ut,

.

The model is zoomed out by the same factor. 7.

From the menu bat click Pre fe re nce s > M e s hing O ptio ns or G e o m e try O ptio ns .

8.

Go to the geometry or mesh sub.

9.

For zoom factor =, specify 4.

10.


11.

On the View Controls toolbar, left-click z o o m in / o ut,

.

The model is zoomed in by the larger, specified factor. 12.

On the View Controls toolbar, right-click circle / dy na m ic z o o m ,

.

The status bar displays the message "Drag up/down to zoom in/out." 13.

Move the mouse pointer into the graphics area, press the left mouse button, and then move the mouse pointer up and down. The model is zoomed in and out according to how far you move the mouse up or down.

14.

Move the mouse pointer out of the graphics area or left-click to exit the dynamic zoom mode.

Step 5: Manipulate the model view using the arrows and vie w on the toolbar. 1.

On the View Controls toolbar, right-click or left-click any of the ro ta te icons ( ,

,

).

The model rotates in the direction of the arrow by the rotation angle specified in the Options . 2.

On the Standard Views toolbar, click the X Y To p Pla ne Vie w icon (

3.

From the main menu click Pre fe re nce s > M e s hing O ptio ns or G e o m e try O ptio ns .

38


).

Altair Engineering

4.

For rotate angle =, specify a value of 90.

5.

Click re turn to return to the main menu.

6.

Click any of the ro ta te icons (

,

,

).

Notice the model rotates by the new specified rotation angle, 90. 7.

Change the view of the model to any view.

8.

Use CTRL + left mouse button, or the rotate icons on the toolbar to rotate the model.

9.

Use CTRL + middle mouse button, or the zoom icons on the toolbar to zoom into or out on the model.

10.

Right click in the Model Browser and click C re a te > Vie w.

11.

Open the View folder to see the new view name.

12.

Right click on the view and pick R e na m e .

13.

Enter my_view for the new name.

14.

Click X Y Pla ne To p Vie w icon (

15.

Click m y _v ie w in the Model Browser to display the view.

) to display a different view of the model.

Step 6: Control the display of components using the toolbar. 1.

On the Visualization toolbar, click Sha de d E le m e nts a nd M e s h Line s ,

.

Notice the shell elements now have been shaded. 3.

Right-click Sha de d E le m e nts a nd M e s h Line s , a nd Fe a ture Line s , .

, and switch to Sha de d E le m e nts

Notice now the elements shading does not show any mesh lines. Only feature lines are displayed. 5.

Right-click Sha de d E le m e nts and Fe a ture Line s , .

, to access Shaded Elements,

Notice now the feature lines are also removed from the display. 7.

Click W ire fra m e E le m e nts (Skin O nly ),

, to return to the wireframe shading mode.

Step 7: Control the display of components using the Visua l Attribute s . 1.

On the Visualization toolbar, click the arrow to open the Mesh Style (

2.

Click Sha de d E le m e nts

Altair Engineering

) icon list.

.


39

All elements now appear shaded with no mesh lines. 3. Right-click in the Model Browser and click C o lum ns > Sho w FE Sty le from the context menu. A new column appears in the Model Browser. 4.

Right click the icon next to the mid1 component in the FE Style column and select W ire fra m e E le m e nts Skin O nly . The display is changed for just that component.

5.

Experiment with the other display modes. Icon

Display Mode Wireframe Elements – Element edges are displayed with lines. Wireframe Elements Skin Only – Element edges are displayed with lines for Shell elements only. Shaded Elements – The element is displayed as a filled polygon. Shaded Elements with Mesh Lines – The element is displayed as a filled polygon with the feature edges drawn in mesh line color. Hidden Line with Feature Lines – The element as a filled polygon with the feature edges in mesh line color. Transparent – The element is displayed as a filled transparent polygon.

Step 8: Control the visibility of various entity categories using the M o de l B ro w se r. 1.

In the tab area, activate the Model tab.

2.

Right-click anywhere in the white space of the Model Browser list and pick E xpa nd All from the context menu. This will open all of the branches of the Model Browser.

3.

At the top of the Model Browser, click D is pla y no ne ,

.

The display of all entities in the model is turned off. 4.

Click D is pla y a ll,

.

All entities in the model are now displayed.

40


Altair Engineering

5.

In the browser list, left-click C o m po ne nt (5) to select it.

6.

Click D is pla y no ne ,

.

The display of component collectors is turned off, but all other entities remain displayed. Display all, Display none, and Display reverse act globally (on all entities) if nothing in the browser list is selected. If a folder is selected (highlighted), the action will be performed only on the entities within that folder. If an individual entity is selected, the action will apply only to that entity. 7.

Left-click in the white space of the browser list. This deselects all entities in the browser list.

8.

Click D is pla y re v e rs e ,

.

The display is reversed. Only the components are now shown instead of everything but components. 9.

Click C o m po ne nt v ie w,

.

Only the component collectors are shown in the browser list. 10.

Click the arrow for the elements and geometry filter to change it from Elements + Geometry,

, to Elements,

.

Display all, Display none, and Display reverse will no longer affect the display of geometry in the components. 11.

Click D is pla y no ne ,

.

Only geometry is now left in the display. 12.

Switch the elements and geometry filter back to Elements + Geometry,

13.

Click D is pla y re v e rs e ,

.

.

Only elements are now displayed.

Step 9: Control the visibility of individual components using the M o de l B ro w se r. 1.

Click e le m e nts ,

, next to the mid2, end, and rigid components.

Only the components center and mid1 have their elements displayed now. 2.

Press F on the keyboard. The displayed components are fitted to the graphics area.

3.

Click ge o m e try ,

Altair Engineering

, next to the components mid2 and end.


41

4.

Fit the displayed components to the graphics area (F). The geometry in the components, mid2 and end, and the elements in the components, center and mid1, are displayed. A component collector has two ‘compartments’: one for elements and the other for geometry. The display for elements and geometry in a component can be controlled separately.

Step 10: Control the display of entities using the M a sk . 1.

Click M a s k

2.

Go to the mask sub if not already there.

3.

With the elems selector active, select e le m s >> by co lle cto r.

4.

Select the component, m id1.

5.


6.

From the graphics area, manually select a few elements in the center (blue) component.

7.

Click m a s k to mask the elements.

to open the Mask

The elements in the mid1 component and the elements you selected from the graphics area are no longer displayed. 8.

In the Model Browser, notice that the elements ( ) for the components center and mid1 are still displayed. Their display icons indicate that they are activated even though some or all of the elements in these components are masked (hidden).

9.

In the Mask , click unm a s k a ll, or on the Display toolbar click unm a s k a ll (

).

All the elements in the components, center and mid1, are visible again. Notice the elements in the other components are not displayed. This is because these components are not active in the Display . 10.

Click re turn to exit to the main menu.

Step 11: Control the display of entities using the Find . 1.

Click find,

2.

Go to the find entities sub.

3.

Select e le m s >> by co lle cto r, and select the component, end, from the components list.

4.

Click find to find the elements.

42

HyperMesh 12.0 Core Tutorials

in the Display toolbar to open the Find

Proprietary Inform ation of Altair Engineering

Altair Engineering

The elements in the component, end, are displayed. In the Model Browser, notice that the elements for the component, end, are now shown as active ( ). This is because the collector containing the entities that are to be displayed (found) must be active. 5.

Go to the find attached sub.

6.

For attached to:, select e le m s >> dis pla y e d.

7.

Click find to find the elements. Some of the elements in the components, mid2 and rigid, are now displayed. These elements are immediately adjacent and connected to the selected elements. Again, notice that the elements for these components are now shown as active ( The components were made active so that the elements could be displayed.

8.


9.

On the display toolbar, click Unm a s k All (

).

).

All of the model’s elements are now displayed. This is because the Find finds the entities it is supposed to find, activates (displays) the corresponding collectors, and masks the other entities in the collectors it activated. In this case, the last find command displayed on the components, mid2 and rigid, in the Model Browser.

Step 12: Change the display of entities using the M a sk tab. 1.

In the Model Browser, click in the white space of the browser list to make sure nothing is selected.

2.

Click D is pla y no ne (

3.

Click D is pla y a ll (

).

).

Performing these two steps makes sure that everything is displayed in the model. 4.

Click the M a s k tab.

5.

Click the 1 in the Isolate column for Components. Only the components in the model (elements, geometry, and connectors) are displayed. Everything else is now masked.

6.

Expand the Components branch to expose connectors, elements, and geometry.

7.

Click the

in the Hide column for Elements.

The elements in the model are now masked, leaving only surfaces shown. 8.

Expand the LoadCollectors branch to expose loads and equations.

9.

Expand the Loads branch to expose constraints, forces, moments, etc.

Altair Engineering


43

10.

Click the + in the Show column for Constraints. Constraints are added to the display of the surfaces.

11.

Expand the Elements branch to expose 0D/rigids, springs/gaps, 1D, 2D, and 3D.

12.

Click the 1 in the Isolate column for 0D/Rigids. Rigid elements are added to the display, while the surfaces are now masked. The constraints remain displayed. This is because using isolate below the top level of the list will not mask anything outside of the top level that entity belongs to. Rigids belong to components at the top level, so no entities in the other top levels are masked.

13.

Click the 1 in the Isolate column for Components. All of the entities in the components are shown again, while the constraints are masked. This is because using isolate at the top level of the list (components, groups, loadcollectors, morphing, multibodies, and systemcollectors) will mask everything outside of the entity type being isolated.

Step 13: Change the color of components using the Model Browser. 1.

Click the M o de l tab to go to the Model Browser.

2.

Right-click the color (

3.

From the color pop-up, select a different color.

4.

Observe the change in color of the elements in mid1.

44


) next to mid1.


Altair Engineering

Geometry HM-2000: Importing and Repairing CAD HM-2010: Generating a Midsurface HM-2015: Auto-Midsurfacing with Insert Planes HM-2020: Simplifying Geometry HM-2030: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh HM-2040: Creating and Editing Line Data HM-2050: Creating Surfaces from Elements HM-2060: Creating and Editing Solid Geometry HM-2070: Geometry and Mesh Editing Using the Quick Edit HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking HM-2090: Dimensioning

Altair Engineering


45

HM-2000: Importing and Repairing CAD In this tutorial, you will: Delete untrimmed surfaces Close missing surfaces Set the cleanup tolerance Equivalence free edges Delete duplicate surfaces The benefits of importing and repairing CAD are: Correcting any errors in the geometry from import Creating the simplified part needed for the analysis Meshing a part all at once Ensuring proper connectivity of mesh Obtaining a desirable mesh pattern and quality

Exercise: Importing and Repairing CAD Geometry Data

This exercise uses the model file, clip_repair.hm.

46


Altair Engineering

Step 1: Open and view the model file, clip_repair.hm. Step 2: View the model in topology display toolbar and shaded mode to evaluate its integrity. 1.

Observe where the model has incorrect connectivity and missing or duplicate surfaces.

2.

Click G e o m e try > Auto cle a nup to open the Auto Geometry Cleanup . Note that the surface edges are now colored according to their topology status. This occurs because Geometry Color is set to auto (

3.

Click W ire fra m e G e o m e try (

).

) to display the model in Wire frame mode.

The toolbar contains icons that control the display of the surfaces and surface edges. Surfaces can be shaded with or without edges or wireframe. Right-click the icons to access the drop-down menu for additional options. Place your mouse over the cursor to view a description of the button’s functionality. 4.

Click Vis ua liz a tio n (

) and navigate to the Topology tab.

Visualization controls the display of the surfaces and surface edges. Surfaces can be shaded or wireframe. The check boxes within this menu turn the display of the different edge types and fixed points (surface vertices) on or off.

Altair Engineering


47

5.

Clear all the check boxes except the Free check box. Only the free edges should be displayed at this point.

6.

Observe the free edges and make note of where they are. The free (red) edges show where there is incorrect connectivity or gaps.

7.

Note the locations where there are closed loops of free edges. These are locations that probably have missing surfaces.

Free edges indicating surface discontinuities of the clip geometry

8.

Select only the No n- m a nifo ld check box.

9.

Observe the non-manifold edges and make note of where they are. The non-manifold edges show where there are more than two surfaces sharing an edge, which might indicate incorrect connectivity. For this part, there are yellow edges completely surrounding two areas. This indicates that there are probably duplicate surfaces in these locations.

10.

Select all the check boxes.

11. Click the C lo s e button to close the Visualization tab. 12.

Click re turn to exit the

13.

Click Sha de d G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce E dge s (

48


)


Altair Engineering

The surfaces should now appear solid rather than having only their edges displayed. 14.

Rotate, zoom, and pan to locate any errors in the geometry.

15.

Make note of the areas to be worked on: A surface that overhangs a round corner A missing surface

Surface overhanging an edge and a missing surface

Step 3: Delete the surface that overhangs the round corner. 1.

Enter the Delete in one of the following ways: From the menu bar click G e o m e try > D e le te > Surfa ce s . Press F2

2.

In the graphics area, select the overhanging surface shown in the previous figure.

3.

Click de le te e ntity to delete the selected entities.

4.


Altair Engineering


49

Step 4: Create surfaces to fill large gaps in the model. 1.

Click G e o m e try > C re a te > Surfa ce s > Spline / Fille r to open the to create the surface.

2.

Clear the Keep tangency check box. The Keep tangency option examines surfaces attached to the selected edges and tries to create a surface tangent to them. This helps to form a smooth transition to the surrounding surfaces.

3.

the entity type is set to lines.

4.

the Auto cre a te (fre e e dge s o nly ) check box is selected. The Auto create option simplifies the selection of the lines bounding the missing surface. Once a line is selected, HyperMesh automatically selects the remaining free edges that form a closed loop, and then create the filler surface.

5.

Zoom into the area indicated in the following image.

Area of missing surfaces

6.

Pick one of the red lines bounding one of the gaps (missing surfaces). HyperMesh automatically creates a filler surface to close the hole.

7.

Repeat sub-step 4.7 to create a filler surface in the other gap.

8.


50


Altair Engineering

Step 5: Set the global geometry cleanup tolerance to .01. 1.

Press O to go to the Options .

2.

Go to the geometry sub.

3.

In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.01 to stitch the surfaces with a gap less than 0.01.

4.


Step 6: Combine multiple free edge pairs at one time with the equivalence tool. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > E dit > Surfa ce E dge s > E quiv a le nce .

2.

Activate the equiv free edges only check box.

3.

Select s urfs > > a ll.

4.

that the cleanup tol= is set to 0.01, which is the global cleanup tolerance specified in the Options .

5.

Click the green equivalence button to combine any free edge pairs within the specified cleanup tolerance. Most of the red free edges are combined into green shared edges. The few remaining are caused by gaps larger than the cleanup tolerance.

Step 7: Combine free edge pairs, one pair at a time, using the toggle. 1.

Go to the toggle sub.

2.

In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.1.

3.

In the graphics area, click one of the free edges shown in the following image. Rotate and zoom into the area if needed. When the edge is selected, it will change from red to green, indicating that the free edge pair has been equivalenced.

Altair Engineering


51

Area where free edges need to be toggled

4.

Use toggle to equivalence the other edges shown in the image.

Step 8: Combine the remaining free edge pair using re pla ce. 1.

Go to the replace sub.

2.

In the Model Browser, click

3.

With the selector under moved edge: active, click the leftmost free edge in the graphics area.

next to the View2 saved view.

that the selector under retained edge: is now active. 4.

Select the rightmost red edge.

5.

In the cleanup tol = field, enter 0.1.

6.

Click re pla ce . Once the line is selected, HyperMesh posts a message similar to: "Gap = (.200018). Do you still wish to toggle?"

7.

Click Y e s to close the gap.

52


Altair Engineering

Edges to retain and move for replacement

8.


Step 9: Find and delete all duplicate surfaces. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > D e fe a ture > D uplica te s .

2.

Click s urfa ce s > > dis pla y e d.

3.

In the cleanup tol = field, type 0.01.

4.

Click find. The status bar displays the following message, "2 surfaces are duplicated."

5.

Click de le te to remove any duplicate surfaces.

Step 10: Observe the model again to identify any remaining free edges, or missing or duplicate surfaces. 1.

Use the topology display and shaded modes to perform this task. All of the edges in the model should be displayed as green shared edges, indicating that we have a completely enclosed thin solid part.

2.


Altair Engineering


53

Step 11 (Optional): Save your work. With the cleanup operations completed, save the model.

54


Altair Engineering

HM-2010: Generating a Midsurface In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create a midsurface Visualize the midsurface by using shading options and transparency This exercise uses CAD geometry data for a thin solid clip. Because of the small thickness of the part, it is assumed that it will be modeled for FEA as shell elements. The elements will be created on the mid-plane of the part.

Exercise: Generating a Midsurface

The surfaces in the model have no connectivity errors. This could be because the file was imported without errors or because the errors were corrected using HyperMesh. In this case, errors in the topology were repaired in the previous exercise (missing surfaces are re-created, duplicate surfaces are deleted, gaps are closed, etc.). You can use either the file created from the previous exercise, or open the new, c l i p_mi ds ur f ac e. hm, file. Either way, the geometry is at the point where you can use the Midsurface to generate a midsurface.

Step 1: Retrieve and view the model file. This exercise uses the model, clip_midsurface.hm. 1.

On the Visualization toolbar, change the visualization to Sha de d G e o m e try And

Surfa ce E dge s ( 2.

).

On the Visualization toolbar, set the Geometry Color drop-down menu to M ixe d ( ). Notice how the surfaces represent a solid part. These visualization techniques will be necessary for viewing the newly created midsurface.

Step 2: Generate a midsurface from midsurfa ce . 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > C re a te > M ids urfa ce s > Auto .

2.

that the closed solid option and the yellow surfs selector are active.

3.

Select one surface from the graphics area.

4.

Click e xtra ct to start the midsurface generation. The midsurface is created, and the surfaces are organized into a new Middle Surface component. Note that when a midsurface is created, transparency is turned on for all the other components in the model except the new Middle Surface component. The

Altair Engineering


55

next step covers how to control surface transparency.

Step 3: Review the part’s midsurface. 1.

From the Model Browser, turn off the display of geometry in the component named lvl10 to display only the Middle Surface component. The midsurfaces generated for the solid sections of the model using the auto-midsurface sub are shown in the following image.

Midsurface generated from a volume of surfaces

2.

Turn the geometry for lvl10 component back on from the Model Browser.

3.

On the Visualization toolbar, access the Transparency (

4.

With the comps selector active, select a line or surface of the lvl10 component in the graphics region.

).

You may need to zoom in on the model to select a valid entity. Since the entity selector is set to comps, selecting a line or surface in the component selects the entire component. 5.

In the , click the a rro w button on the right under transparency several times. You should see the surfaces in the lvl10 component becoming more and more transparent.

56


Altair Engineering

You can also drag the slider back and forth to control the level of transparency. 6.

Rotate, zoom, and pan to visualize the midsurface.

C lose-up of the midsurface with the lvl10 component set to full transparency

Step 4 (Optional): Save your work. Now that the midsurface has been created, it is a good time to save the model.

Summary You now have surfaces created on the mid-plane of the part. These surfaces can now be meshed or further modifications can be made to their topology, depending on the requirements of the analysis.

Altair Engineering


57

HM-2015: Auto-Midsurfacing with Insert Planes In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Use the insert planes option when midsurfacing. Manually correct gaps in an auto-generated midsurface using the plates edit function. This exercise uses CAD geometry data for a box with thin ribs inside of it. Because the geometry consists of thin planar sections, it is assumed that it will be modeled for FEA as shell elements. The elements will be created on the mid-planes of each section.

Exercise: Generating a Midsurface

Step 1: Retrieve and view the model file. 1.

Open Insert_planes.hm.

2.

Go to G e o m e try > C re a te > M ids urfa ce s > Auto m ids urfa ce .

3.

Make sure the switch below the surface selector in set to Closed solid, then select any surface.

58


Altair Engineering

4.

Click e xtra ctio n o ptio ns ... and toggle Keep sides geometry to Insert planes.

5.

Click R e turn, then E xtra ct.

6.

From the model browser hide the Body.1 component and review the generated midsurface. Note that some plates do not properly cross; we will use the plates edit functionality to take care of this.

Step 2: Use Plates Edit to resolve midsurface gaps 1.

From the model browser display the Body.1 component. Make sure geometry display mode is set to Mixed (

2.

).

From the Auto-midsurface , click on pla te s e dit.... Note that the browser becomes populated with plates that were automatically detected by the tool. Note: This will not occur if you skipped any part of the previous step.

Altair Engineering


59

3.

Hide Body.1 and Middle Surface.

4.

Review the various components: Select the front green face using the Full plate selector. All plates from this component will be selected. Since the whole side has been selected, we do not need to change anything. Right-click to hide those plates. Proceed the same way with the remaining 3 exterior sides. Select any face from the long interior rib:

As you can see this rib was split in three groups by the algorithm. We will reunite all

60


Altair Engineering

plates from this rib in one component. Continue selecting until all plates of the rib are selected.

5.

We are now ready to merge all those plates. This can be achieved by clicking the m e rge pla te s button or by middle-clicking in the graphical window. Notice how all plates are now the same color in a single component.

6.

Proceed the same way with the 2 remaining internal ribs. When this is done, hit return.

7.

From the model browser delete the existing Middle surface component then generate midsurface again as you did at the beginning of this tutorial.

8.

Review the generated midsurface. Notice how the plates come closer but still do not go the full length of the ribs. This is due to the holes that trim the plates.

We will use plates edit once more to address this. Enter the plates edit again after making sure to display the original geometry.

Altair Engineering


61

Step 3: Use Plates Edit a second time to resolve remaining gaps. Note how there are fewer plate components since we merged some previously.

We will need to tell the auto-midsurface algorithm not to trim the plates where the holes are. 1.

Hide all components except Not a plate side surface.

2.

Using the single surface selector, select the internal surfaces of the holes, paying attention that each hole has 2 internal surfaces.

3.

Once you have selected all four surfaces, click on the No t a trim s urfa ce button. Notice how the selected surfaces are organized in a new Not a trim surface component.

4.

When this is done, hit return.

5.

From the model browser, delete the existing Middle surface component, then generate a midsurface again as you did at the beginning of this tutorial.

6.

Review the generated midsurface.

62


Altair Engineering

Note that there is now a yellow edge where the plates meet, showing that they correctly intersect. Note also that it would have been possible to reorganize the plates and create the Not a trim surface component at the same time.

Step 4 (Optional): Save your work. Now that the midsurface has been created, it is a good time to save the model.

Summary You now have surfaces created on the mid-plane of the part. You used insert planes and plates edit to ensure that there were no erroneous gaps in the generated midsurfaces. These surfaces can now be meshed, or further modifications can be made to their topology, depending on the requirements of the analysis.

Altair Engineering


63

HM-2020: Simplifying Geometry In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Mesh the clip, review the mesh quality, and determine the features to be simplified Remove surface fillets Remove edge fillets Remove pinholes This exercise involves changing the shape of a part in order to simplify the geometry. Certain details of the shape, such as small holes or blends, may simply not be necessary for the analysis being performed. When these details are removed, the analysis can run more efficiently. Additionally, mesh quality is often improved as well. Changing the geometry to match the desired shape can also allow a mesh to be created more quickly.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, clip_defeature.hm. The model file has geometry that has been midsurfaced. (Surfaces have been created on the mid-plane of the part.) The model will be meshed using an element size of 2.5. You can assume a simple structural analysis will be run on the part, and thus does not require much detail. There are unnecessary features in he model that can be removed.

64


Altair Engineering

Step 1: Open and view the model file, clip_defeature.hm. Step 2: To easily work with the midsurface, turn off the display of the lvl10 component. If the lvl10 component is displayed, it needs to be turned off so that you can easily work on the midsurface geometry. (It may be on if you use the model you saved during the previous tutorial.) 1.

Access the Model Browser.

2.

Click

for the lvl10 component to turn off the geometry display.

Step 3: Mesh the clip to view mesh quality before defeaturing. 1.

Click Sha de d G e o m e try and Surfa ce E dge s (

Altair Engineering

).


65

2.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h.

3.

Set the selector type to surfs.

4.

In the element size = field, type 2.5.

5.

For mesh type:, select m ixe d.

6.

Switch the meshing mode from interactive to automatic.

7.

that the elems to surf comp toggle is set.

8.

Click s urfs > > dis pla y e d to select all displayed surfaces.

9.

Click m e s h to generate the mesh preview.

Initial mesh on the clip model

10.


Step 4 (Optional): Review the quality of the mesh. Take a minute to look over the mesh that was created. Note the areas that have irregular, poor quality mesh. Also, use the Check Elems to evaluate the minimum length check of the elements.

66


Altair Engineering

Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Note the locations where the mesh was not created in neat rows and columns of quads. 1.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > C he ck E le m e nts .

2.

Access the 2-d sub.

3.

In the length < field, type 1.

4.

Click le ngth to evaluate the minimum length. Many of the elements failing the length test are located around the fillets of this model.

Elements failing the length check

Note:

You may need to change the geometry display to wireframe for better visualization of element quality. For this, click W ire fra m e G e o m e try (

5.

).


Step 5: Remove the four small pinholes. Pinholes are closed free edge loops within a surface. Pinholes do not need to be circular. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > D e fe a ture > Pinho le s to open the Defeature

Altair Engineering


67

. 2.

In the diameter < field, type 3.0.

3.

Select s urfs > > a ll.

4.

Click find to identify the pinholes having a diameter of 3 or less. Notice the xP symbol at the center of the four circular holes. These symbols are highlighted in white, indicating they are pinholes identified by HyperMesh for removal.

Pinholes identified using a 3 mm diameter

5.

Click de le te to remove the selected pinholes in the model. The selected pinholes are removed and replaced by fixed points located at the center of the original pinholes. Notice that the mesh updates to follow the changes in the geometry.

Step 6: Remove all surface fillets in the clip. 1.

Go to the surf fillets sub.

68


Altair Engineering

2.

If the surfaces are not shaded, click Sha de d G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce E dge s (

3.

For find fillets in selected, click s urfs >> dis pla y e d.

4.

In the min radius field, type 2.0.

5.

Click find to identify all the surface fillets with radius of 2 or greater.

).

Surface fillets identified for removal

6.

Click re m o v e .

Step 7: Automatically identify and remove rounded corners of surfaces. You should still be in the Defeature . 1.

Go to the edge fillets sub.

2.

Click s urfs > > dis pla y e d.

3.

In the min radius field, type 1.0.

4.

Set the bottom switch to a ll to find all the fillets.

Altair Engineering


69

5.

Click find. The edge fillets that meet the filter criteria are identified on the screen with an F symbol and radial lines marking the fillet beginning and end.

Edge fillets identified for removal

6.

Notice that the selector moves down to the fillets entity selector.

7.

Right-click on one of the F fillet markers on the screen to deselect the fillet.

8.

Click re m o v e to delete the selected edge fillets. All the fillets are removed.

Step 8 (Optional): Save your work. Now that the model has been simplified, it is a good time to save the model.

Summary The model is now represented in a much simpler form that suits the analysis that will be performed. Holes, surface fillets, and edge fillets were removed that were considered too small to be captured by the desired element size of 2.5.

70


Altair Engineering

HM-2030: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Mesh the part to determine poor element quality Suppress small edges Split surfaces Remove interior fixed points Replace closely placed fixed points Create final mesh Topological details of the geometry may affect the quality of the mesh created from the surfaces. Some of these details may not reflect any major feature of the part’s shape, and can be removed without concern. When modifying the topology affects the shape of the surfaces, a compromise must be made between the part shape and the element quality necessary for the analysis. Other times, adding topological features that do not change the shape of the part may actually help create a better quality mesh.

Exercise: Refining Topology to Achieve a Quality Mesh

Step 1: Open the model file, clip_refine.hm. The model for this exercise is clip_refine.hm. Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.).

Step 2: Create a preliminary mesh. 1.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h to open the Automesh .

2.

Set the selector type to surfs.

3.

Go to the size and bias sub.

4.

In the element size = field, type 2.5.

5.

For mesh type:, select m ixe d.

6.

Switch the meshing mode from interactive to automatic.

7.


8.

Click m e s h to mesh the surfaces.

Altair Engineering


71

Initial mesh on the defeatured clip model

Step 3: Review the mesh quality. 1.

Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Note the locations where the mesh was not created in rows and columns of quads.

2.

From the menu bar, select M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > C he ck E le m e nts to open the Check Elements .

3.

Go to the 2-d sub.

4.


5.

Click the le ngth button to evaluate the minimum length.

6.

Note the elements that failed the check. The topology will be edited to correct of some of these, and the others will be left as is.

7.


8.

Use the Model Browser to turn off the display of the elements in the Middle Surface component.

Step 4: Remove short edges by combining fixed points.

72


Altair Engineering

1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > E dit > Fixe d Po ints > R e pla ce to open the .

2.

that the active selector is set to moved points.

3.

Select the lower fixed point as indicated in the following image.

4.

Once the point is selected, activate the retained point button.

5.

Select the upper fixed point as indicated in the following image.

6.

Once the second point is selected, click re pla ce .

Selecting fixed points to be combined

Step 5: Remove the fixed points interior to all surfaces. You should still be in the Points . 1.

Go to the suppress sub and choose the at cursor option.

2.

Select the four fixed points as shown in the following image. Each fixed point will be deleted as you select it. These fixed points are left over from a defeaturing operation where small holes (pinholes) were removed. They could remain without greatly sacrificing the element quality, given the element size used for the mesh, but the mesh should be better without them.

Altair Engineering


73

Fixed points to be removed

3.


Step 6: Add edges to the surfaces to control the mesh pattern. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > E dit > Surfa ce s > Trim with No de s to open the .

2.

Under node normal to edge, set the active selector to node.

3.

Zoom into the area indicated below and select the indicated fixed point.

4.

With the active selector now on lines, select the line shown in the following image. Once both the point and line are selected, an edge will be created from the location of the fixed point perpendicular to the line.

74


Altair Engineering

Select fixed point and line to split the surface.

5.

Repeat sub-steps 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 for the following point and line.

Altair Engineering


75


6.



7.


76


Altair Engineering

Select fixed point and line to split the surface

Step 7: Add edges to the surfaces to control the mesh pattern. 1.

Go to the trim with surfs/planes sub.

2.

In the with plane column, set the active selector to surfs.

3.

Select the surfaces indicated in the following image.

Altair Engineering


77

Surfaces to be selected for splitting

4.

If necessary, toggle the direction selector to N1, N2, and N3. Click N1 to make the selector active.

5.

Press and hold your left mouse button, and then move it over the edge indicated in the following figure. Once over the line, the cursor will change to a square with a dot in the center, . Release your mouse button. Click two points anywhere along the edge. Do not click a third.

Nodes will be placed on the line for N1 and N2. 6.

Press F4 on the keyboard to enter the Distance .

7.

Go to the three nodes sub.

8.

As in 7.6, press and hold your left mouse button, and then move it over the edge of the hole, as indicated in the following image. Once over the line, the cursor will change to a square with a dot in the center. Release your mouse button.

78


Altair Engineering

Select fixed point and line to split the surface

9.

Click three points anywhere along the edge. Temporary nodes will be placed on the line representing N1, N2, and N3. Note that the technique used to create nodes to select where none existed before can be used in any place where nodes need to be selected but don’t exist in the model. You can create nodes in this manner on lines, surfaces and elements. For more details, see the HyperMesh online help. Pick the index and type, Picking Nodes on Geometry or Elements.

10.

Click circle ce nte r to create a node at the center of the hole.

11.

Click re turn to return to the Surface Edit .

12.

Click B to make it the active selector.

13.

Select the node that was just created at the center of the hole.

14.

Click trim .

15.

Click re turn to exit the main menu. The surfaces are trimmed through the center of the hole.

Step 8: Suppress shared edges causing a small edge. 1.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > Surfa ce E dge s > (Un)Suppre s s to open the .

Altair Engineering


79

2.

Select each of the lines in the image below using your left mouse button and click s uppre s s . Each line will become suppressed (blue) as you click s uppre s s .

Surface edges to suppress by toggling

Step 9: Remesh the part. Remesh the surfaces of the part, using the automatic mode, a size of 2.5, and the mixed mesh type. 1.

Use the Model Browser to display the elements in the Middle Surface component.

2.

Access the Automesh .

3.

that elem size = is set to 2.5 and the mesh type is set to mixed.

4.

Click s urfs > > dis pla y e d to select all displayed surfaces.

5.

Click m e s h.

Step 10: Review the mesh quality. 1.

Take a minute to rotate, zoom, and pan the model to review the mesh that was created. Note that the mesh now consists completely of rows and columns of quads.

80


Altair Engineering

2.

Enter the Check Elements .

3.

Go to the 2-d sub

4.


5.

Click the le ngth button to evaluate the minimum length. Note the elements that failed the check. There are only two elements that fail the check, and these fail the check because of the shape of the part. However, they are not too small compared to the global element size, so you can leave them as they are.

6.


7.

Go to the QI optimize sub.

8.

that elem size = is set to 2.5 and the mesh type is set to mixed.

9.

Click e dit crite ria .

10.

In the Target element size field, type 2.500.

11.

Click Apply and O K.

12.

Select s urfs > > dis pla y e d to select all displayed surfaces.

13.

Click m e s h. Note that the old mesh is replaced by the new mesh.

14.

If there is a message saying, "There is a conflict between the requested element size and quality criteria ideal element size," click the button, R e co m pute qua lity crite ria using size of 2.5.

15.

Access the Quality Index by clicking M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > Q ua lity Inde x.

16.

Go to pg1 and that the comp. QI is 0.01. This low value indicates that the mesh is good quality. The higher the number, the lower the mesh quality.

Step 11 (Optional): Save your work. The part is now meshed and ready to be set up for an analysis. Save the model, if desired.

Altair Engineering


81

HM-2040: Creating and Editing Line Data In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create circle, arc, line, and tangent lines Duplicate and translate lines Edit lines by splitting and displaying their IDs Delete redundant arcs and lines Duplicate and reflect an arc Create a surface square and two parallel lines on an X-Y plane Create a fillet between two lines Sometimes CAE s need to create models from sketches where there is no pre-existing geometry. The tools in this tutorial will help you accomplish that task.

Exercise: Creating and Editing Line Data

This exercise teaches you how to create lines and surfaces.

Step 1: Create a component collector to geometry. 1.

Access the Create Component dia one of the following ways: Right click in the Model Browser and click C re a te > C o m po ne nt From the menu bar, select C o lle cto rs > C re a te > C o m po ne nts .

2.

For Name = type ge o m e try .

3.

Click the Color: swatch and choose yellow from the list of colors.

4.

Click C re a te .

Step 2: Create nodes. 1.

On the standard toolbar, click Is o m e tric Vie w, (

2.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > C re a te > No de s > X Y Z to access the Create Nodes in the XYZ sub.

3.

Create five nodes by entering the X, Y, and Z coordinates from the following table and click cre a te no de for each of the nodes.

82


).


Altair Engineering

Node

X

Y

Z

1

0

0

0

2

0

0

25

3

0

0

37

4

0

5

25

5

0

5

-2

4.

Click re turn.

5.

Press f to fit the model to the model to the screen.

Step 3: Display the node IDs. 1.

Click G e o m e try > C he ck > No de s > Num be rs to access the Numbers .

2.

Change the entity type to no de s .

3.

Click no de s > > a ll to select all of the nodes.

4.

Click on to dis pla y a ll the node IDs.

5.

Click re turn.

Step 4: Create a circle. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > C re a te > Line s > C ircle C e nte r a nd R a dius to access the Circles and the center & radius sub.

2.

With the active selector set to node list, pick node 2 from the graphics area. This will be the location of the circle’s center.

3.

Switch (

) the orientation vector to the x-axis.

4.

For radius=, specify 5.

5.

Click cre a te .

6.

Remain in the Circles: Center and Radius sub.

Step 5: Create an arc. 1.

Click the Arc C e nte r a nd R a dius icon

2.

With the active selector set to node list, pick node 2 from the graphics area.

to access the center & radius sub.

This will be the center of the arc.

Altair Engineering


83

3.

that the orientation vector is set to x-axis.

4.

Pick the node with ID number 2 again as the base for the axis of rotation.

5.

For Angle = specify 180.

6.

For Radius = specify 2.5.

7.

For Offset = specify 90.

8.

Click cre a te to create an arc.

9.

From the standard toolbar, click R e a r (

).

Step 6: Create a line. 1.

Click the Line a r No de s icon

2.

Pick the nodes with ID number 4 and node 5 in node list.

3.

Click cre a te to create a line between nodes 4 and 5.

4.

Click re turn.

to open the sub.

Step 7: Duplicate and translate lines. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > Tra ns la te > Line s to access the Translate .

2.

Change the entity type to line s .

84


Altair Engineering

3.

Pick the line that was created between nodes 4 and 5.

4.

Click line s > > duplica te > > curre nt co m p from the extended menu to copy the new line into the current component (Geometry).

5.

Click the pla ne and v e cto r collector switch and select y - a xis .

6.

Click m a gnitude = and enter 10.0.

7.

Click tra ns la te - .

8.

Click re turn.

Step 8: Edit lines by splitting at a line. 1.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > E dit > Line s > Split a t Line to access the Line Edit .

2.

With the lines selector active, pick the circle .

3.

Click cut line and pick the line between node 4 and node 5.

4.

Click s plit. The circle has one quarter split off from the rest.

5.

Repeat this procedure, picking the remaining 3/4 arc of the circle and the other line that was just translated.

6.

Click re turn.

Step 9: Display the line IDs.

Altair Engineering


85

1.

Go to the Numbers .

2.


3.

Click line s > > a ll to select all lines.

4.

Click on to dis pla y a ll the line IDs.

5.

Click re turn.

Step 10: Delete a redundant arc. 1.

Access the Delete in one of the following ways: From the Collectors toolbar, click Delete (

)

Press F2 on the keyboard. 2.


3.

Select the lower semi-circle from the graphics area.

4.

Click de le te e ntity to delete the redundant arc.

5.

Click re turn.

Step 11: Duplicate and reflect an arc. 1.

From the menu bar, click Geometry > Reflect > Lines to access the Reflect

2.


3.

Choose the arc (line ID 2) from the graphics area.

4.

Click the pla ne a nd v e cto r collector switch and select z-axis.

5.

Pick node 2 as the base node.

6.

Click line s > > duplica te , then original comp from the extended entity selection menu to copy the new line into the current component (Geometry).

7.

Click re fle ct to create the lower arc.

8.

Click re turn.

86


Altair Engineering

Step 12: Create two tangent lines. 1.

Lines , at tangents sub ( G e o m e try > C re a te > Line s > Ta nge nt).

2.

Select the node with ID number 3.

3.

Click the line selector to make it active.

4.

Select the semi-circular line with ID number 8. Note: Line ID may be different, depending on whether you needed to perform the split/ delete/duplicate tasks more than once.

Altair Engineering


87

5.

Click cre a te . There are two tangent lines on the screen.

6.

Pick one of the tangents.

7.

Repeat steps 4-5.

8.

Select the other tangent.

9.

Click re turn to exit the tangent sub.

Step 13: Redisplay the line IDs. 1.

Go to the Numbers .

2.


3.

Click line s , then all from the extended entity selection menu.

4.

Click on to dis pla y a ll the line IDs.

5.


Step 14: Split curves by tangent line and delete redundant line. 1.

Go to the Line Edit and enter split at line sub ( G e o m e try > E dit > Line s > Split a t Line ).

2.

Pick semi-circular line 8 for lines and tangent line 12 for cut line. Note:

Line ID may be different.

3.

Click s plit to split line 8 with line 12.

4.

Repeat steps 3-5 in order to cut curved line 8 with tangent line 13 in Line Edit .

5.

Press the F2 key to jump into Delete from Line Edit .

6.

Select the curved lines between tangent lines 12 and 13.

7.

Click de le te entity to delete the curves.

8.

Click re turn twice to exit the s.

88


Altair Engineering

Step 15: Create a component collector for surfaces. 1.

Right click in the Model Browser and click C re a te > C o m po ne nt.

2.

Click Name: and enter surfaces.

3.

Click the Color: and select purple from the list of swatches.

4.

Click C re a te .

Step 16: Create a surface square on an X-Y plane.

Altair Engineering


89

1.

From the main menu, select the 2D page, then select planes to open the Planes .

2.

Go to the square sub.

3.

Set the orientation vector to z - a xis .

4.

For base node, choose the node with ID number 1 to be the base reference node.

5.

Switch from m e s h, ke e p s urf to s urfa ce o nly .

6.

For size = enter 30.

7.

Click cre a te to create a square surface.

8.


Step 17: Create a line that connects two parallel lines on an X-Y plane. 1.

Click G e o m e try > C re a te > Line s > Inte rs e ct.

2.

Select z - a xis (located at the bottom-center of the , shared between the controls for elements with plane and lines with plane) to represent the intersection plane. The reason for choosing the z-axis is that you want to create the line on the X-Y plane.

3.

For ba s e , choose the node with ID number 1 to be the base node.

4.

For line list, choose the two straight lines that are perpendicular to the X-Y plane. A bold line displayed on the screen represents the result.

5.

Click cre a te to create the line.

6.


Step 18: Switch the current working component surfaces to ge o me try. 1.

In the Model Browser right-click the ge o m e try component and click M a ke C urre nt. From this point onwards any element or geometry created will be placed in the geometry component collector.

Step 19: Extend a line to a surface edge. 1.

Click the Is o m e tric Vie w

2.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > Line s > E xte nd to open the .

3.

Toggle from distance = to to :.

4.

Change the entity type from node to line .

90


icon.


Altair Engineering

5.

Activate the top line selector and pick the line created in step 17--the line that es through node 1-- as the line to be extended. A red V marks the beginning of the line to be extended.

6.

Activate the lower line selector and--with the view still in iso1--select the lower-right edge of the purple plane.

7.

Click e xte nd -. You can see the line is extended to reach one surface edge.

8.

Click re turn to exit the . The result should resemble the following image.

Altair Engineering


91

Step 20: Create a fillet between two lines. 1.

From the menu bar, click Geometry > Create > Lines > Fillet to access the Lines . You will use the create option.

2.

Check Trim o rigina l line s .

3.

For Radius=, enter 5.

4.

For 1st line, pick the vertical line through which the line extended in step 19 es.

5.

For 2nd line, pick the extended line from step 19. "Please select fillet quadrant" displays in the status bar. HyperMesh is asking you to select a reference location for the fillet.

6.

Pick the upper-right X for the fillet quadrant, as shown in the image. HyperMesh immediately creates a fillet on the screen.

7.

Click re turn to exit the Lines .

92


Altair Engineering

Step 21: Trim a line by plane and delete a redundant line segment. 1.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > Line s > Split a t Pla ne .

2.

Go to the split at plane sub.

3.

With the lines selector active, select the vertical line that does not have a fillet.

4.

Set the orientation vector to z - a xis .

5.

Choose no de 1 as the base node.

6.

Click s plit to split line 4 by the X-Y plane.

Altair Engineering


93

7.

Press the F2 key to access the Delete .

8.

Switch the entity type to line s .

9.

Choose the small line segment under the X-Y plane, and click de le te e ntity to remove the line segment.

10.

Click re turn twice to exit the s.

Step 22: Remove all temp nodes. 1.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > D e le te > No de s to access the Temp Nodes .

2.

Click cle a r a ll to remove all temp nodes.

3.

Click re turn to return to exit the .

Step 23: Change the rendering mode. 1.

On the Visualization toolbar, click Sha de d G e o m e try (

).

The plane (purple) becomes shaded instead of wire frame.

94


Altair Engineering

Step 24: Export all geometry as an IGES file. 1.

Click File > E xpo rt > G e o m e try to open the Export tab.

2.

Click E xpo rt ge o m e try (

3.

Click File type: Ige s .

4.

Enter a name in the File: field.

5.

Click E xpo rt to save your file.

) on the Export tab.

The IGES file you have generate can be shared with other CAD packages such as UG,

Altair Engineering


95

Catia, and ProE.

96


Altair Engineering

HM-2050: Creating Surfaces from Elements In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Generate surfaces from existing elements Plot elements Control what surfaces are created The surfaces created in this process are regular surfaces that can be used for geometry editing (for changes to a design) and meshing, and to export geometry information (in reverse engineering applications, for example). This is particularly useful if you are trying to obtain geometry information (surfaces) from a model containing elements only.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, fe_to_surf.hm. The model is the tetrahedral mesh of a bracket. It is organized into a single component, and does not contain any entities besides the solid elements.

Step 1: Open the model fe_to_surf.hm.

Altair Engineering


97

The model is loaded in wireframe mode. Shade the elements to review the shape of the bracket. This solid mesh was obtained by running the HyperMesh tetramesher on a tria mesh of the surfaces defining the initial part. In this tutorial, you will reverse this process by obtaining the shell elements and then the surfaces. You can then, for example, remesh the surfaces with a different element size, or export them as an IGES file.

Step 2: Use the faces to generate shell elements on the outside of the solid mesh 1.

From the Tool page, select the Faces .

2.

With the entity selector set to comps, click any element. The element is temporarily highlighted, signifying that the component has been selected. The tolerance field can be left unchanged, as it does not influence the creation of face elements.

3.

Click find fa ce s . HyperMesh creates shell elements on the free faces of the solid elements (faces that are not shared with any other element), and places them into the ^faces component collector.

4.

In the Model Browser, turn off display of the elements by clicking the element icon next to the tetras component.

98


Altair Engineering

Faces (shell) elements

Step 3: Obtain surfaces from elements. Use the Surfaces and from FE sub on the tria (faces) elements to obtain surfaces and understand the behavior of the . Start by creating a component collector for the new surfaces using the collectors . 1.

Right click in the model browser and click C re a te > C o m po ne nt to create a component collector with the name surfaces. Select any color, and do not assign any property or material to the component.

2.

From the menu bar click G e o m e try > C re a te > Surfa ce s > fro m FE to open the from FE sub.

3.

Click e le m s > > dis pla y e d to select the displayed elements.

4.

Toggle to Auto D e te ct Fe a ture s and M e s h B a s e d Auto To l. Auto detect features will automatically create 1-D plot elements at feature lines. Features are created where the normals of adjacent elements vary more than the feature angle specified in the Options . Once the feature lines are created, it also combines open-ended features to form closed loops. These features are used as delineations for the new surfaces being created. The mesh-based autotolerance option allows the tool to determine the tolerance as a

Altair Engineering


99

factor of the average element size. The new surfaces created are allowed to deviate from the existing mesh no more than the specified/calculated tolerance value. 5.

Set Surface Complexity to 5 using the slider bar.

6.

Click cre a te . It may take up to 40 seconds to create surfaces.

7.

Turn off the display of all elements to review the surfaces that were created. Notice how only two surfaces (from over 70) were created. Take some time to review the surface by rotating and zooming in and out the model. The delineation of the surfaces may or may not correspond to what you may expect or wish to obtain. For example, you may want to have three separate surfaces in some areas of the model and fewer surfaces in other areas.

8.

In the Model Browser restore previously saved views 1 through 5 where delineation lines are not intended.

9.

Delete the surfaces that were generated by pressing F2 and using the Delete .

10.

Turn on the display of the elements in the ^faces component.

In this section, you have learned how to use the FE surf to generate some surfaces that can later be meshed. You have also seen that when the surface generation engine is asked to create surface delineation automatically, the surfaces obtained may not necessarily have the specific delineation you wish to obtain. In order to obtain specific delineation, plot elements can be used to define the boundaries of the various surfaces, and can be supplied to the engine.

Step 4: Capture features with plot elements. Delineating the surfaces to be created is an essential step in obtaining the desired surfaces. This level of control is achieved by supplying the surface generator with some plot elements, which will indicate what the boundaries of the various surfaces should be. This function works well only when the selected plot elements form closed loops. The new surfaces should have boundaries that respect the features of the tria mesh as the tria mesh captures, to some extent, the features of the initial geometry. Generate plot elements that correspond to the features of the mesh. You can use the edges, features, and edit element s to create plot elements. Using the Features is one of the most automated ways of generating plot elements, although it does not always create the features as desired. Some manual methods will be used to modify the results of automatic feature creation. Use the features to automatically generate plot elements capturing the features of the tria mesh (^faces component). Use a break angle of 30 degrees. 1.

Click the fe a ture s button to access the fe a ture s . This is a shortcut to this . You can also find features in the Tool page by selecting the features sub.

100


Altair Engineering

2.

Set the entity selector to e le m s .

3.

Click e le m s and select dis pla y e d.

4.

Enter 30 in the angle = field.

5.

Select the a dv a nce d a na ly s is option. This option performs further analysis on the features created based on the angle and combines and extends them to create closed loops.

6.

Click fe a ture s .

Plot elements representing features

This generates plot elements representing the features of the mesh (see previous image). These plots elements are automatically created in a component collector named ^feature. For detailed information, view additional details on the feature . 7.

In the Model Browser restore previously saved views 1 through 5 where the features are not as intended.

8.

Click v ie w1 in the Views folder to restore view1.

Altair Engineering


101

Notice how too many plot elements are created to define the boundary in that area. You will try to remove some to reduce the clutter. 9.

From the features , select the e dit sub.

10.

Click e le m for the element features to remove and pick the plot elements as shown in the following image. As the plot elements are selected, the entire row of elements to the next intersection is selected.

11.

Click re m o v e .

102


Altair Engineering

Features to be removed

Step 5: Add a new delineation feature 1.

Remain in the features , edit sub.

2.

Click the no de lis t for nodes to add features.

3.

Click the no de lis t and choose by pa th.

4.

Select the nodes as shown in following image. All the nodes in the path between these two nodes are selected.

5.

Click a dd. A new feature line is created.

Altair Engineering


103

Nodes to create a new feature

6.

Click v ie w2 in the Model Browser restore view2. Notice that the features created here are of zigzag pattern. You will delete those and create new smooth features:

7.

From the features , select the e dit sub.

8.

Click e le m for the element features to remove and pick the plot elements as shown in the following image. As you pick these plot elements, the entire row of elements to the next intersection is selected.

9.

Click re m o v e .

104


Altair Engineering

Features to be removed

10.

Follow the procedure to add two new feature lines (see following image).

Altair Engineering


105

New features added

11.

Repeat the previous cleanup operations to create features to your needs. The following image shows an example of the final features. Notice that too many features in the cylindrical holes have been removed.

106


Altair Engineering

Model with corrected features

You created plot elements that will be used in the surfaces to indicate the boundaries of the surfaces to generate. These plot elements were generated in an attempt to capture the features of the tria mesh. The number and location of plot elements generated using this approach is directly dependent on the value that is chosen for the feature angle. In most situations, a lower feature angle will generate more plot elements while a higher one will yield fewer plot elements. It is often useful to experiment with different values for the feature angle as one value may bring you much closer to the desired set of plot elements than another, significantly limiting the amount of subsequent editing required. In this section, you learned how to create and edit plot elements using the features . The creation process was straightforward, but required some editing in order to obtain a set of plot elements forming closed loops only. Various tools are available to make the editing process as easy as possible and you used the ones that would allow you to get to your goal the most effectively. Now that both the shell elements and the plot elements delineating the surfaces are available, you will generate surfaces on the entire model. 12.

In the Model Browser, right-click the s urfa ce s component and click M a ke C urre nt.

Altair Engineering


107

Step 6: Generate surfaces using the Surfaces 's fro m FE sub 1.

Click the upper-most e le m s selector, and select by co lle cto r from the extended entity selection dialog.

2.

Select the ^ fa ce s component and click s e le ct to return to the .

3.

Click the toggle next to auto detect features to be set to fe a ture e dge s s e le cto r.

4.

Click fe a ture e dge s selector, and select by co lle cto r.

5.

Select the ^ fe a ture component and click s e le ct.

6.

Leave all other options unchanged.

7.

Click cre a te .

8.

Turn off the display of all elements to review the surfaces that were generated (see following image).

Surfaces generated

The surfaces generated could now be exported or used for any surface editing or meshing operation. This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model or save it to your working directory for your own reference.

108


Altair Engineering

As this tutorial showed, this is a powerful tool in generating surface data where none is available, but needed. It also provides you with a great deal of control over the surfaces that are generated through the use of plot elements. Automated and semi-automated ways let you create and edit plot elements quickly and easily.

Altair Engineering


109

HM-2060: Creating and Editing Solid Geometry n this tutorial, you will learn: What solid geometry is What topology is What 3-D topology looks like Solids are geometric entities that define a three-dimensional volume. Geometric entities are defined as follows: Point: 0 dimensional; has only x, y, and z coordinates Line: one-dimensional; has length, can be curved through three-dimensional space Surface: two-dimensional; has an area Solid: three-dimensional; has a volume The use of solid geometry is helpful when dividing a part into multiple volumes--for example, to divide a part into simple, mappable regions for hex meshing.

Exercise: Creating and editing solid geometry

This exercise uses the model file, solid_geom.hm.

110


Altair Engineering

Step 1: Retrieve model file, solid_geom.hm. 1.

From the menu bar click File > O pe n > M o de l.

2.

Select solid_geom.hm and click O pe n.

Step 2: Create solid geometry from the bounding surfaces. 1.

From the menu bar click G e o m e try > C re a te > So lids > B o unding Surfa ce s .

2.

that the Auto select solid surfaces option is checked.

3.

Select one surface on the part. All of the surfaces should automatically be selected.

4.

Click cre a te to create the solid. The status bar indicates that a solid has been created. The solids are identified by thicker lines than surfaces.

5.


Step 3: Create a solid geometry cylinder using primitives. 1.

From the menu bar click G e o m e try > C re a te > So lids > C y linde r Full.

2.

Click bo tto m ce nte r and select one of the temporary nodes (see following image). The cursor automatically advances to the normal vector button.

Altair Engineering


111

3.

Select the remaining temporary node shown in the image.

4.

For Base radius= enter 1.5.

5.

For Height= enter 25.

6.

Click cre a te . A solid cylinder is created in the middle of the first solid that was created.

7.


Step 4: Subtract the cylinder’s volume from the rest of the part. 1.

From the menu bar click G e o m e try > E dit > So lids > B o o le a n to open the Edit Solids .

2.

that operation type: is set to s im ple (combine all).

3.

Set operation: to A- B (remove B from A).

4.

With the solids entity selector for A: active, select the original solid. that the cursor advances to solids next to B:.

5.

Select the solid cylinder created in step 3.

6.

Click ca lcula te .

7.

To confirm the material has been removed, click s ha de d ge o m e try with e dge s , and rotate the model to inspect the part.

112


,

Altair Engineering

Step 5: Split the solid geometry using bounding lines. You should still be in the Solid Edit . 1.

Go to the trim with lines sub.

2.

Under with bounding lines:, activate the s o lids entity selector, and click anywhere on the model to select it.

3.

Activate the line s entity selector and, in the graphics area, select the lines shown in the following image.

Altair Engineering


113

4.

Click trim to trim the model. A plane was trimmed. Note that two solids now intersect.

Step 6: Split the solid geometry using a cut line. You should still be in the Solid Edit , trim with lines sub. 1.

Under with cut line:, activate the s o lids entity selector, and select the small, tetrahedral shaped solid created in step 5.

114


Altair Engineering

2.

In the Model Browser click the

3.

Click dra g a cut line .

4.

Pick two locations on screen such that they define the end points of a line that roughly divides the tetrahedral solid in half, as shown, following.

5.

Click the middle-mouse button to split the solid.

6.

Select the half of the original tetrahedral solid as shown in the following image.

Altair Engineering

next to the View1 view in the Views folder.


115

7.

Use with cut line: to split the solid as shown in the following image.

8.

Select the solid shown in the following image.

116


Altair Engineering

9.


next to View2 to set the view.

10.

Use with cut line: to split the solid as shown in the following image.

Step 7: Merge solids together. You should still be in the Solid Edit . 1.

Go to the merge sub.

2.

With the solids entity selector under to be merged: active, select the three solids shown in the following image.

Altair Engineering


117

3.

Click merge to merge the solids. The resulting solids in the tetrahedral area should look like the following image. There should be two solid entities, with one of them being hexahedral in shape in the corner.

Step 8: Split the solid geometry with a -defined plane. You should still be in the Solid Edit . 1.

Go to the trim with plane/surf sub.

2.


3.

With the solids entity selector under with plane: active, select the large solid representing the majority of the part.

118


next to the View3 to restore the view.


Altair Engineering

4.

Set the plane selector to N1, N2, N3.

5.

With N1 active, press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse cursor over one of the two edges shown in the following image. The edge should highlight.

6.

Release the mouse button, and left-click in the middle of the edge. A green temp node appears at the location to indicate the selection for N1.The plane selector is advanced to the N2 selection.

7.

In the same manner, highlight the other line shown in the image and select two nodes along its length. Your selection should look similar to the following image.

Altair Engineering


119

8.

Click trim to trim the solid.

Step 9: Split the solid geometry with a swept line. You should still be in the Solid Edit . 1.

Go to the trim with lines sub.

2.

With the solids entity selector under with sweep lines: active, select the solid with the cylinder removed.

3.

Activate the lines entity selector and select the edges shown in the image below.

120


Altair Engineering

4.

Under sweep to:, switch the plane selector from N1, N2, N3 to x- a xis .

5.

that the is set to s we e p a ll below the plane selector.

6.


Step 10: Split the solid geometry with a principal plane. You should still be in the Solid Edit . 1.

Go to the trim with plane/surf sub.

2.

With the solids entity selector under with plane: active, select the solid with the cylinder removed.

3.

Switch the plane selector from N1, N2, N3 to z - a xis .

4.

Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse cursor over the edge shown in the following image. The edge should highlight.

Altair Engineering


121

5.

Release the mouse button, and left-click anywhere along the edge.

6.

A purple temp node appears at the location to indicate the selection for the base node.

7.


8.


Step 11: Split the solid geometry by creating surfaces inside the solids. 1.

From the menu bar click G e o m e try > C re a te > Surfa ce s > Spline / Fille r to open the Surfaces .

2.

Deactivate the Auto cre a te (fre e e dge s o nly ) and ke e p ta nge ncy options.

3.

Select the five lines shown in the following image:

122


Altair Engineering

4.

Click cre a te to create the surface.

5.


6.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > So lids > Trim with Pla ne / Surfa ce s to open the Solid Edit .

7.

Under with surfs:, with the s o lid entity selector active, select the solid in the graphics area.

8.

Under with surfs:, with the s urfs entity selector active, select the surface in the graphics area that was just created.

9.

Click trim .

10.

Click re turn.

11.

Click G e o m e try > C re a te > Surfa ce s > Spline / Fille r to open the Surface .

12.

Select the four lines shown in the following image.

Altair Engineering


123

13.

Click cre a te .

14.

Click re turn.

15.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > So lids > Trim with Pla ne / Surfa ce to open the Solid Edit .

16.

Under with surfs: activate s o lids and click the solid in the graphics area.

17.

Under with surfs:, with the s urfs entity selector active, select the surface in the graphics area that was just created.

18.

Uncheck the e xte nd trim m e r box.

19.

Click trim .

20.


Step 12: Suppress extraneous edges on the part. 1.

Click G e o m e try > E dit >Surfa ce E dge >(Un)Suppre s s to open the Edge Edit .

3.

Select line s > > by ge o m s .

4.

With the solids entity selector active, select the four solids shown in the following image.

124


Altair Engineering

5.

Click a dd to s e le ctio n.

6.

Set breakangle = to 45.

7.

Click s uppre s s to suppress the edges.

8.


Altair Engineering


125

HM-2070: Geometry and Mesh Editing Using the Quick Edit This tutorial will explore the geometry and mesh editing functions available in the Quick Edit . The Quick Edit provides easy access to a number of geometry editing mesh editing tools. More than a dozen functions are presented in this single . Many of the functions can be found in other HyperMesh s. These tools may be used before creating the surface mesh to simplify geometry, correct geometry errors, or add additional geometric features to control the mesh generation. Additionally, if a mesh already exists on the geometry, you have the option of automatically remeshing the geometry as you modify it. This tutorial uses the model called base_bracket.hm.

Exercise

Step 1: Load the model and create a baseline mesh. 1.

Open the model base_bracket.hm.

2.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto m e s h to open the Automesh .

3.

that the size and bias sub is selected.

4.

Set element size = to 0.1.

5.

Set mesh type: to m ixe d.

6.

that elements to surf comp is selected.

7. 8. 9.

126

Click s urfs > > dis pla y e d to select the displayed surfaces. Click m e s h. Click re turn twice to exit the .


Altair Engineering

Next, you will start refining the geometry and improving the mesh quality. HyperMesh has the ability to automatically remesh a surface if any topology changes are made to the geometry. This is controlled by a setting in the Preferences / Meshing Options under topology revision. The default option is to remesh the surface; however, one can opt to keep or delete the mesh instead. For the base component, your focus will be to improve the mesh quality around the large holes in the side surface and the mounting holes on the flanges. The oblong holes will be removed. On the top surface, the mesh quality around the five small holes will be improved by trimming in a "washer" surface around the holes.

Step 2: Simplify the geometry by removing unnecessary holes. 1.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > Q uick E dit.

2.

For unsplit surf:, activate line (s ).

3.

Pick each of the six oblong holes (under the large circular holes) to remove them and regenerate the mesh.

Altair Engineering


127

Model after removing 6 oblong holes.

Step 3: Modify geometry around remaining small holes. 1.

Adjust your view to zoom in to the notched area of the top surface.

2.

For the split surf-line function, activate no de .

3.

Pick the node and line as indicated in the image to trim the surface.

128


Altair Engineering

4.

Repeat this step to create four more trim lines in the locations depicted in the following image. The end result is that each of the four small holes is isolated in its own rectangular surface patch.

Surface trim lines isolating small holes onto individual surfaces. Note that element display has been turned off for clarity.

Step 4: Trim a washer layer into the surface around each of the four holes.

Altair Engineering


129

1.

In the offset value field next to wa s he r s plit, enter 0.05.

2.

For the washer split function, activate the line (s ) selector.

3.

Pick each of the free surface edges around the four small holes.

4.

For the adjust/set density function, activate the left line (s ) selector. This activates the adjust edge density option.

5.

6.

Click the surface edge segment to adjust the densities as shown in the image:

Activate the right line (s ) selector. This activates the set edge density option.

7.

Left-click one of the adjusted outer washer edges (one where the density has been changed from 7 to 8 in the last step).

8.

Right-click the remaining outer washer edges to set the element densities to 8 elements.

9.

Use either the adjust or set edge density functions to make the remaining mesh adjustments, as indicated in the following image.

130


Altair Engineering

10.

Use a similar process to trim a washer around the remaining hole in the top surface. Once the washer is trimmed, adjust the element density to match nodes on the inner and outer washer edges.

Step 5: Adjust the mesh around the large holes on the side surfaces. The approach used around the large holes is to trim the surfaces into individual patches to which a mapped meshing algorithm can be applied. Use the split surf-line function to make the following surface trims. Note that only one side is shown and the element display has been turned off for clarity.

Altair Engineering


131

The mapped meshing algorithms apply a mesh pattern template to a surface, and then map that pattern to the specific surface size and shape. For this method to be applied certain criteria must be met, including element type (quads only mesh) surface shape (three, four or five edges) and specific mesh density settings. In step 5, the surfaces around the large holes were trimmed into faces that can be meshed with the map as pentagon algorithm, provided the mesh type and density settings are correct.

Step 6: Remesh the newly trimmed surfaces. 1.


2.

Select the 12 surface patches around the three holes on one side of the model.

3.

that you are working in the size and bias sub.

4.

that the meshing mode is set to inte ra ctiv e .

5.

Set mesh type: to qua ds .

6.

Click m e s h to enter the interactive meshing module.

7.

On the density sub, adjust the density on the six edges across the center of the holes from 1 to 2.

8.

On the mesh style sub, set the mesh method to m a p a s pe nta go n, then click s e t a ll.

9.

Click m e s h to regenerate the mesh.

10.

Click re turn to accept the mesh and go back to the Automesh .

11.


132


Altair Engineering

This completes this tutorial. For more practice using these methods, use the other components in the model.

Altair Engineering


133

HM-2080: Modifying Models using solidThinking Inspire In this tutorial, you will: Open geometry in HyperMesh Desktop Export your geometry Import geometry in solidThinking Inspire Modify geometry inside solidThinking Inspire Export modified geometry Import geometry back into HyperMesh Desktop The benefit of using solidThinking is that you can apply quick geometry fixes without going back to the CAD software.

Exercise: Modify model using solidThinking This exercise uses the model file, rail_extrusion.hm.

Step 1: Open and view the model file, rail_extrusion.hm. 1.

Launch HyperMesh Desktop.

2.

Go to File > O pe n > M o de l

3.

In the file dialog switch, make sure the drop-down is set to H y pe rM e s h bina ry file s .

4.

Browse to the tutorial files and select rail_extrusion.hm.

Step 2: Export model file. 1.

Go to File > E xpo rt > G e o m e try .

2.

Select STEP as File Type.

3.

Set a filename.

4.

Click the E xpo rt button.

Step 3: Open and view the model file in solidThinking Inspire. 1.

Launch solidThinking Inspire.

2.

Go to File > O pe n

3.

In the file dialog switch, set the drop-down to Ins pire All Ty pe s .

134


Altair Engineering

4.

Browse to the directory where you exported the file in the previous step and open it.

Step 4: Edit the Geometry 1.

Select the Push/Pull faces tool.

2.

Click on one end of the rail and push to reduce its length.

3.

Click on the bottom of the rail and pull to increase its height. Your modified geometry might look something like the example below. It is now ready to be transferred into HyperMesh Desktop.

Step 5: Export geometry from solidThinking Inspire. 1.

Go to File > Sa v e a s

2.

From the drop-down menu select STE P (*.s tp).

3.

Choose a name and click Sa v e .

4.

Exit solidThinking Inspire.

Step 6: Import geometry in HyperMesh Desktop. 1.

Open HyperMesh Desktop.

2.

Go to File > Im po rt > G e o m e try .

Altair Engineering


135

3.

In the Import tab, browse to the STEP file you previously saved.

4.

Click Im po rt. You can now see your modified geometry in HyperMesh Desktop.

Step 7 (Optional): Save your work. Save the model as a HyperMesh binary file.

136


Altair Engineering

HM-2090: Dimensioning In this tutorial you will learn how to create and edit dimensions on geometry using the Dimensioning . The Dimensioning is used to change one or more dimensions of existing geometry, thus changing the basic shape of solids and other enclosed volumes. The dimensioning tool allows a to select dimensions of or between surfaces, and modify those dimensions as required. This is accomplished by the use of dimension manipulators.

Exercise

Step 1: Open the model 2_holes.hm. Step 2: Create a dimension for the thickness of the part. 1.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > Surfa ce s > D im e ns io ning to open the Dimensioning .

2.

Click the point in the image for point1.

Altair Engineering


137

3.

Click the point in the image for point2.

A dimension manipulator with a value of 0.375 is created between the points, which represents the thickness of the part.

Step 3: Change the dimension value. 1.

Click the dimension text (0.375) for the dimension manipulator created in the previous step.

138


Altair Engineering

2.

Enter 0.25 for the value and press e nte r.

Notice the part thickness changes. 3.

Click 0.25 and enter 0.5 and press e nte r.

Altair Engineering


139

4.


Step 4: Modify the dimension manipulator direction. 1.

Click G e o m e try > C re a te > No de s > E xtra ct o n Line s .

2.

Select the line shown in the image.

3.

Enter 2 for the Number of nodes field.

4.

Click cre a te to create the nodes. These nodes will be used to show the starting position of the thickness during future modifications.

140


Altair Engineering

5.


6.

Click G e o m e try > E dit > Surfa ce s > D im e ns io ning.

7.

Click the 0.5 thickness value and enter 1.0 and press e nte r.

Altair Engineering


141

Notice the dimension changed equally about the midpoint between the original locations. 8.

Click re je ct to reject the change.

9.

Click the handle at the bottom of the dimension manipulator as shown in the image. Notice the bottom arrow changes to a line, indicating that the bottom end will remain fixed.

142


Altair Engineering

10.

Change the value of the dimension to 1.

Altair Engineering


143

Notice the bottom stays fixed. 11.


12.

Click the handle at the top of the dimension manipulator as shown in the image. Notice the top arrow changes to a line, indicating that the top end will remain fixed. Also notice that the bottom is now an arrow, as only one end can remain fixed.

144


Altair Engineering

13.

Change the value to 1.0.

Altair Engineering


145

Notice top of the part stays fixed. 14.


Step 5: Create and modify the diameter dimensions on the holes. 1.

Select the two points shown in the image below for point1 and point2.

146


Altair Engineering

2.

Click the value and change it to 0.25.

3.

Click the value and change it to 0.5.

4.

Create a dimension on the other hole.

5.

Change the value of the dimension to 1.0.

Altair Engineering


147

6.


Step 6: Delete a manipulator. 1.

Click the 0.75 diameter hole dimension.

2.

Clear the value from the manipulator and press e nte r.

Notice the dimension manipulator has been removed from the hole.

Step 7: Mesh the part. 1.

Click M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h.

148


Altair Engineering

2.

Enter 0.1 for the Element Size field.

3.


4.

Click the toggle to change to automatic if not already there.

5.

Click m e s h to mesh the part.

6.


Step 8: Modify the dimensions with automatic remeshing enabled. 1.

Press o to open the Options .

2.

Click the m e s h sub.

3.

Change the topology revision switch to either re m e s h or a dv a nce d re m e s h.

4.


5.

Open the Dimensioning .

6.

Click the thickness value as shown in the image and enter 1.

Altair Engineering


149

Notice the part is remeshed for the dimension change.

7.

Click the diameter value of the hole and enter 0.25.

Notice the part remeshes with the change in hole diameter.

150


Altair Engineering

Meshing 1-D Elements HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements

2-D Elements HM-3100: AutoMeshing HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation HM-3140: Batch Meshing HM-3150: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap

3-D Elements HM-3200: Tetrameshing HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager

Altair Engineering


151

1-D Elements HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements

152


Altair Engineering

HM-3000: Creating 1-D Elements In this tutorial, you will learn how to build 1-D elements.

Exercise: Creating 1-D Elements

This exercise uses the model file, 1d_elements.hm.

Step 1: Retrieve the model file. 1.

Open the HyperMesh file, 1d_elements.hm.

2.

From the menu bar, select Pre fe re nce s > Us e r Pro file s .

3.

Select D e fa ult (H y pe rM e s h).

4.

Click O K to load the profile.

Step 2: Create 1-D bar elements. 1.

Access the Bars using the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > 1D E le m e nts > B a rs .

2.

Go to the bar2 sub.

Altair Engineering


153

3.

Click a x = and enter the value 0.

4.

Click a y = and enter the value 0.

5.

Click a z = and enter the value 0. These are the values for the bar offset.

6.

Click pro pe rty = and select pro pe rty 1. A property is now assigned to the element.

7.

Click pins a = and enter the value 0.

8.

Click pins b = and enter the value 0. These are the values for the degrees of freedom.

9.

Click the orientation switch (below the radio button for the update sub) and select components from the pop-up menu.

10.

After x comp =, enter the value 1.

11.

After y comp =, enter the value 1.

12.

After z comp =, enter the value 1. The local y-axis is now specified.

13.

Click no de A and select the lower node in the graphics area.

14.

Click no de B and select the upper node in the graphics area. The two-noded bar element is created.

15.

Click re turn to access the main menu.

154


Altair Engineering

Bar 2 element created

Step 3: Create 1-D elements along a line. 1.

Go to the Line Mesh by selecting M e s h > C re a te > Line M e s h from the menu bar.

2.

that the entity selector is set to line s .

3.

Select a line on the model.

4.

that the toggle is set to segment is whole line.

5.

Set element config: to rigid.

6.

Click m e s h. The Element Density now appears.

7.

Click s e t s e gm e nt to make it the active selector.

8.

In the elem density = field, enter 20.

9.

Click s e t a ll.

10.

Click re turn twice to access the main menu.

Altair Engineering


155

Rigids created in the Line Mesh

Step 4: Create 1-D elements from the feature in the model. 1.

Use the Model Browser to turn off all of the geometry in the model.

2.

Use Model Browser to turn on only the elements in the feature_elements component.

3.

Access the Features from the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C he ck > C o m po ne nts > Fe a ture s .

4.

Click the comps button and pick the feature_elements component.

5.

Click s e le ct to complete the selection.

6.

In the feature angle = field, enter 30.

7.

Select the igno re no rm a ls check box.

8.

that create: is set to plo t e le m e nts .

9.

Click fe a ture s . The plot elements are created.

156


Altair Engineering

The generated features display as green edge lines.

10.


Altair Engineering


157

2-D Elements HM-3100: AutoMeshing HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation HM-3140: Batch Meshing HM-3150: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap

158


Altair Engineering

HM-3100: AutoMeshing In this tutorial, you will: Learn how to mesh all the surfaces at once specifying different element sizes and element types Practice changing the element density along surface edges Practice checking element quality and changing the mesh pattern by changing the mesh algorithm Learn how to preview the mesh on all the unmeshed surfaces Practice changing the element type and node spacing (biasing) along surface edges Learn how to remesh surfaces The optimal starting point for creating a shell mesh for a part is to have geometry surfaces defining the part. The most efficient method for creating a mesh representing the part includes using the Automesh and creating a mesh directly on the part’s surfaces.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, channel.hm.

Altair Engineering


159

Step 1: Open and view the model file, channel.hm. Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.).

Step 2: Mesh all the part’s surfaces at once using an element size of 5 and the mixed element type (quads and trias). 1.

Access the Mesh in one of the following ways: On the Menu Bar, click M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h Press the F12 key on the keyboard.

2.

Go to the size and bias sub.

3.

Select s urfs > > dis pla y e d.

4.

For element size=, specify 5.

5.

Set the mesh type: to m ixe d.

6.

On the ’s bottom-left corner, set inte ra ctiv e as the active mesh mode (it may currently be on automatic).

7.

Ensure that the elements to surf comp/elements to current comp toggle is set to e le m s to curre nt co m p.

8.

Click m e s h to enter the meshing module. Notice that you are in the density sub of the meshing module. There is node seeding and a number on each surface edge. The number is the number of elements that were created along the edge.

9.

Click re turn to accept the mesh as the final mesh. At this point, you could be done using the Mesh to mesh the part. The mesh quality is very good. However, you will remain in the meshing module to perform the next steps, which demonstrate how to use various subs to interactively control the creation of the mesh.

Step 3: Delete the mesh. 1.

Access the Delete in one of the following ways: On the Collectors toolbar, select D e le te (

)

Press F2 on the keyboard 2.


3.

Select e le m s > > a ll.

160


Altair Engineering

4.

Click de le te e ntity .

5.

Click re turn to go back to the Mesh .

Step 4: Mesh the surface having three fixed points interior to its surface. You should still be in the Mesh , size and bias sub. 1.

Leave all options in the menu as they are.

2.

Select the surface that has three fixed points interior to its surface.

3.

Click m e s h to enter the meshing module.

4.

Preview the mesh generated.

Step 5: Fit only the surface being meshed to the graphics area. Fit the surface to the graphics area in one of the following ways. On the density sub, click f. Click lo ca l v ie w and pick fill.

Step 6: From the graphics area, specify a new element density along surface edges. 1.

From the density sub, click the selector, a djus t : e dge to make it active.

2.

From the graphics area, left-click an edge’s element density number to increase it by

Altair Engineering


161

one. 3.

Right-click an edge’s number to decrease it by one.

4.

Click and hold the mouse pointer on an edge’s number and drag the mouse up or down to increase or decrease the number.

Here, the density has been changed from 24 to 48.

5.

Click m e s h to update the preview mesh based on the change.

Step 7: From the density sub, specify a new element density

162


Altair Engineering

along surface edges. You should still be in the density sub. 1.

For elem density=, enter 10.

2.

Activate the selector s e t : e dge .

3.

Click an edge’s number to change its value to 10.

Here, the bottom edge has been set to 10.

4.

Update the mesh by clicking m e s h to preview the change.

5.

Change all edge densities to 10 by clicking s e t a ll to .

Altair Engineering


163

Here, all edges have been set to 10.

6.

Click m e s h to preview the change.

Step 8: From the density sub, specify a new element size to adjust element densities along surface edges. You should still be in the density sub. 1.

For elem size=, enter 7.

2.

Click ca lcula te : e dge to make it the active selector.

3.

Click an edge’s number to calculate it based on an element size of 7. The new number is calculated to create elements as close to a size of 7 as possible.

164


Altair Engineering

4.


5.

Click re ca lc a ll to base all edge densities on an element size of 7.

6.


Altair Engineering


165

Step 9: Change all edge element densities to reflect the initial element size of 5. 1.

For elem size=, specify 5.

2.

Click re ca lc a ll.

3.


4.

Click re turn to accept the mesh and go back to the size and bias sub-.

Step 10: Preview a mesh of the channel’s rib. You should still be in the Mesh , size and bias sub. 1.

With the surfs selector active, select the rib surface in the middle of the part.

166


Altair Engineering

2.

Leave all options in the menu set they are.

3.

Click m e s h to enter the meshing module and preview the mesh generated.

4.

Click lo ca l v ie w and pick the re a r view to display the rib’s surface in this position, filled to the graphics area.

Step 11: Check the quality of the rib’s preview mesh. 1.

Go to the checks sub.

2.

Click a s pe ct to identify all elements having an aspect ratio greater than 5.

Altair Engineering


167

3.

Notice that no elements fail this check. In the status bar, the highest aspect ratio value reported is 1.75.

4.

For jacobian specify 0.8.

5.

Click ja co bia n to identify all elements having a jacobian less than 0.8.

6.

Notice that several elements fail this check and are outlined red. The status bar reports the smallest jacobian value to be 0.74.

7.

Change the jacobian check value back to 0.7.

8.

that no elements have a jacobian less than 0.7. (Click ja co bia n.)

9.

Check for quad elements having a min. angle less than 45. The smallest angle found is 46.46.

10.

Check for quad elements having a max. angle greater than 135. The largest angle found is 136.58.

Step 12: Change the rib’s mesh pattern by changing the mesh method used for its surface. 1.

Go to the mesh style sub.

2.

Notice that the edges’ element density numbers disappear. Interior to the rib’s surface is a small icon. It indicates the free (unmapped) mesh method is currently being used to mesh the surface.

168


Altair Engineering

Mesh on rib using the free (unmapped) mesh algorithm

3.

Under mesh method: set the option to m a p a s re cta ngle (a uto de cide is de fa ult).

4.

Click s e t a ll found under mesh method.

5.

Notice that the icon changes to reflect the new mesh method.

6.


Altair Engineering


169

Mesh on rib using the map as rectangle mesh algorithm

Step 13: Check the quality of the rib’s preview mesh again. 1.

Go the checks sub.

2.

Check for elements having an aspect ratio greater than 5. Highest value reported is _____.

3.

Check for elements having a jacobian less than 0.7. Lowest value reported is _____.

4.

Check for quad elements having a min angle less than 45. Smallest value reported is _____.

5.

Check for quad elements having a max angle greater than 135. Highest value reported is _____.

6.

Notice that in this case, the free (unmapped) mesh has better jacobian than the map as rectangle mesh.

Step 14: Change the rib’s mesh method back to free (unmapped). 1.


2.

Under mesh method: set the option to fre e (unm a ppe d).

170


Altair Engineering

3.

Click s e t a ll found under mesh method.

4.


5.

Click re turn to accept the mesh as final and go back to the Mesh .

Step 15: Preview a mesh of all displayed, unmeshed surfaces. You should still be in the Mesh , size and bias sub. 1.

Click the Is o m e tric v ie w

2.

Accept all the default values.

3.

On the menu ’s bottom-right side, click fa ile d.

icon to set the view of the model.

The status bar displays the following message: "There are no surfaces with meshing errors". This is correct; all surfaces you selected to mesh so far have a mesh on them. 4.

Click unm e s he d to identify and select all displayed unmeshed surfaces.

5.

Click m e s h to enter the meshing module. The preview mesh is generated.

Step 16: Change the element type for some surfaces to trias. 1.


2.

Click to ggle s urf found under elem type. Notice that interior to each surface is a blue icon. It indicates the mixed element type

Altair Engineering


171

(quads and trias) is currently being used to mesh the surface. 3.

Under element type: select the menu tria s .

4.

Under element type: activate the selector s e t s urf. (Click s e t s urf.)

5.

Left-click the blue icon in each of the channel’s bottom two surfaces to set their element type to tria s .

6.


Preview of mesh with trias element type for two surfaces

Step 17: Adjust the node spacing on surface edge (biasing). 1.

Go to the biasing sub.

2.

Notice the bias intensity number (default 0.000) on each surface edge.

3.

Leave the bias style set to linear. This style corresponds to the positive slope of a straight line over the interval [0,1] of the real line. For a positive bias intensity, smaller elements are at the start of the edge.

4.

that the selector adjust: edge is active.

5.

Left- or right-click the edge biasing intensity number as indicated in the following image to increase or decrease its value by 0.1.

172


Altair Engineering

Preview mesh in the biasing sub

6.

Click and hold the mouse pointer on the same edge biasing intensity number and drag the mouse up to increase its value to 3.0.

7.


8.

For intensity= enter 10.

9.

Activate the ca lcula te : e dge selector.

Altair Engineering


173

10.

Click the same edge’s bias intensity value to change it to 10.

11.


12.

Switch bias style: to be llcurv e . This style distributes nodes along the edge in a pattern that is symmetric across the midpoint of the edge. For a positive biasing intensity, the smaller elements are at the start and end of the edge.

13.

Activate the selector s e t: e dge , to make it active.

14.

Click the same edge’s blue icon to change it from linear bias style to the bellcurve bias style.

15.


16.

Click re turn to accept the final mesh and go back to the Mesh .

Step 18: Remesh the channel’s bottom two surfaces. You should still be in the Mesh , size and bias sub. 1.

On the ’s bottom-left side, switch the mesh mode from inte ra ctiv e to a uto m a tic. This mode is not interactive; it does not take you to the meshing module. Rather, it meshes surfaces using only the basic parameters of the automesh . Interactive mode can be used to remesh the surfaces if you require the different options to control the created mesh.

2.

With the surfs selector active, select the channel’s bottom two surfaces.

3.

Set element size = to 10.

174


Altair Engineering

4.

Click m e s h to delete the existing mesh on the surfaces and create a new mesh.

5.

Observe the resulting quad mesh on the remeshed surfaces. Note that connectivity was maintained with the surrounding, smaller mesh. This is because the break connectivity option was not used.

6.


Step 19 (Optional): Save your work. Meshing of the channel part is complete. Now is a good time to save the model.

Altair Engineering


175

HM-3110: Meshing without Surfaces In this tutorial, you will learn the basic concepts of surfaceless meshing and how to mesh a bracket. Surfaceless meshing is defined as the creation of mesh using points, lines, and nodes rather than surfaces. Some parts may have missing surfaces and some parts may not have any surfaces at all and are instead defined by line data. Either way, a mesh still must be created. HyperMesh has a number of s that allow you to create a mesh based on geometry other than surfaces.

Exercise: Meshing a Bracket

This exercise uses the model file, bracket.hm. The model consists of only line data; no surfaces are present.

Step 1: Retrieve and view the model file. Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.).

Step 2: Create a concentric circle around a hole on the top face using the sca le . There are three circles on the upper region of the bracket representing three holes in the

176


Altair Engineering

bracket. Two of the holes have concentric circles around them. This configuration allows you to create a radial mesh pattern around the holes. The following steps will show you how to create a concentric circle around the third hole. 1.

Go to the Scale by doing one of the following: From the menu bar, select G e o m e try > Sca le > Line s On the main menu, select the To o l page and go to the Scale

2.

Click unifo rm and enter 2.0 for the scale factor.

3.

Press F4 to go to the Distance .

4.


5.

that the node selector N1 is active.

6.

Move the mouse pointer to the graphics area. While keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the mouse pointer over the circle representing the hole. When the mouse pointer changes to a square and the circle is highlighted, release the mouse button.

The circle remains highlighted. Left-click the highlighted circle to create a node for N1. Click twice more at different locations on the line to create nodes N2 and N3. 7.

Click circle ce nte r. A node is created at the circle’s center. This node will be selected as the origin node when the circle is duplicated and scaled.

Altair Engineering


177

8.

Click re turn to go back to the Scale .

9.

Switch the entity type to line s .

10.

In the graphics area, select the circle.

11.

Click line s > > duplica te > > o rigina l co m p.

12.

Click the o rigin: no de selector to make it active.

13.

Select the temporary node you created at the circle’s center.

14.

Click s ca le + . A new circle is created, which is concentric with the original.

178


Altair Engineering

15.

Click re turn.

Step 3: Create a radial mesh between each of the concentric circles using the spline . 1.

Go to the Spline by doing one of the following: From the menu bar, click M e s h > C re a te > 2D E le m e nts > Spline On the main menu, select the 2D page and go to the Spline .

2.

With the entity type set to line s , select all six circular lines.

3.

Switch from mesh, keep surf to mesh, de le s urf. This option creates surfaces based on the selected entities, uses the surfaces to create a mesh, and then deletes the surfaces.

4.

Make sure the keep tangency checkbox is unselected.

5.

Click cre a te . The meshing module appears. Element edge density numbers appear on the selected lines. The numbers on a pair of concentric circular lines must be identical in order to achieve a radial mesh.

6.

In the density sub, specify 8 for elem density.

7.

Click s e t a ll to . All of the circular lines now have an element edge density of 8.

8.

Click m e s h.

Preview of mesh between pairs of concentric circular lines

Altair Engineering


179

9.

Click re turn.

10.

Remain in the Spline .

Step 4: Mesh the rest of the top face using the spline . 1.

With the entity type set to line s , select the four lines defining the perimeter of the top face and the three circular lines defining the outside perimeter of the three radial meshes.

2.

Click cre a te . The meshing module appears.

3.

Click re turn to accept the mesh and go back to the main menu.

Final mesh on the top face of the bracket

Step 5: Mesh the back face of the bracket using the line dra g . 1.

To go to the Line Drag , do one of the following: From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > 2D E le m e nts > Line D ra g On the main menu, select the 2D page and enter the Line D ra g

2.

Go to the drag geoms sub.

3.

Switch the drag: entity type from node list to line lis t.

4.

Select the line that is on the perimeter of the existing mesh and adjacent to the bracket’s back face.

180


Altair Engineering

5.

Click the a lo ng: line lis t selector to make it active.

6.

Select one of the two lines defining the back face that are perpendicular to the selected line to drag.

7.

Leave the toggle set to use default vector.

8.

Leave the creation method set to mesh, w/o surf.

9.

Click dra g. The meshing module appears.

10.

Click re turn twice to accept the mesh and exit the .

Altair Engineering


181

Mesh of top and back faces

Step 6: Mesh the bottom face of the bracket using the rule d . 1.

To go to the Ruled , do one of the following: From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > 2D E le m e nts > R ule d. On the main menu, select the 2D page and enter the R ule d

2.

Make sure the upper entity type is set to no de lis t.

3.

Click no de lis t and select by pa th. The entity selector changes to no de pa th.

4.

Select the end nodes located on the back face edge that borders the bottom face, as indicated in the following image.

All the nodes between the two selected nodes are automatically selected. 5.

Click no de pa th and select s ho w no de o rde r. The nodes are highlighted and numbered to show the order in which they have been selected.

6.

Switch the lower entity type to line lis t.

7.

Select the line defining the opposite edge of the bottom face.

182


Altair Engineering

8.

Switch the creation method from mesh, keep surf to m e s h, w/ o s urf.

9.

Select the a uto re v e rs e check box. When elements are generated, the edges used to create them can be ordered in different directions. The order of the edges is determined by the order in which the nodes are selected or the direction of the selected line(s). If the direction is different for each selection, then a mesh that crosses itself, similar to a bow tie, will be created. To prevent this, the auto reverse option ensures elements are generated with a similar order on each side of the mesh.

10.


11.

Click re turn twice to accept the mesh and exit the .

Altair Engineering


183

Mesh of top, back, and bottom faces of bracket

Step 7: Mesh the rib using the skin . 1.

To go to the Skin , do one of the following: From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > 2D E le m e nts > Skin On the main menu, select the 2D page and enter the Skin

2.

With the line lis t selector active, select any two of the three lines defining the rib.

3.

Switch the creation method from mesh, keep surf to m e s h, de le s urf.

4.

Leave the toggle set to auto reverse.

5.


6.

Click re turn to accept the mesh and exit the .

184


Altair Engineering

Mesh of rib

Altair Engineering


185

HM-3120: 2-D Mesh in Curved Surfaces In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create a mesh based only on element size Mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter Reduce the maximum angle perimeter Increase the maximum element size parameter Chordal deviation is a meshing algorithm that allows HyperMesh to automatically vary node densities and biasing along curved surface edges to gain a more accurate representation of the surface being meshed.

Exercise: Controlling the 2-D Mesh Concentration in Curved Areas

This exercise uses the model file, chordal_dev.hm.

Step 1: Open the model file, chordal_dev.hm.

In this section, create a mesh using only element size, not the chordal deviation meshing parameters.

Step 2: Set the mesh parameters and create the mesh. 1.

Access the Mesh in one of the following ways:

186


Altair Engineering

From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h On the main menu, select the 2D page, then select a uto m e s h 2.

Set the mesh mode to a uto m a tic (it may be currently set to inte ra ctiv e ).

3.

In the elem size = field, type 15.000.

4.

Set mesh type: to qua ds .

5.

Set the toggle to e le m s to s urf co m p.

6.

Select s urfs > > by co lle cto r > > us e s iz e from the extended entity selection menu.

7.

Click s e le ct.

8.

Click m e s h to create the mesh.

9.

Click re turn.

The Maximum Deviation Parameter In this section, mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter to control the element densities and biasing.

Step 3: Set the chordal deviation parameters. 1.

Access the Mesh .

2.

Access the e dge de v ia tio n sub.

3.

Click m in e le m s iz e = and type 1.000.

Altair Engineering


187

Cycle through the parameter settings by pressing the TAB key after typing in a value. 4.

Set max elem size = to 15.000.

5.

Set max deviation = to 0.500.

6.

Set max angle = to 90.000 for the maximum angle parameter to be neglected.

7.

Set the mesh type: to qua ds .

Step 4: Create the mesh. 1.

Select s urfs > > by co lle cto r > > de v ia tio n ctrl from the extended entity selection menu.

2.

Click s e le ct.

3.


View of the completed mesh for this exercise.

The Maximum Angle Parameter In this section, use the same chordal deviation settings from the previous section, but reduce the maximum angle parameter to compare the effects.

Step 5: Set the chordal deviation parameters and create the mesh. 1.

Set max angle = to 20.000.

2.

Select s urfs > > by co lle cto r > > a ngle ctrl.

188


Altair Engineering

3.

Click s e le ct.

4.

Click m e s h to create the mesh on the surfaces.


The Maximum Element Size Parameter In this section, use the same chordal deviation parameters from the previous section except for the maximum element size parameter. The maximum element size parameter is increased to allow the algorithm to create larger and fewer elements along planer and less curved surface edges.

Step 6: Set the chordal deviation parameters and create the mesh. 1.

Set max elem size = to 30.000.

2.

Select s urfs > > by co lle cto r > > m a x s iz e ctrl.

3.

Click s e le ct.

4.


Altair Engineering


189


190


Altair Engineering

HM-3130: QI Mesh Creation In this tutorial, you will learn how to create and optimize a 2-D mesh based on -defined quality criteria. HyperMesh has a new set of features designed to help you achieve good element quality more efficiently. These features use settings from the qua lity inde x to generate or modify a mesh. This allows HyperMesh to give results that for your preferences for which element quality checks are more or less important than others. The new quality index (Q.I.) optimization features are found in the Automesh, Smooth, and Qualityindex s. These functionalities can be used separately or in unison.

Exercise 1: Creating and Optimizing a 2-D Mesh Based on -Defined Quality Criteria

This exercise uses the model file, planar.hm.

Step 1: Open the model file, planar.hm. Step 2: Working with node and element quality optimization. Within the qualityindex , there are functions that allow the to select individual nodes or elements, and then alter the position or shape of the node/element to optimize the element quality for the surrounding elements. The element qualities are optimized according to the settings in the qualityindex . These features are very useful for improving element qualities in local areas of the mesh.

Altair Engineering


191

1.

Access the qualityindex by doing one of the following: From the menu bar, click M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > Q ua lity Inde x On the main menu, select the 2D page, then select qua lity inde x On the right-hand side of the , note the value for comp. Q.I.=. Currently, it should read 71.10. Keep this number in mind so that you can judge how much progress you make in improving the element quality.

2.

Click the cle a nup to o ls button. The QI criteria are replaced by a series of yellow buttons, each representing a tool for element cleanup.

3.

Experiment with the modify hole and washers feature. Use these options on the hole in the mesh. They allow you to reposition nodes on the hole edges, change the radius of holes, and link holes with their washers so that the washers rotate or resize along with changes made to the holes. radial

192

Using this option, clicking and dragging a node alters the radius of the hole (and, optionally, the washer). The element orientation remains constant but the hole may become larger or smaller based on the input. There are additional controls to enable or disable automatic remeshing when altering the hole dimensions.


Altair Engineering

radius: (and edit This field shows the current radius of the hole that the selected checkbox) node belongs to. By default it is a display-only field, but can be directly edited by means of the edit checkbox. Editing this value allows you to specify a desired number instead of clicking-anddragging nodes. The change occurs when you click a node on the desired hole. angular

Use this option to move the nodes around the edges of the hole without changing the hole diameter, or the spacing between nodes.

angle: (and edit This field shows the current angle of the hole that the selected checkbox) node belongs to, relative to its original (unmodified) starting position. By default it is a a display-only field, but can be directly edited by means of the edit checkbox. Editing this value allows you to specify a desired angle instead of clicking-and-dragging nodes. The change occurs when you click a node in the desired hole. radial & angular This option allows you to simultaneously change the hole's radius and the orientation of nodes around its edge. Like the angular option, the node spacing remains proportionally consistent, though actual spacing will be scaled in accordance with changes in hole radius.

This option can make use of the edit versions of both the radius

Altair Engineering


193

and angle fields, allowing you to specify values for both characteristics, and then apply them simultaneously by clicking a node. circumferential

Used primarily on openings like slots, this option rotates the nodes along the circumference of the slot without altering the hole's size or shape/orientation. The capability works on enclosed slots or holes, it is not designed to work on slots with an opening.

link washers

When this option is active, changing the radial or angular position of nodes also drags and scales the washer nodes along with them:

Starting point (no changes made yet)

Link Washers option turned off.

Link Washers option turned on.

remesh number When this option is active, you can specify the number of washer of layers: layers to automatically remesh after altering the node position. 4.

Experiment with the place node function. Click the button labeled pla ce no de . Clicking and dragging on a node in the mesh allows you to manually reposition it. The affected elements will change color as you do to indicate their quality grade at the node's current position. Several options affect how the nodes can move: along surface / normal to

194

This toggle determines the direction the node is allowed to move: along surface only allows the nodes to move long the


Altair Engineering

surface

plane or curvature of the surface, while normal to surface allows the node to move directly away from the surface in a normal direction.

movement along surface; note that the node cannot normally exceed the edge of the mesh.

movement normal to surface

With the place node collector highlighted, you can click-anddrag a node in the graphics area to relocate it. The elements that depend on that node will dynamically adjust as you drag, resulting in a QI change. allow movement Activating this checkbox allows the nodes to be moved past the out of boundary edges of a mesh boundary. This option is only available when using the along surface option.

Altair Engineering


195

movement along surface, allowing movement out of boundary.

Try dragging some nodes to change the shapes of the surrounding elements, and observe how the comp. Q.I. changes. 5.

Experiment with the swap edge function. This option considers the elements to which the edge belongs, and finds alternative orientations for it.

Each time you pick the edge, it switches to the next valid configuration. If an edge swap will not improve element quality, a message to that effect displays in the status bar. You can force the swap anyway by clicking a second time. Additional clicks cycle through the possible edge positions, the number of which depends on the types of elements involved. For a pair of trias, there are two possible positions for their shared edge. For a pair of quads, there are three possible positions. For a quad and a tria, there are six possible positions. 6.

Experiment with the node optimize function. Click the button labeled no de o ptim iz e . This option automatically moves a selected node to optimize the overall quality of its surrounding elements. The options along surface, normal to surface, and along & normal to surface work exactly as described for the place node tool. The only difference is that node optimize moves the node automatically, while place node requires you to choose the location manually. Try selecting some of the nodes on the mesh. In particular, select nodes of elements that are highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should see each

196


Altair Engineering

node move as it is selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality. Notice what happens to the value of the comp. Q.I. It should improve as you select more nodes. 7.

Experiment with the element optimize function. Click the button labeled e le m e nt o ptim iz e . Selecting an element while this button is highlighted optimizes the location of the element’s nodes to improve the quality of the element. It also considers the quality of the surrounding elements. Try selecting some of the elements on the mesh. In particular, select elements that are highlighted red, since these have the worst quality. You should usually see the shape of the element change as it is selected, improving the surrounding mesh quality. Notice what happens to the value of the comp. Q.I. It should improve as you select more elements.

8.


Step 3: Resetting the part by remeshing. At this point, you need to regenerate the original mesh so you can try fixing the element quality using a different method. The new method is to use the Smooth . Regenerating the original mesh allows you to compare the smooth functionality to the node and element optimization used in the previous section. 1.

Access the Mesh in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, click M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h On the main menu, select the 2D page, then Auto m e s h

2.

Go to the s iz e a nd bia s sub.

3.

Select the surface in the graphics area.

4.

Make sure the has the following settings:

pre v io us s e ttings is activated (in the switch for connectivity).

The meshing mode is set to a uto m a tic. 5.

Click the m e s h button. The mesh should be regenerated.

Altair Engineering


197

6.

Click re turn to exit from the Mesh .

Step 4: Using QI optimization smoothing. The Smooth also has quality index optimization features. Using this allows you to adjust the element quality according to the settings in the qualityindex for an entire group of selected elements. 1.

Access the Smooth in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, click M e s h> C le a nup E le m e nts > Sm o o th On the main menu, select 2D page, then select s m o o th

2.

Go to the plates sub.

3.

Select e le m s > > dis pla y e d.

4.

Switch the algorithm to Q I o ptim iz a tio n. (By default, the button should be set to autodecide.)

5.

There are several optional controls you should understand, but are not needed for this tutorial: Controls

Function

ta rge t qua lity inde x

The value you would like the quality index to be after the smoothing operation. This value is not guaranteed from smoothing. The smooth operation will attempt to hit this target.

tim e lim it

The check box for can be activated or not. If working with a large models, activate this box to ensure the smoothing routine does not take more time than you want to allow.

fe a ture a ngle

The Smooth evaluates the angle between the normals of two adjacent elements. If this angle is equal to or greater than the value specified in this field, it will not allow the nodes shared by the elements to move.

us e curre nt crite ria

Allows you to select and use a criteria file for your Q.I. settings. If a criteria file is specified, leave this option blank.

re curs iv e o ptim iz a tio n pro ce dure

The other toggle option is s ingle o ptim iz a tio n s te p. Using the re curs iv e o ptim iz a tio n pro ce dure allows the automesher to take more than one in generating the best quality mesh it can. However, this can take longer than s ingle o ptim iz a tio n s te p, so you might want to use single optimization step for larger models.

6.

Click s m o o th.

198


Altair Engineering

Before HyperMesh has run the routine, you should see a message asking to recompute using a new QI mesh size value.

7.

Click C o ntinue . Note that the status bar displays a message that the “approximate quality index=0.1.” Compare this value to 71.1, which is the quality index value you had after creating the original mesh. In this case you should see that it is significantly lower, which indicates that the element quality is much better.

8.

Click re turn.

Step 5: Using the QI settings in the Mesh . The Mesh is capable of using quality index settings to automatically decide what pattern of mesh it should generate. 1.

Access the Mesh .

2.

Go to the QI optimize sub.

3.

Select the surface in the graphics area.

4.

Make sure the has the following settings: The elem size= field has a value of 18. The mesh type: is set to qua ds . Like the Smooth , the QI optimized meshing mode of the Mesh has some controls of which you should be aware. They are, however, not needed in this tutorial. Controls

Function

use current criteria in QI

Allows you to select and use a criteria file for your Q.I. settings. If a criteria file is specified, leave this option blank.

Smooth across common Determines whether nodes generated on a surface edge edges can be moved off the surface edge when the algorithm smoothes the mesh. feature angle

Altair Engineering

The Smooth evaluates the angle between the normals of two adjacent elements. If this angle is equal to


199

or greater than the value specified in this field, it will not allow the nodes shared by the elements to move. Keep/ Redo / Break connectivity

Keep Connectivity creates a new mesh with node seeding at its edges to match any existing adjacent meshes. Redo Connectivity redoes existing adjacent meshes at the same time as it meshes the current selection, to ensure that each surface's mesh matches up along the shared edges. Break connectivity allows the Mesher to mesh without affecting surrounding mesh.

5.

Click m e s h. The mesh should be regenerated.

6.

Click re turn.

7.

Use the qualityindex to check the quality index of the mesh to compare it to the previous mesh: Go to the qualityindex . Look at the value for the comp. Q.I.= field. It should be 0.1, which is much lower that the 71.1 value of the mesh you originally generated.

200


Altair Engineering

HM-3140: Batch Meshing In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Define a configuration for the batch mesh Edit the criteria and parameter files Setup a simple procedure for a post-batch mesh run Batch Mesher is a tool that can perform geometry cleanup and automeshing (in batch mode) for given CAD files. Batch Mesher performs a variety of geometry cleanup operations to improve the quality of the mesh created for the selected element size and type. Cleanup operations include: equivalencing of "red" free edges, fixing small surfaces (relative to the element size), and detecting features. Batch Mesher also performs specified surface editing/defeaturing operations such as: removal of pinholes (less than specified size), removal of edge fillets, and addition of a layer of washer elements around holes. All -defined criteria determine the quality index (QI) of a model. The QI value is used to assess the potential of each geometry cleanup and meshing tool, and apply them accordingly. QI optimized meshing and node placement optimization are performed to obtain the best quality meshing. Final results are stored in a HyperMesh database file.

Tools

To start Batch Mesher on Windows: On the Sta rt menu, point to Pro gra m s (XP) or All Pro gra m s (Vista/7) > Alta ir H y pe rW o rks 12.0 > B a tchM e s he r. Or Type hw_batchmesh with the full path (~altairhome\hm\batchmesh\hw_batchmesh).

To start Batch Mesher on UNIX: Type the hw_batchmesh command to invoke the interface or hw_batchmesh nogui… to perform the batch mesh without a interface.

Altair Engineering


201

Exercise

Step 1: Open BatchMesher. 1.

Start BatchMesher as described above.

2.

In the Input Model Directory field, click fo lde r ( ) to browse to the appropriate directory. (In this exercise, you will use files located in the \tutorials\hm directory.)

3.

In the Output Directory, click fo lde r ( ) to browse to the appropriate directory if different from the input model directory. If desired, you may request the .hm files be returned to the input model directory.

4.

Click s e le ct file s ,

202


. A new window opens.


Altair Engineering

5.

For Type of Geometry, select the appropriate CAD data type. For this exercise, you will use geometry already loaded into HyperMesh, so pick H y pe rM e s h. A filter will help select applicable models for batch meshing to HyperMesh.

6.

Locate and select the following model files, (use the CTRL key to select multiple files): part1.hm, part2.hm and bm_housing.hm.

7.

Click Se le ct.

Step 2: Define a configuration for the batch mesh run. 1.

Click the C o nfigura tio ns tab. (Note there are several common configurations already available)

Altair Engineering


203

2.

Click Add E ntry ,

3.

In the Mesh Type field, type a name for the mesh type.

4.

Select the Criteria File field, and click Find C rite ria Pa ra m File ,

5.

Select the file bm_housing.criteria. (If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the \tutorials\hm directory.)

6.

Select the Pa ra m e te r File field, and click Find C rite ria Pa ra m File ,

7.

Select the file bm_housing.param. (If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the \tutorials\hm directory.)

.

.

.

A new mesh type is now available for selection on the Run Setup tab.

Step 3: On the U se r Pro ce dure s tab, set up a simple script to perform a tetramesh on the housing. 1.

Click Add E ntry ,

2.

Select the TC L File field, and click Find TC L File ,

3.

Select the file bm_housing.tcl. (If necessary, browse to and locate the file in the \tutorials\hm directory.)

4.

In the TCL Procedure field, select the procedure te t_a ll.

5.

In the Name field, give the procedure a name (for example, tetmesh).

.

This new post-batch meshing script is now available for selection on the Run Setup tab.

204


Altair Engineering

Step 4: On the Run Se tup tab, begin defining a configuration for the batch mesh run. 1.

In the Mesh Type field, select a predefined mesh type for each of the parts as follows: bm_housing.hm: use the mesh type you defined in Step 2. part1.hm: use 8mm auto. part2.hm: use 8mm auto.

2.

From the Po s t- M e s h drop-down list for bm_housing.hm, select the procedure created in Step 3 ( te tm e s h). This will run the tetramesher on all available shell elements after batch meshing.

3.

Click Subm it to initiate the run. or Click Subm it At to submit the job at a specified time.

Altair Engineering


205

The application automatically switches to the Run Status tab. As the parts run, the status changes from Working to Pending to Done. 4.

Once the part is at the Working state, select the part and select D e ta ils . A detailed summary appears with the status of the model through its Batch Mesher steps, the overall failed elements, and quality index.\

5.

Once the part is at the Done state, click Lo a d M e s h to load the mesh into HyperMesh for model interrogation.

6.

Once all parts have been meshed, select R un D e ta ils to obtain an overall run status. Any file can be paused or canceled. If the file is paused, it can be resumed immediately or at a specific time. Once the Batch Mesher session has been setup with file directories and mesh types, it can be saved as a config file that can be loaded at a future time. It is also possible to load an entire set of models that has already been batch meshed in order to take advantage of the Load Mesh option in the Run Status tab. If you choose to make modifications to your criteria or parameter files, the run can be submitted again. The new files will be placed in a separate sub-directory.

Step 5 (Optional): Edit the criteria and parameter files. 1.

Go to the Configurations tab.

206


Altair Engineering

2.

Click an entity in the Mesh Type column.

3.

Click E dit File . The Criteria and Parameter Editor window appears.

On the Criteria tab, you can set the target element size, element criteria, and the method that is used to calculate the values. An advanced criteria table option can be enabled to give more control over the intermediate QI values, but is usually not necessary in order to obtain a good quality mesh.

Altair Engineering


207

An option to Use min length from timestep calculator is also available for explicit solver models. If this option is selected, the overall minimum element size will be set by this option and will gray out at the top of the element checks. The Parameters tab sets all of the meshing control over various geometric features. Parameters are grouped into sections; you can click the small downward-arrows next to each section to show and hide that section. The number of parameters is extensive; for details, see the "Parameters Editor" topic in the BatchMesher help.

208


Altair Engineering

HM-3150: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap In this tutorial you will learn how to: Mesh a component using the loose shell shrink wrap. Mesh a component using the tight shell shrink wrap. Mesh a component using the tight solid shrink wrap. The Shrink W ra p tool can be used to generate an enclosed volume or solid mesh, and is typically used to approximate and simplify an existing model.

Exercise: Meshing a Model Using Shrink Wrap

You can shrink wrap elements, components, surfaces, or solids. The shrink wrap allows for wrapping of multiple components if they are selected. The selection provides the option to wrap all elements, components, surfaces or solids, or only a certain portion of the model if desired. The input to the shrink wrap (that is, the model parts that you wish to wrap) can consist of 2-D or 3-D elements along with surfaces or solids. The shrink wrap is able to stitch over very bad geometry to generate an enclosed volume mesh for tetra-meshing. The shrink wrap tool can work from elements (whether 2-D or 3-D) or geometry. Thus, in the case of an "unclean" geometry model with many released (free) edges, you can either generate any arbitrary mesh on the unclean geometry using the automesh functionality beforehand and then create s hrink wra p or you can simply select the surface or solid without meshing the geometry first; either of these steps will yield good output mesh. (The key in such cases is to ensure that the element size used for the shrink wrap is large enough to stitch over the unclean surface edge splits so that an enclosed volume can be created.) The element size affects the ability of the shrink wrap to follow the geometry of the model. The larger the element size, the more simplified the model will appear. With a smaller element size the shrink wrap will more closely follow the model. The jacobian value for the solid mesh follows the same type of pattern. As the jacobian value gets smaller the shrink wrap more closely follows the profile of the model. Note that the smaller the jacobian value, the longer it takes to generate the mesh. Shrink wrap mesh can be generated as a surface mesh, or as a full-volume hex mesh, by use of the Shrink Wrap . The distinction between surface or volume mesh is a checkbox labeled generate solid mesh.

Altair Engineering


209

This tutorial uses the model called shrinkwrap.hm in the \tutorials\hm folder.

Step 1: Open the model shrinkwrap.hm. Step 2: Create a loose shell shrink wrap mesh in the lo o se _ga p component. 1.

Click Sha de d G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce E dge s if the model is not shaded already.

2.

Review the surface geometry on the screen.

3.

Click the M e s h > C re a te > Shrink W ra p M e s h.

210


Altair Engineering

4.

Click the tight wra p toggle to change it to lo o s e wra p.

5.

Select the component in the graphics area.

6.

For e le m e nt s iz e , enter 4.

7.

Click m e s h to create the shrink wrap.

8.

Expand the C o m po ne nt folder in the Model Browser.

9.

Hide the s urfa ce s component in the Model Browser.

10.


Step 3: Review the solid geometry. 1.

Hide the loose_gap component in the Model browser.

2.

Show the blo ck component in the Model browser.

3.

Review the model to see the features.

4.

Hide the blo ck component in the Model browser.

Altair Engineering


211

Step 4: Create a loose shell shrink wrap mesh in the lo o se component. 1.

Right-click the lo o s e component and click M a ke C urre nt.

2.

Click co m ps and select blo ck from the component list (deselect any others, if necessary).

3.

For the e le m e nt s iz e , enter 10.

4.


5.

Click re je ct to reject the mesh.

6.

Change the e le m e nt s iz e to 5.

212


Altair Engineering

7.


8.

Change the e le m e nt s iz e to 3.

9.


Altair Engineering


213

The shrink wrap mesh with the geometry hidden

Step 5: Create a tight shell shrink wrap in the tight_she ll component. 1.

Hide the lo o s e component using the Model Browser.

2.

Right-click tight_s he ll and click M a ke C urre nt.

3.

Click the loose wrap toggle and change it to tight wrap.

4.

Click co m ps and select the blo ck component.

5.

Make sure the e le m e nt s iz e is set to 3.

6.

Click m e s h to create the mesh. Note how the tight mesh conforms much more closely to the model's geometry than the loose mesh did, even at the same element size.

214


Altair Engineering

Step 6: Create a tight solid shrink wrap in the tight_so lid component 1.

Hide the tight_s he ll component in the Model Browser.

2.

Right-click the tight_s o lid component in the Model Browser and click M a ke C urre nt.

3.

Activate the ge ne ra te s o lid m e s h option.

4.

Click co m ps and select the blo ck component.

5.

Change the m inim um ja co bia n to 1.

6.

Click m e s h to create the mesh. Note that the resulting mesh is very blocky, due to the high Jacobian value.

Altair Engineering


215

7.


8.

Change the m inim um ja co bia n to 0.7.

9.

Click m e s h to create the shrinkwrap. This time, the mesh is smoother than it was when Jacobian was set at 1.0.

216


Altair Engineering

10.

Click

to open the Mask .

11.

If not already set, set the collector to e le m s .

12.

Use SHIFT + left mouse button to select a group of elements.

13.


14.

Click re turn to exit the . Rotate the model to that the mesh generation was a solid mesh, with 3D elements throughout the model.

Altair Engineering


217

The 3D mesh fills the model's volume, rather than only covering its outer surfaces.

Step 7 (Optional): Change the minimum jacobian to 0.3 for optimized mesh. 1.

Click unm a s k a ll.

2.

Use the Delete to delete the elements on the displayed portion of the model in the graphics area.

3.

Click co m ps and select the blo ck component form the list.

218


Altair Engineering

4.

For the m inim um ja co bia n, enter 0.3.

5.

Click m e s h to generate the mesh. Note the difference in smoothness of the mesh compared to the mesh that was created with higher Jacobian values.

Altair Engineering


219

3-D Elements HM-3200: Tetrameshing HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager

220


Altair Engineering

HM-3200: Tetrameshing In this tutorial, you will learn about: Volume tetra mesher Standard tetra mesher Checking tetra element quality Remeshing tetra elements HyperMesh provides two methods of generating a tetrahedral element mesh. The volume tetra mesher works directly with surface or solid geometry to automatically generate a tetrahedral mesh without further interaction from the . Even with complex geometry, this method can often generate a high quality tetra mesh quickly and easily. The standard tetra mesher requires a surface mesh of tria or quad elements as input, then provides you with a number of options to control the resulting tetrahedral mesh. This offers a great deal of control over the tetrahedral mesh, and provides the means to generate a tetrahedral mesh for even the most complex models. The Tetramesh allows you to fill an enclosed volume with first or second order tetrahedral elements. A region is considered enclosed if it is entirely bounded by a shell mesh (tria or quad elements) where each element has material on one side and open space on the other.

Exercise

Step 1: Retrieve and view the model file. The model for this exercise is housing.hm. Take a few moments to observe the model using the different visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.). Only the geometry in the component cover is currently displayed. The file contains two parts defined by a volume of surfaces. The geometry has been cleaned such that surface connectivity is proper and surface edges that would cause sliver elements are suppressed.

Step 2: Use the volume tetra mesher and equilateral triangles to create a tetra mesh for the cover. 1.

Access the Tetramesh from the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > Te tra Mesh

2.

Go to the Volume tetra sub.

3.

Set the entity selector to s urfs and select one of the surfaces in the model. The connected surfaces are selected automatically.

4.

that 2D type: is set to tria s and 3D type: is set to te tra s .

Altair Engineering


221

These control the type of element that will be created for the surface mesh and solid mesh of the part. 5.

Select E le m s to C urre nt C o m p to place the newly created elements in the current component collector.

6.

that the Use curvature and Use proximity options are not active.

7.

For Element size specify 10.

8.

Click m e s h to create the tetra mesh.

9.

From the toolbar, click Sha de d E le m e nts a nd M e s h Line s (

10.

Take a moment to inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.

).

Tetra mesh from the volume tetra sub and equilateral triangles ( 2 D : tr ia s )

11.

Click re je ct to reject the mesh. The mesh is deleted.

Step 3: Use the volume tetra mesher and right triangles to create a tetra mesh for the cover. You should still be in the Tetramesh / Volume tetra sub. 1.

Select one of the surfaces in the model.

2.

Switch 2D type: to R - tria s .

3.


4.

Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.

5.

Compare it to the first mesh you created and note the differences. The 2D type: R tria s setting tends to create tetra elements with triangular faces that are right triangles (90-45-45 angles) while the 2D type: tria s setting tends to create equilateral triangles

222


Altair Engineering

(60-60-60 angles).

Tetra mesh from the volume tetra sub and right triangles (2D type: R - tr ia s )

6.


Step 4: Use the volume tetra mesher to create a tetra mesh with more elements along curved surfaces. You should still be in the Volume tetra sub. 1.


2.

Activate the option, us e curv a ture . Additional parameters appear. The option, Use curvature, causes more elements to be created along areas of high surface curvature. Thus, curved areas such as fillets will have more and smaller elements, which capture those features with higher resolution.

3.

For Min element size specify 1.0.

4.

that Feature angle is set to 30.

5.


6.

Shade the tetrahedral elements.

7.

Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created.

8.

Compare it to the previous meshes you created and note the differences. More elements are created around the fillets.

Altair Engineering


223

Tetra mesh from the volume tetra sub- and the option u s e cu r v a tu r e active

9.


Step 5: Use the volume tetra mesher to create a tetra mesh with more elements around small features. You should still be in the Volume tetra sub. 1.


2.

Activate the Us e pro xim ity option. The Use proximity option causes the mesh to be refined in areas where surfaces are smaller. The result is a nice transition from small elements on small surfaces to larger elements on larger, adjacent surfaces.

3.


4.

Shade the elements.

5.

Inspect the mesh pattern that the volume tetra mesher created. Compare it to the previous meshes you created and note the differences. More elements were created around surfaces with small angles as indicated in the following image.

224


Altair Engineering

Tetra mesh from the volume tetra sub with options U s e cu r v a tu r e and U s e p r o x im ity

Step 6: Prepare the display to tetra mesh the hub component using the standard tetra mesher. 1.

Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to turn off the display of geometry for all components.

2.

Turn on the display of the geometry for the hub component.

3.

Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to turn off the display of elements for all components.

4.

Turn on the display for the hub and te tra s components for elements. There are tria shell elements in the hub component. Currently, there are no elements in the te tra s component.

5.


Step 7 (Optional): Review the connectivity and quality of the tria mesh to validate its integrity for the standard tetra mesher. Use the Edges and Check Elems s to make sure that there are no free edges or very small angles in the tria shell mesh. 1.

Access the Edges from the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C he ck > C o m po ne nts > E dge s .

2.

With the comps selector active, pick any tria element on the hub component.

3.

Click find e dge s . A message in the status bar should state, "No e dge s found. Se le c t e d e le m e nt s m a y e nc lose a v olum e ."

Altair Engineering


225

This is desired as the tetra mesher requires a closed volume of shell elements. 4.


5.

Access the Check Elements from the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > C he ck E le m e nts .

6.

that you are in the 2-d sub.

7.

Identify elements having an a s pe ct ratio greater than 5. Aspect ratio is the ratio of the longest edge of an element to its shortest edge. This check helps you to identify sliver elements. All of the hub’s shell elements the check; all of the elements have an aspect ratio less than 5.

8.

Identify tria elements having an angle less than 20. ( tria s : m in a ngle ) This check also helps you to identify sliver elements. All the hub’s shell elements the check; all the elements have angles greater than 20. The surface mesh is suitable for creating a tetra mesh.

9.


Step 8: Create a tetra mesh for the hub using the standard tetra mesher. 1.

Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to set the current component to te tra s .

2.

Access the Tetramesh from the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > Te tra M e s h.

3.

Enter the Tetra mesh sub.

4.

With the comps selector active under Float trias/quads to tetra mesh, select one of the hub shell elements from the graphics area. Using this option, HyperMesh will swap the diagonal for any pair of surface trias that will result in a better tetra mesh quality. If you would rather keep the diagonal, see substep 5

5.

(Optional) To keep the diagonal as is, select the co m ps selector under Fixed trias/ quads to tetra mesh.

6.

Click m e s h to generate the tetrahedral elements.

226


Altair Engineering

C ut-away view of tetrahedral elements

Step 9: Check the quality of the hub’s tetra elements. 1.

Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to display only the elements in the tetras component.

2.

Access the Check Elements .

3.

Go to the 3-d sub.

4.

Identify the smallest element le ngth among the displayed elements. If the minimum length is acceptable for a target element size of 5.0, then no further action is necessary.

5.

Identify the smallest angle ( tria fa ce s : m in a ngle ) among the displayed elements. If the minimum tria face angle is no less than 10°, then the mesh quality should be acceptable.

6.

Identify elements having a te t co lla ps e smaller than 0.3. The tet collapse criteria is a normalized volume check for tetrahedral elements. A value of 1 indicates a perfectly formed element with maximum possible volume. A value of 0 indicates a completely collapsed element with no volume. The message bar indicates that three elements have a tetra collapse smaller than 0.3.

Altair Engineering


227

Step 10: Isolate the element with the tetra collapse smaller than 0.2 and find the elements surrounding it. You should still be in the Check Elements . 1.

With 0.3 still specified for tet collapse, click te t co lla ps e again.

2.

Click s a v e fa ile d. The element that failed the tetra collapse check is saved in the mark, and can be retrieved in any using the extended selection menu.

3.


4. Access the Mask from the Display toolbar by selecting M a s k (

).

You can also press F5 on your keyboard to enter the Mask . 5.

Set the entity selector to elems and select e le m s > > re trie v e . The element that was saved in the Check Elements is retrieved.

6.

Select e le m s > > re v e rs e .

7.

Click m a s k to mask the elements. Only the one tetra element that failed the tetra collapse check should be displayed.

8.


9.

On the Display toolbar, click Unm a s k Adja ce nt (

).

The layer of elements that is attached to the one displayed element is identified and displayed. 10.

Click Unm a s k Adja ce nt two more times. The layer of elements that is attached to the displayed elements is identified and displayed. The functionality of unmask adjacent can be duplicated using the Find , find attached sub on the Tool page.

11.

Use the Model Browser to turn off the display of the hub elements that were unmasked.

Step 11: Remesh the hub’s displayed tetra elements to improve their tetra collapse. 1.

Access the Tetramesh .

2.

Go to the Tetra remesh sub.

3.

For 3D elements, select e le m s > > dis pla y e d.

228


Altair Engineering

4.

Click re m e s h to regenerate this area of the mesh.

5.


6.

Access the Check Elements .

7.

Click te t co lla ps e to find out if the tetra collapse has improved for the displayed elements. The message in the status bar should indicate that the minimum tetra collapse is larger than the value reported before the tetra elements were remeshed.

8.


Step 12 (Optional): Save your work. Now that the tetra mesh is complete, it is a good time to save the model.

Summary A tetra mesh has been created for both parts in the file. Different procedures for tetra meshing were used. Either method can be used to mesh parts, depending on the needs of the analysis. Also, the tetra remesh function was used to show how to quickly fix the quality of tetra elements.

Altair Engineering


229

HM-3210: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create solids using different functions Check and fix improper model connectivity For some analyses, it is desirable to use a mesh of hexahedral and pentahedral elements. This is especially true for parts which have a large thickness compared to the element size being used, or for parts that have many features and/or changes in thickness. Castings or forgings are good examples.

Exercise: Creating a Hex-Penta Mesh using Surfaces

This exercise uses the model file, arm_bracket.hm. This exercise introduces you to a number of HyperMesh functions that are used to create hexa-penta meshes. The model is organized into four IGES layers, consisting of 1) the base, 2) the first section of the arm, with a constant cross section and curvature, 3) the second section of the arm, with a tapered cross section, and 4) the boss.

Step 1: Retrieve and review model file. Open the arm_bracket.hm file.

Step 2: Mesh the top surface of the base, including the L-shaped surface. 1.

Set the active component collector to base using the HyperMesh Model Browser. In

230


Altair Engineering

the Model Browser right-click ba s e and select M a ke C urre nt. 2.

While in the HyperMesh Model Browser, hide all components except the base component.

3.

Access the Automesh from the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h.

4.

Select the surfaces on the top of the base, including the L-shaped surface at the intersection of the base and the arm. For this part of the exercise it might be easier to view the geometry in a shaded mode by clicking Sha de d G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce E dge s (

5.

Select the s iz e a nd bia s sub.

6.

Set the meshing mode to a uto m a tic.

7.

For element size = specify 10.

8.

For mesh type specify qua ds o nly .

9.


).

Resulting quad mesh on base surfaces

10.

Click re turn to return to the main menu. You can now change back to an unshaded view for the geometry.

Step 3: Create layers of hex elements for the base. 1.

Go to the Elem Offset by selecting M e s h > C re a te > 3D E le m e nts > E le m e nt O ffs e t from the menu bar.

2.

Select the s o lid la y e rs sub.

3.

Under elems to offset, select e le m s > > dis pla y e d to select the elements on the base

Altair Engineering


231

. 4.

For num be r o f la y e rs = specify 5.

5.

For to ta l thickne s s = specify 25.

6.

Click o ffs e t+ . The hexa mesh is created.

Hex mesh on base

Step 4: Prepare the display for meshing the arm’s curved segment. 1.

Turn on the display of the arm_curve component using the HyperMesh Model Browser .

2.

Press the F5 key to go to the Mask .

3.

Select e le m s > > by co nfig, and select the he x8 configuration.

4.

Click s e le ct e ntitie s . All of the elements with a configuration of hex8 in the model are selected.

5.


6.


Step 5: Create a node at the center of the arm radius. The first segment of the arm can be meshed using the Spin . This requires a node to be selected as the center point of rotation. The node you create in this step will be used as that center point. To create the center node, you will use the distance / 3 nodes sub. 1.

Press the F4 key to enter the Distance .

232


Altair Engineering

2.


3.

With the N1 selector active, create the temporary nodes on one of the curved lines of the arm as described below: Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor over a curved line. Once over the line, the cursor will change to a square with a dot in the center, and the line will be highlighted. Release your mouse button.

,

4.

Click three locations along the selected line. The active selector advances from N1 to N2 to N3, and the locations will be selected as though there was a node there.

5.

Click circle ce nte r to create the node at the center. This node will be used in the next step when you mesh the arm.

Three nodes to create a center node

6.


Step 6: Create hexa elements in the curved portion of the arm using spin. 1.

Set arm_curve as the current component using the HyperMesh Model Browser.

2.

Go to the Spin by selecting M e s h > C re a te > 3D E le m e nts > Spin from the menu bar.

Altair Engineering


233

3.

Select the s pin e le m s sub.

4.

Using e le m s > > by windo w, select the plate elements within the L-shaped cross section of the arm.

5.


Elements to select for spin function

6.

For angle = specify 90 degrees.

7.

For the direction, select the x- a xis (Y-Z plane).

8.

For the base node ( B ), click the center node created in step 5.

9.

For on spin = specify 24. 24 layers of hex elements will be created when the plate elements are spun.

10.

Click s pin - .

11.


234


Altair Engineering

spin results

Step 7: Create faces on the hex elements. 1.

Go to the Faces by selecting M e s h > C he ck > C o m pe ne nts > Fa ce s from the menu bar.

2.

With the entity selector set to comps, select the arm_curve component.

3.

Click find fa ce s . 2-D shell elements are created on the free faces of every 3-D solid element in the component. They are placed in a new component named ^faces. The ^faces component is created with its visualization set to wireframe, so you will not be able to see the new elements right away if the arm_curve component is displayed and in shaded mode.

4.

On the toolbar click Sha de d E le m e nts & M e s h Line s (

) to shade the elements.

You will now see the elements in the ^faces component.

Step 8: Prepare the display for meshing the second arm segment. 1.

Use the Model Browser to turn on the display for the arm_straight and ^faces components.

Step 9: Mesh the L-shaped set of surfaces between the arm_straight and boss components. 1.

Set the current component collector to arm_straight.

Altair Engineering


235

2.

Go to the Automesh .

3.

Select the three surfaces lying on the intersection between the arm_straight and boss components. These surfaces are in the arm_straight component.

4.

Set the meshing mode to inte ra ctiv e .

5.

Click m e s h to go to the meshing module.

6.

From the density sub, adjust the densities to obtain a mesh that matches the following image. This mesh pattern matches the mesh pattern at the intersection of the two arm segments. This is necessary for the next step.

Densities to correspond to the mesh on the end face

7.

Click m e s h to update the mesh density.

8.

Click re turn to create the elements and go back to the Automesh .

9.


Step 10: Use linear solid to build the mesh between the two sets of shell elements. 1.

Access the Linear Solid through the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > 3D E le m e nts > Line a r 3D .

236


Altair Engineering

2.

With the from: elems selector active, select the ^faces elements lying on the intersection between the first and second arm segments. You can select one of the elements and then select elems >> by face to select the rest of the necessary elements.

3.

Click the to : e le m s selector to make it active. Then select the shell elements between the arm and boss, which you created using the Automesh in the last step.

4.

Click the fro m : a lignm e nt: N1 selector to make it active. Then select three nodes on one of the "from elements" you selected in sub-step 10.2.

5.

Click the to : a lignm e nt: N1 selector to make it active. Then select three nodes on the "to element" corresponding to the "from element" with the three "from nodes" you selected in sub-step 10.4. Refer to the following image.

Example selection for alignment nodes

6.

For density = specify 12.

7.

Click s o lids to create the mesh.

Altair Engineering


237

Linear solid mesh

8. Click re turn to the main menu.

Step 11: Prepare the display for meshing the boss. 1.

Use the HyperMesh Model Browser to show the boss component.

Step 12: Create a shell mesh on the bottom of the boss. 1.

Set the current component collector to boss.

2.


3.

Select the five surfaces on the bottom face of the boss.

4.

Click m e s h to go to the meshing module.

5.

Adjust the densities to match the following image:

238


Altair Engineering

Mesh densities on the bottom of the boss

6.

Click m e s h to update the mesh density.

7.

Click re turn twice to return to the main menu.

Step 13: Project a node to the bottom face of the boss. 1.

Go to the Project by selecting M e s h > Pro je ct > No de s from the menu bar.

2.

Select the to line sub.

3.

Select the node on the rightmost top vertex, as per the following image.

4.

Click no de s > > duplica te .

5.

For the to line select the line on the boss’ top face. Refer to the following image.

Altair Engineering


239

Projecting a node to a line

6.

Select a lo ng v e cto r: x- a xis .

7.

Click pro je ct to project the node to the line.

8.


Step 14: Generate hexas for the boss using the Solid Map . 1.

Go to the Solid Map by selecting M e s h > C re a te > So lid M a p M e s h from the menu bar.

2.

Go to the ge ne ra l sub.

3.

Select s o urce ge o m : (no ne ).

4.

Select de s t ge o m : s urf and select the top surface of the boss.

5.

Select a lo ng ge o m : m ixe d.

6.

Under a lo ng ge o m : m ixe d, click line s to make it the active selector.

7.

Select the line indicated in the following image.

8.

Click no de pa th to make it the active selector.

9.

Select nodes to define the exact location of the solid element layers, as indicated in the following image. A total of 13 nodes should be selected, starting at the boss mesh, and then using all of

240


Altair Engineering

the nodes along the edge of the arm_straight component, ending with the node projected to the top of the boss.

Along nodes for solid map

10.

For e le m s to dra g:, select e le m s > > by co lle cto r and select the boss component.

11.

Click m e s h. The elements are created and the mesh on this part is completed.

Altair Engineering


241

C ompleted mesh of the arm bracket

12.


Step 15 (optional): Check the connectivity of the model. 1.

Go to the Faces ( M e s h > C he ck > C o m po ne nts > Fa ce s ).

2.

Click co m ps to go to a list of components.

3.

Select every component from the list, or select co m ps > > a ll.

4.

Click s e le ct complete the selection and go back to the Faces .

5.

Click find fa ce s .

6.

Turn off the geometry display of all components via the Model Browser.

7.

Turn off the element display of all components except ^faces.

8.

Click re turn to exit the the .

9.

On the Post page select hidde n line .

10.

Activate the xz pla ne and trim pla ne options.

11.

Click s ho w plo t. The faces are now displayed with a plane cutting the model in half. This is so that the

242


Altair Engineering

interior of the model can be viewed. 12.

Click near the cutting plane. Holding the left mouse button down, move the mouse back and forth. The cutting plane moves through the model, allowing you to see if any face elements exist on the interior of the model. You should see that there are face elements interior to the model, between the boss and arm. You need to perform some corrections on the connectivity.

Hidden line view of faces

13.


Step 16 (Optional): Correct the connectivity of the model. 1.

Display elements for all components except for the ^faces component.

2.

Display the elements of the solidmap component as transparent.

3.

Go to the Faces .

4.


5.

Click pre v ie w e quiv . Coincident nodes on the intersection between the arm and the boss are highlighted.

6.

Specify a slightly larger value for to le ra nce = , and click pre v ie w e quiv to identify more

Altair Engineering


243

coincident nodes on the intersection. 7.

Repeat sub-step 16.6 until all 60 coincident nodes have been found.

8.

Click e quiv a le nce . The nodes are replaced to the location of the lowest node ID.

9.

Switch all the components to the shaded visual mode.

Step 17 (Optional): Recheck the connectivity of the model. Repeat Step 15 to make sure the model is now equivalenced. If you find errors, repeat Step 16.

Step 18 (Optional): Save your work. The 3-D solid mesh has now been completed. Save the model if desired.

244


Altair Engineering

HM-3220: Creating a Hexahedral Mesh using the Solid Map Function In this tutorial, you will learn: What solid geometry is What topology is What 3-D topology looks like Solids are geometric entities that define a three-dimensional volume. The use of solid geometry is helpful when dividing a part into multiple volumes. For example, divide a part into simple, mappable regions to hex mesh the part.

Exercise: Hex-meshing Solid Geometry

This exercise uses the model file, solid_map.hm.

Step 1: Retrieve model file, solid_map.hm. Step 2: Mesh the 1/8th sphere-shaped region.

Altair Engineering


245

1.

On the toolbar, click Sha de d G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce E dge s (

2.

Enter the Solid Map through the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > So lid M a p M e s h.

3.

Go to the o ne v o lum e sub.

4.

Under along parameters:, set elem size= to 1.

5.

With the solid entity selector under volume to mesh active, select the small cubeshaped solid, as shown in the following image.

6.

Click m e s h.

7.

On the toolbar, click Sha de d E le m e nts with M e s h Line s (

8.

Select the solid indicated in the following image.

246


).

).

Altair Engineering

9.

Click m e s h.

10.


Step 3: Create a shell mesh with the Automesh to control a mesh pattern. 1.

Enter the Automesh through the menu bar by selecting M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h.

2.

Select the surface indicated in the following image.

Altair Engineering


247

3.

that the meshing method is set to s iz e a nd bia s and inte ra ctiv e .

4.

Set the element size = to 1.000.

5.

that mesh type: is set to m ixe d.

6.

Click m e s h.

7.

In the elem density = field, enter 4.

8.

Click s e t a ll to . All the densities are set to 4.

9.

Click m e s h.

10.

Click re turn twice to return to the main menu.

Step 4: Mesh the solid volume on which the surface mesh was created in Step 3. 1.

Enter the Solid Map by clicking M e s h > C re a te > So lid M a p M e s h.

2.

Go to the o ne v o lum e sub.

3.

Select the volume shown in the following image.

248


Altair Engineering

4.

Under along parameters:, toggle e le m s iz e = to de ns ity = and then enter 10.

5.

Click m e s h.

6.

Rotate the part and note how the mesh pattern created with the Automesh has been used for the solid elements.

Step 5: Mesh the remaining solid volumes. You should still be in the solid map . 1.

Select one of the remaining unmeshed solid volumes.

Altair Engineering


249

Make sure to select a solid adjacent to one that has already been meshed so that connectivity is maintained. 2.

For source shells: select m ixe d.

3.

Under along parameters:, toggle de ns ity = to e le m s iz e = and enter 1.5.

4.

Click m e s h.

5.

Repeat until all solid volumes are meshed.

6.


Step 6 (Optional): Save your work. With this section of the exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.

Automated Solid Map Meshing The capability to automate the solid map meshing process is now available. Using the “Mappable” visualization mode in conjunction with the multi-solids feature will inform you that the solid(s) are ready for solid meshing. Using the multi-solids feature will allow for all solids within the model to be meshed in one step provided that they are mappable. In this section of the tutorial we will delete all the elements from the previous section. Use the Mappable visualization mode and solid mesh the part using multi-solids.

Step 7: Delete the elements within the model. 1.

Press F2 to access the Delete .

2.

Select all the elements.

3.

Click de le te e ntity .

4.


Step 8: Use the mappable visualization mode. 1.

On the toolbar, click Sha de d G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce s (

2.

From the G e o m e try Vis ua liz a tio n pull-down, select M a ppa ble (

). ).

You will notice that each solid is color coded, the color of the solid represents its mappable state. The goal is to ensure that each solid is either 1-directional or 3directional mappable. The color of the mappable state can be found (and adjusted if necessary) within the Pre fe re nce s > C o lo rs GUI within the Geometry tab.

250


Altair Engineering

By mappable display control (solids) ignored map

Default visualization for solids that require partitioning to become mappable.

not mappable

Visualization for solids that have been edited, but still require further partitioning to create mappable solids.

1 dir. map

Visualization for solids that can be mapped (for 3-D meshing) in one direction.

3 dir. map

Visualization for solids that can be mapped (for 3-D meshing) in three directions.

Altair Engineering


251

Once in the mappable visualization mode it is clear that there is one 3-directional mappable solid and the rest are 1-directional mappable.

Step 9: Use the multi-solid feature to mesh the part. 1.

From the menu bar, click M e s h > C re a te > So lid M a p M e s h to open the Solid Map .

2.

Select the m ulti s o lids sub.

3.

Select all the solids.

4.

For source shells, select m ixe d and set elem size: to 1.

5.

Click m e s h. This will bring you to an interactive mesh mode.

6.

Select m e s h again to accept the shell elements and create the solid elements.

The solids will be sequentially solid meshed. Once complete inspect the model and note that the mesh within all of the solids is correctly equivalenced.

252


Altair Engineering

7.

Select re turn to accept the solid element mesh and return to the Solid Map .

Step 10 (Optional): Save your work. With this exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.

Altair Engineering


253

HM-3270: Using the TetraMesh Process Manager In this tutorial, you will learn ing the TetraMesh Process Manager to: Import geometry or a HyperMesh File Clean up the geometry Organize the model (holes and features) Establish mesh size and pattern for the organized geometry Create a 2-D Mesh Clean up the 2-D mesh Create a 3-D TetraMesh The Process Manager is a step-by-step tool providing a checklist of procedures to allow the to quickly organize and tetramesh a geometric model. Each step is provided in a hierarchal list providing the order in which the process needs to be performed and providing specialized tools at each step to simplify the process. These steps, while they can be done manually, can be performed in the TetraMesh Process Manager template in a much reduced timeframe.

Exercise

Step 1: Initiate the Process Manager. 1.

From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > Te tra M e s h Pro ce s s > C re a te Ne w to access the Process Manager.

2.

Enter a session name or leave it as my_session. Note: Creating a session name and saving the session allows the to stop the process before completion and then load it again at a later time, picking up the process at the point it was left off.

3.

Select a working folder.

4.

Click C re a te .

Step 2: Import geometry. At this point the TetraMesh Process tab will open in the tab area and will automatically assemble the TetraMesh Process Flow. The first step, Geometry Import, is highlighted and the area has been configured with specific s for aiding the Tetramesh Process Manager template. You can access the HyperMesh s by undocking the Process Manager s using the

254

icon in the upper right corner of the area. This will separate the


Altair Engineering

Process Manager s so that you can also access the HyperMesh standard s. To redock the Process Manager , simply click on Manager .

in the upper right corner of the Process

1.

In the area, change the Import Type to H M M o de l.

2.

On the toolbar, click O pe n .hm File ( ) and select the file tetmesh_pm.hm from \tutorials\hm\.

3.

Click Im po rt. The model will import and a green check will appear next to Geometry Import in the Process Manager indicating that step is now complete.

Step 3: Clean up the geometry. 1.

From the Geometry Color Mode selector ( G e o m e try a nd Surfa ce E dge s ( ).

2.

In the area, select the E dge To o ls tab.

3.

Click Is o la te .

) pick B y To po , then click Sha de d

This will isolate the surfaces with free edges on them.

Isolated Surfaces with free edges.

4.

Select the Fre e E dge s tab and click E quiv a le nce . This will fix all the free edges. If this did not correct all of the free edges, the Tolerance value could be increased until all free edges are equivalenced.

5.

Select the E dge To o ls tab and click Is o la te again. A window should appear with the message, No e dge s found have been fixed.

6.

This confirms all edges

Click D is pla y All.

Altair Engineering


255

7.

Click AC C E PT. The Geometry Cleanup step has been completed and should have a green checkmark by it.

Step 4: Organize and Clean up holes. This step will allow you to organize the surfaces that form holes in the model. The TetraMesh Process Manager can automatically sort and organize holes into separate component collectors based upon their diameter. This will allow you to specify mesh type, circumference element count, and longitudinal element size for different hole groups. 1.

In the area, click the "+ " button. This will add a third line to the table.

2.

On the first line, enter 3.3 into the D< field. This will organize all holes with a diameter between 0 and 3.3 units, as indicated by the Range field, into a collector.

3.

Enter 5 into the second row and 10 into the third. This will allow HyperMesh to organize the holes into three collectors that will include holes ranging from 0 - 3.3 units, 3.3 - 5 units and 5 - 10 units collectively.

4.

Click Auto O rga niz e . All of the holes in the model less than 10 units will now be organized into three component collectors, each with a different color.

5.

Click the HyperMesh Model Browser tab and expand the folder for Components. You will see three new component collectors with the name solidholes followed by the numerical average of the diameter range of the holes organized.

256


Altair Engineering

Transparent view of model showing all holes and bores organized

6.

Return to the TetraMesh Process Manager tab.

7.

In the Num Circumference Elems field enter 12 for each row.

8.

In the Longitudinal Elem Size field enter 1 for each row. The Num Circumference Elems field governs the number of elements that will be meshed around the hole while the Longitudinal Elem Size field dictates the unit size of the elements through the length of the hole.

9.

Click AC C E PT. The Organize & Cleanup Holes step is now complete should now have a green checkmark next to it.

Step 5: Mesh holes. 1.

In the area you will notice that each hole diameter row has a Mesh Type field with a pull-down providing the options of R-tria regular and R-tria union jack. that all are set for R-tria regular and click M e s h All. (The R-tria union jack mesh pattern will be discussed in a later step.) You will notice this process provides a perfectly straight tria mesh down the length of

Altair Engineering


257

the hole with no twisting.

2.

Click AC C E PT. The checkmark in the Mesh Holes step will now turn green.

Step 6: Organize and clean up features. This step allows you to highlight and organize features that require specific mesh controls beyond the overall mesh pattern that will be applied to the remainder of the part in a later step. This organizational tool will place the required surfaces into their own collector or collectors and allow you to set mesh size and pattern requirements for each. 1.

In the area, click the "+ " button.

2.

In the Define New window that opens, type Faces and click O K.

3.

Select all five of the flat faces around the circumference of the part as shown in the following image.

4.

Click pro ce e d.

258


Altair Engineering

Faces that need to be picked

The will switch to the Organize with your surfaces pre-selected to move into a new component called grp_Faces. 5.

Click m o v e , then re turn.

6.

Click the "+ " button again.

7.

In the Define New window that opens, type TopHole and click O K.

8.

Rotate the model so you are looking at it from underneath into the center, and select the surfaces shown in the following image.

Altair Engineering


259

Note: With this tool you need only select one of the two surfaces that make up a cylinder; when you click pro ce e d HyperMesh will automatically select the other surfaces. 9.

Click pro ce e d.

10.

In the Organize , click m o v e , then re turn. Your model should then look similar to the following image, with the faces in one collector and the top hole in another. Your colors may vary slightly.

260


Altair Engineering

11.

Click AC C E PT.

Step 7: Organize and clean up filets. Often a better mesh can be achieved if your fillets are split down the center. The step will allow you to automatically split your fillets based on minimum and maximum radius criteria. 1.

Click C o m po ne nts .

2.

Select the part in an area that has not been organized into a new component so that the large purple part is selected.

3.

Click pro ce e d.

4.

Leave the Min Radius at 0 and the Max Radius at 5 and make sure the Suppress Fillet Tangent Edges option is active.

5.

Click C le a nup. You will notice that many of the fillets now have an edge running down the center and the original edges are suppressed.

6.

Click AC C E PT.

Step 8: Mesh features. In this step you will mesh the features that you organized in Step 6. The area will show a table with your organized features in it and will give you the option of selecting a mesh type and size for each feature. 1.

For the Faces feature, click the pull-down under Mesh Type and pick tria s .

2.

In the field under Elem Size, enter 0.5.

3.

For the TopHole feature, select R - tria unio n ja ck for the Mesh Type.

4.

For Elem Size, enter 0.5.

5.

Click M e s h All.

Altair Engineering


261

6.

Note the distinctive Union Jack mesh pattern ( ) in the top hole area and the connectivity of the mesh to the previously meshed holes.

7.

Click AC C E PT.

Step 9: Organize and clean up. This step allows the to organize and clean up the remaining portion of the model that will then fall under the global meshing parameters. As the remaining surfaces are already in the component you wish them to be in, there is no need for further organization. 1.

Click AC C E PT.

Step 10: Mesh/remesh. This step is where the remaining model will be globally meshed. Element size and type can be set for all remaining components that remain unmeshed. 1.

In the Element Size field, enter 1.

2.

Set Mesh Type to tria s .

3.

Click M e s h.

4.

Click AC C E PT.

262


Altair Engineering

Step 11: Clean up elements. At this point the model should be entirely surface meshed. Proper adherence to the previous steps ensures a surface mesh that is properly connected and controlled by the previously entered values. This step will now allow the to a proper mesh and clean up any issues that are found. 1.

In the area, click C o m po ne nts .

2.

Select all of the components and click pro ce e d.

3.

Leave all of the values at their default (Min Size – 0.25, Max FeatureAngle – 60.0, Normals Angle – 150.0) and click Auto C le a nup. The following message should appear.

This indicates that all failed elements have been fixed and there are no further errors in the model. 4.

(Optional) The Manual tab allows the to manually check the model for free edges and t-junctions and fix any that are found. There is also the option to display normals. Use these options to find and fix any errors.

5.

Click AC C E PT. Note: The Tetramesh Process Manager will automatically place any elements that fail this AutoCleanup procedure in the mark. This will allow for easy retrieval of problem elements and the can employ the tools from the standard HyperMesh s to fix these remaining elements.

Step 12: Tetra mesh. This is the final step in the TetraMesh Process Manager Template and will be the point where the model is Tetra meshed. The Process Manager will automatically open the TetraMesh and pre-select all of the float and fixed elements. 1.

Click e le m s under Float trias/quads to tetra mesh. The surface elements will be selected under the general mesh selection option. This will define them as “floatable” elements, meaning that the diagonals of the underlying tetra

Altair Engineering


263

elements can be flipped from the generated shell elements if HyperMesh determines a better element quality will result. 2.

Click e le m s under Fixed trias/quads to tetra mesh. The elements that represent the interior of holes and bores will be selected under this option. The will be defined as “fixed” elements meaning HyperMesh will always adhere to the shell mesh pattern with generating the tetra elements.

3.

Click m e s h.

4.

Click the M o de l tab in the tab area.

5.

Expand the Components list if necessary.

6.

Right-click the tetmesh component.

7.

Select Is o la te O nly . The tetra mesh will be displayed.

8.

Click the M a s k button (

9.

Hold the <SHIFT> key down and while holding the left mouse button down, drag a box to include roughly half of the model.

10.

Click m a s k.

).

Your tetra mesh should look similar to the following image.

Step 13 (Optional): Save your work. You can now save your model if you wish.

264


Altair Engineering

Altair Engineering


265

Quality HM-3300: Checking and Editing Mesh HM-3320: Penetration

266


Altair Engineering

HM-3300: Checking and Editing Mesh In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Identify shell element connectivity problems Correct shell element connectivity problems Review the model’s shell elements to ensure connectivity problems were corrected Remesh the elements along the rib

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, cover.hm.

Step 1: Retrieve and view the HyperMesh model file. Open the file cover.hm located in the \tutorials\hm directory.

Step 2: Review the model’s free edges to identify shell element connectivity problems. 1.

Access the Edges in the following ways: From the menu bar, select M e s h > C he ck > C o m po ne nts > E dge s .

Altair Engineering


267

From the Checks toolbar, select the Edges icon (

)

From the main menu, select the To o l page, and then click e dge s Press the SHIFT+F3 keys 2.

With the co m ps selector active, click any element in the graphics area. The component containing the element is selected.

3.

Click find e dge s . Red, 1-D elements are displayed. They are organized into the new component named ^ e dge s . A red 1-D element is created along each shell element edge that is free; one or more of the element edge’s nodes is not shared by the adjacent elements.

Note: For a component name whose first character is ^, the component and its contents is not written to the input file when the model is exported. 4.

Click Sha de d E le m e nts a nd M e s h Line s (

5.

Observe the red, 1-D elements (free edges).

268


).


Altair Engineering

6.

Try to identify gaps in the continuity of the mesh. Hint:

Look closely at free edges interior to the model.

7.

In the Model Browser, turn the display off for the component shells to continue to identify which red, free edges do not belong.

8.

Turn on the display for the component shells.

Step 3: Correct the shell element connectivity problems using the E dge s . 1.

In the to le ra nce = field, type 0.01.

2.

Select an element in the graphics area to select the component.

3.

Click pre v ie w e quiv . The status bar displays the following message: "81 node s w e re found." A sphere, , is created on nodes having a distance between each other equal to or less than the specified tolerance.

4.

Notice that for this exercise’s model, a sphere is not created on every node along all of the red, free edges, which do not belong. A larger tolerance must be specified to identify the rest of the nodes.

5.

For to le ra nce =, increase its value until all 96 nodes are identified as shown in the following image. Be careful not to increase the tolerance value to too much. Although the 96 nodes will be identified, an excessively large tolerance value may collapse elements when the identified nodes are equivalenced. To find out the maximum value that can be safely used for tolerance without collapsing the elements, press the F10 key to go to the Check Elems , go to the 2d sub and click le ngth. The status bar will display ‘ … T he m in le ngt h is 1.49.’ A tolerance value < 1.49 can safely be used, without causing

Altair Engineering


269

any elements to collapse when identified nodes are equivalenced. Click re turn to go back to Edges .

The nodes identified with preview equivalence

6.

Click e quiv a le nce . The 96 coincident nodes are equivalenced.

7.

Rotate and observe the model to see that the mesh still looks as it should and no elements are collapsed.

8.

Click de le te e dge s . The red, free edges and their component, ^ e dge s , are deleted.

Note:

Remain in the Edges .

Step 4: Review the model’s free edges again to confirm that all of the shell element connectivity problems have been corrected. 1.

Click find e dge s . Observe the red, 1-D elements (free edges). Are there any red, free edges that should not belong if the mesh was continuous or if all of the elements were connected? Hint: Only red, free edges should exist on the perimeter of the part and on periphery of internal holes.

270


Altair Engineering

2.

Use the Model Browser to turn the display off for the component, s he lls , to observe that all of the free, red edges belong.

3.

After ing that the model has correct red, free edges, click de le te e dge s .

Red, free edges that belong

Step 5: Display the element normals and adjust them to point in the same direction. 1.

Go to the Normals . The Normals can be accessed in the following ways: From the menu bar, select M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > No rm a ls From the Checks toolbar, select the No rm a ls icon (

).

From the main menu, select the To o l page, then click no rm a ls Press the SHIFT+F10 keys

2.

Choose the elements sub and set toggle to v e cto r dis pla y no rm a ls .

3.

With the co m ps selector active, select one element from the graphics area to select the component.

4.

Click dis pla y no rm a ls .

Altair Engineering


271

Arrows (vectors) are drawn from the element centroids and show the direction of the element normals. Notice the arrows do not all point from the same side of the part. For some analyses, the element normals should point from the same side.

5.

Click s iz e = and enter the size which the normal should be in model units and select dis pla y no rm a ls again. When s iz e = is set to 0, the vector will be 10% of the screen.

6.

Toggle v e cto r dis pla y no rm a ls to co lo r dis pla y no rm a ls .

7.

Click dis pla y no rm a ls .

272


Altair Engineering

The element normals are displayed using colors. The red side of the elements is the positive normal direction, while the blue side is the negative normal direction. 8.

Notice each side of the part shows red and blue.

9.

Click the o rie nta tio n: e le m selector to make it active.

10.

Select an element from the graphics area.

11.

Click a djus t no rm a ls . All elements on either side of the part are the same color, red or blue.

The status bar displays the following message: "[X ] e le m e nt s ha v e be e n a djust e d."

Altair Engineering


273

If after adjusting the normals, there are still elements on one side of the part which are of different color, change to e le m s from co m ps for the entity selector, choose these elements and click re v e rs e no rm a ls . 12.

Click re turn.

Step 6: Review the quality of the elements using the che ck e le ms . 1.

Access the Check Elems in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, select M e s h > C he ck > E le m e nts > C he ck E le m e nts From the Checks toolbar, select the No rm a ls icon (

).

From the main menu, select the To o l page, then click che ck e le m s Press the F10 key 2.

Go to the 2-d sub.

3.

that ja co bia n < field is set to 0.7.

4.

Click ja co bia n to determine if any elements have a jacobian of less than 0.7. Elements having a jacobian of less than 0.7 are highlighted.

5.

Notice that several elements on the triangular rib and around the smaller of the two holes have a jacobian of less than 0.7. The status bar displays a message indicating how many elements failed this check.

6.

In the graphics area, click an element.

274


Altair Engineering

A window appears that lists each quality check result for the element.

7.

Click the right or left mouse button to close the pop-up window.

8.

On the right side of the menu, switch from s ta nda rd to a s s ign plo t.

9.

Click ja co bia n to review again. A legend for jacobian values appears and each element is colored accordingly. The red elements have a jacobian less than the threshold, 0.7.

10.

that qua ds : m in a ngle < is set to 45.

11.

Click m in a ngle to determine if any quad elements have an angle of less than 45.

Altair Engineering


275

Notice that a couple of elements on the rib have an angle of less than 45. 12.

that the m a x a ngle > field is set to 135.

13.

Click m a x a ngle to determine if any quad elements have an angle greater than 135.

Notice that several elements on the rib have an angle greater than 135. 14.

Click re turn.

Step 7: Remesh the elements on the rib using the Automesh . 1.

Access the Automesh in one of the following ways:

276


Altair Engineering

From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > 2D Auto M e s h From the main menu, select the 2D page, then click a uto m e s h Press the F12 key 2.

that you are in the size and bias sub.

3.


4.

Toggle to inte ra ctiv e .

5.

For e le m e nt s iz e = , type 3.5.

6.

Select one rib element from the graphics area.

7.

Select one element on the plane of elements perpendicular to the rib and in the same plane as the rib’s shortest edge as shown in the following image.

Example of elements to select

8.

Select e le m s > > by fa ce to complete the selection of elements as shown in the following image.

Altair Engineering


277

Elements selected using b y fa ce

9.

Click m e s h. The meshing module appears.

10.

In the density sub, change the element density on the rib’s hypotenuse edge to 9, and the element density on the rib’s shortest edge to 5. Keep all other element edge densities the same.

278


Altair Engineering

Adjusting element edge densities

11.

Access the mesh style sub.

12.

Under m e s h m e tho d, set the last option to fre e (unm a ppe d).

13.

Under m e s h m e tho d, select s e t a ll.

14.

Click m e s h to preview the mesh.

15.

Go to the checks sub, and check the ja co bia n, qua ds : m in a ngle , and qua ds : m a x a ngle .

Altair Engineering


279

Notice that no elements fail the minimum and maximum angle checks. Only a couple of elements have a jacobian of less than 0.7. The smallest jacobian is 0.68, which can still be considered good quality. 16.

Click re turn to accept the mesh and go back to the main menu.

Step 8: Use the Smo o th to adjust the node placement on the rectangular plane of remeshed elements. 1.

Click M e s h > C le a nup E le m e nts > Sm o o th to open the Smooth .

2.

Go to the plates sub.

3.

With the s m o o th: e le m s selector active, select an element on the rectangular plane of re-meshed elements.

4.

Select e le m s > > by fa ce .

280


Altair Engineering

5.

For ite ra tio ns = specify 10.

6.

Switch the smoothing algorithm from a uto de cide to s ha pe co rre cte d.

7.

Click s m o o th.

8.

Click re turn.

Step 9: Remove tria elements from another area of the model using the e dit e le me nt , split and co mbine subs. 1.

On the 2D page, enter the Edit Element .

2.

Go to the split sub.

3.

With the s plitting line : po ints selector active, click four screen points as shown the following image. Temporary line segments are drawn to connect the points.

Altair Engineering


281

4.

You can right-click to undo the last line segment drawn or you can click de le te line to start over with selecting points.

5.

Click s plit. Elements that have the line through them are split. The resulting mesh should look like the mesh in the following image. There are two pairs of adjacent tria elements.

6.

Go to the combine sub and set the toggle to co m bine to qua d.

7.

Select two adjacent tria elements as indicated in the following image.

8.

Click co m bine .

282


Altair Engineering

9.

Repeat 11.7 and 11.8 for the other two adjacent tria elements.

10.

Remain in the edit element sub.

Trias to select

C ombining trias into quads

Step 10: Dynamically move nodes on the mesh area modified in the previous step to improve element quality. 1.

Go to the cleanup sub and ensure it is set to dis pla y e d e le m s .

2.

Click cle a nup. The element cleanup menu appears. It allows you to select various combinations of quality checks, specify a warning/unacceptable range for each check, and dynamically move nodes around to place them where you desire. Elements are colored as follows: No color, appearing blank: element es quality checks Yellow: one or more quality check results falls into warning/unacceptable range Red: one or more quality check results are beyond unacceptable Among the group of elements you modified in the last step, Step 11, two quad elements are red and one quad element is yellow.

Altair Engineering


283

3.

Clear the wa rpa ge and ja co bia n check boxes, so that just the m a x a ngle is checked.

4.

The model has three elements that are colored red.

5.

With the no de selector active, click an interior node of a red element and drag the node around until the element is no longer red.

6.

Repeat 12.5 for the other red elements.

7.

Click re turn.

Step 11: For the same area of elements you focused on in the previous step, optimize element quality by clicking nodes and elements.

284


Altair Engineering

1.

On the 2D page, go to the Quality Index and select cle a nup to o ls .

2.

With the no de o ptim iz e selector active, click a few nodes of the mesh area you modified. When a node is clicked, it is repositioned so that the elements attached to it have the best possible quality based on the criteria specified in the Quality Index .

3.

Click the selector e le m e nt o ptim iz e to make it active.

4.

Click yellow and red elements in the same mesh area. When an element is clicked, it is adjusted to have the best quality possible based on the criteria specified in the Quality Index . When you click a red element, it may become yellow or the background color (no color assigned). When you click a yellow element, it may become the background color (no color assigned).

5.

Click the selector m o dify ho le & wa s he rs to make it active.

6.

Select ra dia l parameter and make active e dit option.

Altair Engineering


285

7.

Select a node around the hole, the ra dius field shows a value of 5.97.

8.

Edit this field and set 7 as value.

9.

Set a value of 3 in the re m e s h num be r o f la y e rs field. The washer will change as shown in the following picture.

10.

Click re turn.

Step 12: Add a ring of radial elements around the smaller of the two

286


Altair Engineering

holes. 1.

Click the Utility tab. If the Utility Menu is not displayed in the HyperMesh session, go to Vie w menu and check Utility M e nu.

2.

On the G e o m / M e s h page, click Add W a s he r.

3.

With the no de s selector active, select one node on the edge of the smaller hole as indicated in the following image.

Example node to select

4.

Click pro ce e d. A pop-up window for Add W a s he r a lo ng a C ircula r H o le utility appears.

5.

Toggle to W idth, and for Va lue specify 3.0.

6.

Select the M inim um num be r o f no de s a ro und the ho le check box.

7.

In the D e ns ity : field, enter 12.

Altair Engineering


287

Settings in the Add Washer along a Circular Hole dialog

8.

Click Add.

9.

Click C lo s e . The mesh around the hole should look like the mesh in the following image.

288


Altair Engineering

Resulting mesh around the smaller hole

Step 13: Imprint Mesh to different destinations. 1.

In the Model Browser, right-click the IMPRINT component and select Sho w.

2.

On the 2D page, go to the Mesh Edit and select the im print sub.

The imprint sub allows you to cause mesh from different, overlapping components to sync or line up with each other, in order to facilitate better connection modeling between them. 3.

Select IMPRINT as the source, shells as the destination, and select de s tina tio n for the remain: option. This tool takes existing elements and/or components and can be imprinted into elements and/or components, changing direction and destination.

Altair Engineering


289

Original: Violet elements are offset from yellow.

3.

Select cre a te .

Violet source elements are imprinted in destination (yellow).

4.

Select re je ct.

5.

Select the IM PR INT component as source, the s he lls component as destination, and select de s tina tio n for the remain: option. Finally, make sure that e le m s to de s tina tio n co m p is active.

290


Altair Engineering

Violet source elements are imprinted in destination (yellow), element organized into yellow component.

6.

Select re je ct.

7.

Select the IM PR INT component as source, the s he lls component as destination, and select s o urce for the remain: option. Finally, make sure that e le m s to de s tina tio n co m p is active.

Altair Engineering


291

Yellow destination elements are imprinted to Violet elements, element organized into yellow component.

8.

Select re je ct and re turn.

Step 14: Extend Mesh to different destinations. 1.

In the Model Browser right-click the IM PR INT component and select H ide .

2.

Right click the E X TE ND component, and select Sho w .

3.

On the 2D page, go to the Mesh Edit and select e xte nd sub. The extend sub allows you to create smoothly-meshed connections between different components that do not quite touch, but are meant to. Mesh can be imprinted such that both components are remeshed to match, or the source comp is remeshed to match the destination comp, or vice-versa. In addition, you can actually merge the elements of the source component into the destination component altogether.

4.

Select no de s by windows (see red rectangular area in the following picture) from the E X TE ND component (source). Next, select the s he lls component as the destination and select a lo ng v e cto r for the projection: option (select N1 and N2 as shown in the red circle in the picture below) to define direction.

292


Altair Engineering

5.

Select cre a te . The resulting mesh, as shown in the following picture, connects the 2 parts with just 1 element along the projection, because the re m e s h e xte ns io n option is deactivated.

6.

Select re je ct. Repeat step 14.3 and 14.4 with the same options and selections, but making sure that the re m e s h e xte ns io n option is active. The resulting mesh, as shown in the following picture, connects the 2 parts with remeshed elements along the projection, because the re m e s h e xte ns io n option was active.

Altair Engineering


293

Step 15 (Optional): Save your work. With this exercise completed, you can save the model if desired.

294


Altair Engineering

HM-3320: Penetration In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Run the penetration check Review the intersection results Fix the intersection results Interrogate the penetration results Fix the penetration results

Tools

The Penetration feature can be accessed in one of the following ways: From the menu bar, click M e s h, then C he ck, then C o m po ne nts , then Pe ne tra tio n From the To o l page, go to the pe ne tra tio n The Penetration allows you to check the integrity of your model, visualize problem areas, and fix the problem areas. The three entities that can be checked are e le m e nts , co m po ne nts and gro ups . Typically, the group check would be for checking definitions (for example, Abaqus/LS-DYNA).

This allows you to check components for element penetration and intersection. More importantly, you can correct your model. Penetration and intersection can be used individually or collectively. Penetration is defined as the overlap of the material thickness of shell elements, while intersection is defined as elements ing completely through one another.

Altair Engineering


295

Example of penetration

Example of intersection

Strategy

Use the following guidelines for conducting checks on models: Checks can be run on both 2-D and 3-D elements, 2-D elements only, or 3-D elements only. The include s e lf inte rfe re nce option includes components that bend and through themselves. This occurs rarely and is expensive when running the check. By default, this option is off. By default the check is set to a ll inte rfe re nce s , meaning both intersection and penetration. The inte rs e ctio ns o nly option and the pe ne tra tio ns o nly option are available. The a llo wa ble inte rfe re nce de pth option allows certain penetrations and intersections to be ignored if less than the value specified. An additional option, unifo rm thickne s s , allows you to assign a global thickness to all components.

296


Altair Engineering

An additional option, thickne s s m ultiplie r, allows you to multiply the existing thicknesses in the model. When the penetration check is invoked, a new penetration tab is invoked in the browser area.

The results are displayed in a tree format for ease of display and are split into intersections and penetrations with the number of components that are clashing in brackets. In the example above, two components are intersecting and eleven components have material penetration. Expanding each tree will provide more detail as to which components have failed. The columns ( ID , E le m s , D e pth, C o m ps ) provide valuable information on which components' IDs are involved, the number of failed elements, the depth of penetration (not applicable for intersections), and number of components affected in the penetration/intersection. Each of the columns can be sorted by clicking the column header. At the bottom of the tab area there is a message bar which will detail the status of the check, the number of failed elements, and any warnings and errors as the checks are invoked.

Altair Engineering


297

You can also click the right mouse button to access all of the options and tools within the penetration and intersection check. The context menu will invoke and will provide the option to fix either penetrations or intersections, depending on whether the penetration parent/child folder or intersection folder has been highlighted.

298


Altair Engineering

The o ptio ns button allows for the configuration of the display, automatic fixing (intersections and penetrations), and depenetration vector and configuration of the tree display.

Altair Engineering


299

The fixing of penetrations and intersections falls into two categories: automatic and manual. These capabilities will be discussed in more detail in the tutorial.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, penetration_check.hm.

300


Altair Engineering

Step 1: Retrieve the model file, penetration_check.hm. 1.

From the menu bar, click File > O pe n > M o de l.

2.

Browse to the file, penetration_check.hm and click O pe n.

3.

From the menu bar, click Pre fe re nce s > Us e r Pro file .

4.

Select Ls D y na . This model is an LS-DYNA model, therefore, it is important to chose the appropriate profile so that HyperMesh can access the actual thickness values of the shell components. The thickness values are required for material penetration check.

5.

Click O K.

6.


) if not already done.

Step 2: Run the penetration check. 1.

From the menu bar click M e s h > C he ck > C o m po ne nts > Pe ne tra tio n.

2.

To invoke the penetration check, select all the components by clicking co m ps .

3.

Click co m ps > > a ll, and click s e le ct.

4.

Click che ck.

Altair Engineering


301

Once the check has completed, the Penetration tab populates. In this example, there are two intersections and 11 penetrations. Expanding the tree the results will display the following:

The tree is populated by a parent/child or master/slave relationship. As an example looking at the intersections, the top line shows the component, R o cke r Fwd To p Pa ne l R H (parent), and then below is component, R o cke r Inne r Pa ne l R H (child). It is important to understand that there is always a reciprocal relationship; the second entry is R o cke r Inne r Pa ne l R H (parent) and then the component, R o cke r Fwd To p Pa ne l R H (child). In this case there is a one-to-one relationship. It is especially important to understand this when there is a one-to-many relationship (for example, R o cke r Inne r Pa ne l R H under penetrations). Clicking the parent component will always show that component plus a ll the components below (children). Clicking a child component will show that component with the parent component only.

Step 3: Review the intersection results. 1.

In the Penetration tab, click the Inte rs e ctio ns heading to view all the intersections. Based on which mode is chosen, certain components are displayed on the screen.

302


Altair Engineering

Mode

Description Fit View to Failed Elements

Display All Elements

Display Components with Failed Elements Display Only Failed Elements

2.

Ensure that D is pla y C o m po ne nts with Fa ile d E le m e nts and Fit Vie w to Fa ile d E le m e nts are selected.

3.

Under Intersections, click the component R o cke r Inne r Pa ne l R H . The screen will automatically fit to the failed intersecting elements.

4.

Click R e v ie w Fa ile d E le m e nts ( ) to review the other visualization modes. The contour and vector displays are only applicable to intersections. The intersecting

Altair Engineering


303

elements display as follows:

Step 4: Fix the intersection results. HyperMesh includes two methods of fixing intersections: manual and automatic. To fix intersections manually: 1.

Under Inte rs e ctio ns , click the component, R o cke r Fwd To p Pa ne l R H .

304


Altair Engineering

2.

Click M a nua l Fix To o ls (

) to ensure that the intersecting entities can be fixed.

Additional buttons populate for intersection fixing.

3.

Ensure E le m e nts fro m Tre e Se le ctio n is selected – you will not pick any additional elements.

Altair Engineering


305

4.

Ensure M o v e in No rm a l D ire ctio n is selected for the direction of movement.

5.

For distance value, enter 2.

6.

Click the left arrow button twice and notice the selected elements moving in the chosen direction. After the elements have been moved by a value of 4, they no longer intersect.

7.

Click R e che ck (

) and notice there are no intersections. Only 11 penetrations remain.

Important A dialog box displays that states: "Curre nt int e rse c t ion/pe ne t ra t ion re sult s w ill be lost by re c he c king t he m ode l. Would y ou like t o c ont inue ?" Click Y e s . The pe ne tra tio n tab needs to be refreshed.

Alternatively, you can use the a uto m a tic fixing tools: 1.

Load the file, penetration_check.hm, again.

2.

Go to the Penetration .

3.

To invoke the penetration check, select all the components by clicking co m ps .

4.

Click co m ps > > a ll, and click s e le ct.

5.

Run the check on all components

306


Altair Engineering

6.

Highlight the Inte rs e ctio ns directory in the Pe ne tra tio n browser. Notice that there are currently two intersections.

7.

Right-click to invoke the context-sensitive menu. Choose Auto m a tic R e curs iv e Inte rs e ctio n Fix.

The wrenches will turn green indicating that the fix was successful. The Auto m a tic R e curs iv e Inte rs e ctio n Fix will run through all es automatically, the Auto m a tic Inte rs e ctio n Fix will run through one at a time (most fixes will require multiple es). 8.

Click Y e s on the dialog box that appears.

Step 5: Interrogate the penetration results. 1.

Expand the Penetrations tree.

2.

Click component, C - Pilla r B o t Inne r Pa ne l R H .

Altair Engineering


307

The penetration results will look as follows:

3.

Click the visualization options, display for the penetration.

, to view the different types of results

contour

308


Altair Engineering

vectors

that the columns can be sorted. For example, if you were only interested in the worst offending penetrations then sorting by the depth column will reorganize the tree structure (while still retaining the parent/child relationship). In this particular example, for component C - Pilla r B o t Inne r Pa ne l R H , there are 18 elements that have failed (parent and child), the maximum penetration depth is 0.159, and there is only one component penetrating.

Step 6: Fix the penetration results. Within the checking tool there is an automatic penetration fix that will remove the penetrations within the model. This works by physically moving the failed nodes to new locations to remove the material penetration. There are two options: a uto m a tic pe ne tra tio n fix and a uto m a tic re curs iv e pe ne tra tio n fix. Both will do the same thing, but the a uto m a tic option often requires you to use it several times successively to eliminate all penetrations, while the a uto m a tic re curs iv e completes the fix in one click. However, the iterative option will take longer to complete, because it is essentially automatically repeating the a uto m a tic fix until it reaches a point at which no further improvements can be made. You also have the option to either fix individual penetrations by clicking on a single parent branch of the tree, or fix all penetrations at once by clicking and highlighting the complete Penetrations tree. In some circumstances, there may be the need to lock or freeze a component that cannot be adjusted or moved by the fixing tool. This can be achieved by right-clicking and selecting Lo ck C o m po ne nt. Once a component is locked, a symbol will appear by the folder indicating that the component is locked.

Altair Engineering


309

In the previous example, component C - Pilla r B o t Inne r Pa ne l R H was locked, notice how the lock symbol appears multiple times to correspond with the multiple references to the same component. To unlock, right-click again and select Unlo ck C o m po ne nt. For the purpose of this tutorial you will not be using the lock functionality. To fix the penetrations in the model we will use the Ite ra tiv e Fix: 1.

Click Pe ne tra tio ns at the top of the tree. See the following image.

2.

Right-click to bring up the menu and then click Auto m a tic R e curs iv e Pe ne tra tio n Fix.

310


Altair Engineering

Important: A dialog box states, "Cha nge s t o re sult s da t a t re e it e m s a re not possible onc e proc e ss is init ia t e d. Proc e ss inv olv e s a se rie s of fixe d c he c ks, w it h t he form e r upda t ing t he t re e . It e ra t ions c a n be st oppe d by right -ha nd-c lic ks on w re nc h ic on during fix pha se . Not e t ha t st oppa ge is not possible by c lic king on gra phic s a re a . Would y ou like t o c ont inue ?" Click Y e s After the process has finished, note that the majority of the penetrations have been fixed. Three penetrations remain which require manual editing to fix.

Altair Engineering


311

Assembly HM-3400: Creating Connectors HM-3410: Creating Area Connectors HM-3420: Creating Bolt Connectors HM-3430: Part Replacement Through Connectors

312


Altair Engineering

HM-3400: Creating Connectors In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Weld the two front trusses to each other by creating connectors at pre-defined weld points Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate by creating connectors between shell elements Weld the right rails to each other and to the front trusses by creating connectors from a master connectors file Update weld type of NASTRAN/OPTISTRUCT ACM (area method) welds, which already connect the rear trusses to each other, by first creating connectors from these welds and then realizing the connectors into two-noded weld elements.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly.hm. Weld the two front trusses by creating connectors between geometry surfaces at pre-defined weld points.

Altair Engineering


313


Open the model file, frame_assembly.hm.

2.

Take a few moments to observe the model using various visual options available in HyperMesh (rotation, zooming, etc.).

3.


4.

Select R AD IO SS, then B ulk D a ta .

5.


Step 2: Display only the assembly a sse m_1 for elements and geometry. 1.

Select M o de l Vie w ( tree.

) in the Model Browser and expand the As s e m bly H ie ra rchy

2.

that the entity selection is set to Elements and Geometry (

314


).

Altair Engineering

This turns on/off both elements and geometry when performing right-click operations in the Model Browser. 3.

Right-click on a s s e m _1 and select Is o la te . This will only display the components that are in the assem_1 assembly.

Step 3: Load the Connector Browser. 1.

Using the menu bar select Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > C o nne cto r.

2.

Review the layout of the Connector Browser. The Connector Browser allows s to view and manage the connectors in their model. The top portion of the browser is called the Link Entity Browser and displays information for the linked entities in the model. The lower portion is called the Connector Window and it contains a list of the connectors in the model. The connectors will be grouped based on the type of connection. Currently there are no components or connectors listed because there are no connectors in the model.

Altair Engineering


315

Step 4: Create welds between the geometry for the two front trusses at the pre-defined weld points. There are two methods for creating connectors: automatic and manual. The automatic approach creates and realizes connectors automatically. The manual approach allows you to create the connector manually, and then realize the connector manually. Realization is the process in which the connector creates the weld entity. To create connectors automatically, access the Spot, Bolt, Seam, and Area s within the Connectors Browser module. To create connectors manually, go to the create and realize subs. 1.

Access the Spot : right-click in the Connector Browser in the connector window and select C re a te > Spo t.

2.

Access the spot sub.

3.

that the current component is Con_Frt_Truss.

4.

Switch the location: entity selector to po ints .

5.

Select the six pre-defined weld points by selecting po ints > > by co lle cto r and selecting the component C o n_Frt_Trus s .

6.

Click s e le ct.

7.

For connect what:, click co m ps and select the components Fro nt_Trus s _1 and Fro nt_Trus s _2.

8.

Click s e le ct.

9.

For connect what:, toggle e le m s to ge o m .

10.

For tolerance = specify 5. The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of itself.

11.

For type=, select we ld.

12.

Click cre a te .

13.

Click re turn.

The six connectors are automatically created and realized (notice the message in the status bar). The green connectors indicate that the creation of the weld entity was successful. The connectors are organized as geometry (not elements) in the current component collector, C o n_Frt_Trus s .

316


Altair Engineering

There are three states of connectors: realized (green

), unrealized (yellow

), and failed

(red ). The color of the connectors change from yellow to green (if created manually), indicating they are realized into weld elements. As mentioned before, if created automatically they will be green immediately as there is no interim unrealized (yellow) state. Fixed points were added to the surfaces at the ends of the weld elements to guarantee connectivity between the weld elements and the shell mesh that will be created on the surfaces.

Weld element with fixed points created on the surfaces

Step 5: Review the Connector Browser. 1.

In the connector window in the Connector Browser, click the + next to R B AR. This contains a listing of the six connectors just created. They are all grouped under RBAR because that is the type of connector created. Notice the ID of the connector under Entities, the Links of the connector, and the State of the connector. You may need to increase the size of the tab area to the right to see the State column.

Altair Engineering


317

2.

In the Link Entity Browser in the Connector Browser, right-click Fro nt_Trus s _1 and select Find. This isolates this component in the graphics area. It also highlights the six connectors in the Connector Window to indicate that these connectors have Front_Truss_1 as a link.

3.

Right-click Fro nt_Trus s _1 again, and this time select Find Atta che d. This will find the components that are attached to Fro nt_Trus s _1 through connectors. Notice that Front_Truss_1 and Front_Truss_2 are now both highlighted in the Link Entity Browser to indicate that they have been displayed in the graphics area.

Step 6: Create a shell mesh on the two front truss components. 1.

Press F12 to go to the Automesh .

2.

Access the size and bias sub.

3.

Select the mesh mode a uto m a tic. (It currently may be interactive.)

4.

Select s urfs > > dis pla y e d.

5.

For elem size =, specify 10.

6.

For mesh type, select m ixe d.

7.

that the toggle is set to elems to surf comp. (It currently may be elems to current comp.)

8.


9.

Zoom into the area with a connector and see how the fixed point created from the weld has ensured the mesh seeding es through the weld.

318


Altair Engineering

10.


Step 7: Display only the assembly assem_2 for elements and geometry. Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate by creating connectors between shell elements at pre-defined weld points. 1.

Within the Model Browser, that Elements and Geometry is the current selection type.

2.

Right-click on a s s e m _2 and select Is o la te .

Weld the two front trusses to the reinforcement plate.

Step 8: Create connectors between the shell mesh for the front trusses and the reinforcement plate at pre-defined points. Perform the following steps to create and realize the connectors manually. 1.

Use the Model Browser to set the current component to Con_Truss_Plate.

2.

Go to the Connector Browser.

3.

Right-click in the connector window and select C re a te > > Spo t.

4.

Access the cre a te sub.

5.

For location:, select po ints .

6.

Select po ints > > by co lle cto r and select the component C o n_Trus s _Pla te .

7.

Click s e le ct.

Altair Engineering


319

8.

For connect what:, select the following components:

Fro nt_Trus s _1 Fro nt_Trus s _2 R e inf_Pla te 9.

Click s e le ct.

10.

For connect what:, toggle ge o m to e le m s .

11.

that num layers is set to to ta l 2.

12.

that connect when: is set to no w.

13.

Click cre a te to create connectors at the selected weld points. Notice that the status bar says "8 spot c onne c t ors c re a t e d w it h c om ps links." The connectors are organized into the current component collector, Con_Truss_Plate.

14.

Notice in the Connector Browser that these eight connectors are currently grouped as undefined and that the color of the connectors is yellow to indicate they are unrealized.

15.

Click the + next to undefined and notice the status of the eight connectors is unrealized. In the next step, you will realize the connectors and assign a connector type.

Step 9: Realize the connectors in the component Con_Truss_Plate into weld elements. 1.

Go to the re a liz e sub.

2.

Zoom into the Reinf_Plate and select the 4 connectors along the top.

3.

For ty pe = , select we ld.

4.

For to le ra nce = , enter 7.

5.

the selection is set to m e s h de pe nde nt from mesh independent. When the option mesh dependent is active, if the realized finite element of the connector is coincident to a node of the shell mesh it is being connected to, the nodes are equivalenced. If there are no suitable nodes present, this option will partition the mesh accordingly to ensure the mesh seeding es through the weld point.

6.

There are two options available for mesh dependent. that adjust realization has been selected

7.

Click re a liz e to realize the selected connectors into weld elements. Notice how the mesh hasn’t been remeshed to connect the two components.

8.

Make the connectors selector active and select the 4 connectors along the bottom on the plate.

320


Altair Engineering

9.

Under mesh dependent, set the toggle to a djus t m e s h.

10. The two options under adjust mesh are remesh and quad transition. Select re m e s h . 11. Click re a liz e to realize the selected connectors. This time the mesh has been remeshed to connect the two components.

The two front trusses welded to the reinforcement plate with weld elements at the connectors



2.

Right-click a s s e m _3 and select Is o la te .

Altair Engineering


321

Weld the two right rails to each other and to the two front trusses by creating connectors from a master connectors file.

Step 11: Create connectors to connect the right rails to each other and to the front trusses by importing a master connectors file. 1.

From the menu bar select File > Im po rt > C o nne cto rs .

2.

Click the open file (

3.

Click Im po rt.

) next to File and and import the file, rails_frt_truss.mwf.

It will take a few seconds for the connectors to be imported. The connectors are automatically created and are organized into the new component, CE_Locations. 4.

Click C lo s e to close the Import tab.

Step 12: Realize the connectors in the component C E _Lo ca tio ns into weld elements. 1.

Use the Model Browser to set the current component collector to CE_Locations.

2.

Enter the Connector Browser.

322


Altair Engineering

3.

Right-click in the connector window and select C re a te > > Spo t.

4.

Access the realize sub.

5.

Select co nne cto rs > > dis pla y e d.

6.

that type= is set to we ld.

7.

that tolerance = is set to 7.

8.

that mesh dependant and adjust realization are selected.

9.

Click re a liz e to realize the selected connectors into weld elements.

10.


Right rails welded to each other and to the front trusses with weld elements at the connectors


Within the Model Browser, that Elements and Geomtry is the current selection type.

Altair Engineering


323

2.


Weld to the two front trusses by duplicating and reflecting selected connectors created from the master connectors file

Step 14: Create a new component collector to hold new connectors. 1.

Right click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > C o m po ne nt

2.

For Name: enter CE_Locations_Dup.

3.

Select a color for the component.

4.

Click C re a te to create the component.

Step 15: Duplicate the connectors created from the master connectors file and reflect them. 1.

Enter the Reflect from the menu bar by selecting C o nne cto rs > R e fle ct > C o nne cto rs

2.

the entity selector is set to co nne cto rs .

3.

Using the Model Browser, turn on and display the component, CE_Locations.

4.

Select co nne cto rs > > by co lle cto r and select C E _Lo ca tio ns .

5.

Click co nne cto rs > > duplica te > > curre nt co m p. The displayed connectors are duplicated and the duplicates are organized into the current component, CE_Locations_Dup.

6.

Set the plane selector to x- a xis . This is the axis normal to the plane of interest.

7.

Click B twice to specify a ba s e node to reflect about.

324


Altair Engineering

8.

Click x= . The fields for x=, y=, and z= are activated. By default, their value is 0.000, which is the base point you want to reflect about.

9.

Click re turn to return to the reflect .

10.

Click re fle ct to reflect the connectors.

11.

Click re turn to return to the main menu. Notice the connectors are unrealized (yellow).

Step 16: Update the connectors for the left rails to link them to the left rail components. 1.

Enter the Connector Browser.

2.

Expand the folder for RBAR in the connector window.

3.

Click Sta te to sort the connectors by their state. You may need to increase the size of the ta b area to the right to see the State column. Notice how all the realized connectors are now at the top of the list.

4.

Click Sta te again so that all the unrealized connectors are at the top of the list.

5.

Left-click the first connector in the list under the Entities column. Scroll down to the last unrealized connector in the list. While holding the SHIFT button, left-click the last unrealized connector in the list. This will select all the unrealized connectors in the list. that this is the case.

6.

Right-click under Entities and select Upda te Link. This brings up the update window under the connector window in the Connector Browser.

Altair Engineering


325

7.

Review the entries in the Link1 and Link2 columns.

8.

Notice that the connectors have the links comp Right_Rail_1 and comp Right_Rail_2. This data is from the master connectors file that you imported. These links need to be updated to reflect the two left rails.

326


Altair Engineering

9.

Set Link Type to co m ps under Search in the Update window.

10.

Click in Link Se le ct under Search. This brings up a component selector in the area.

11.

Click co m po ne nt and select the component, R ight_R a il_1.

12.

Click pro ce e d. This updates the Connector Browser so now the Link Select is set to Right_Rail_1 under Search.

13.

Set Link Type to co m ps under Replace.

14.

Click in Link Se le ct under Replace. This brings up a component selector in the area.

15.

Click co m po ne nt and select the component, Le ft_R a il_1.

16.

Click pro ce e d. This updates the Connector Browser so now the Link Select is set to Left_Rail_1 under Replace.

17.

Click Upda te to update the connectors' links.

18.

Repeat 16.9 through 16.19, except search for the Right_Rail_2 component and replace it with the Left_Rail_2 component.

19.

Scroll through the list of unrealized connectors to make sure that no connector is linked to the right rail components.

20.

Click the X next to Update to close the update window.

Step 17: Realize the connectors in the component C E _Lo ca tio ns_D up into weld elements. 1.

Go to the Spot: realize sub.

2.

Select co nne cto rs > > by co lle cto r and select the component, CE_Locations_Dup.

3.

type= is set to we ld.

4.

tolerance = is set to 7.

Altair Engineering


327

5.

Ensure that the mesh dependent option is active.

6.

Click re a liz e to realize the selected connectors into weld elements.

Step 18: that all connectors are realized and identify the pairs of adjacent connectors. 1.

In the connector window of the Connector Browser, that the RBAR folder is expanded.

2.

Scroll through all the connectors. Note that the State column indicates that all of the connectors are realized.

3.

Zoom into one of the two areas where the front trusses are connected to the rail components. Note that at these two areas, there are pairs of adjacent connectors.

4.

Click Vis ua liz a tio n O ptio ns (

5.

Click on the C o nne cto rs icon,

6.

While still in the Visualization tab, notice under Layers that 2t (two thickness) is purple.

) from the Visualization toolbar. , and under the Color by: option select La y e r.

The connectors are now colored purple. This means each of these connectors link two components. Because the pairs of connectors create a series of two weld elements, you can combine each pair into a single connector, which links the three components together. 7.

Click C lo s e to close the Visualization tab.

Step 19: Isolate the pairs of adjacent 2t connectors identified in the previous step. 1.

From the Model Browser, turn off the display for all geometry components.

2.

Return to the Connector Browser.

3.

In the top portion of the Connector Browser, hold down the Ctrl key and select Fro nt_Trus s _1, Fro nt_Trus s _2, R ight_R a il_1, and Le ft_R a il_1.

4.

Right click and select Find B e twe e n.

328


Altair Engineering

This finds and displays the 12 connectors between 4 components selected.

Step 20: Unrealize the displayed connectors. 1.

Access the Unrealize from the menu bar by selecting C o nne cto rs > Unre a liz e .

2.

Select co nne cto rs > > dis pla y e d. Notice the status bar displays "12c onne c t ors a dde d by 'displa y e d'. T ot a l se le c t e d 12."

3.

Click unre a liz e to unrealize the connectors. The weld elements associated to these connectors are deleted.

4.


Step 21: Combine the pairs of adjacent 2t connectors into 3t connectors. 1.

Enter the Connector Quality from the menu bar by selecting C o nne cto rs , > C he ck > C o nne cto r Q ua lity :

2.

In the connectors (unrealized) sub, select co nne cto rs > > dis pla y e d.

3.

For tolerance = specify 7.

4.

Click pre v ie w co m bine . The status bar displays the message, "12 c onne c t or(s) found t ha t ne e d t o be c om bine d."

Altair Engineering


329

5.

Click co m bine to combine the connectors. The status bar displays the message, "6 c onne c t ors de le t e d." Also notice that the connectors have now turned a dark blue color to indicate that they have 3 layers. If you cannot see the connectors, use the Connector Browser to Show the unrealized connectors.

6.

Right click in the in the top of the Connector Browser and select Find B e twe e n if connectors are not visible.

7.


Step 22: Realize the 3t connectors in the component C o n_Frt_T russ into weld elements. 1.

Set the current component to C o n_Frt_Trus s .

2.

Enter the spot: realize sub.

3.


4.

element config: is set to we ld.

5.

Set tolerance = to 10.

6.

Toggle the m e s h de pe nde nt option to be active.

7.

Click re a liz e to realize the connectors.

8.

Click in the Connector Browser. Scroll down through the list in the connector window to see that there are now three links for the six connectors we just updated.

9.


10.

Click Visualization Options (

11.

On the Connectors page, select Sta te for the Color by: option.

) from the visualization toolbar.



2.

At the top of the browser window, that E le m e nts a nd G e o m e try ( current selection type.

3.


) is the

Step 24: Create connectors from existing ACM welds.

330


Altair Engineering

Use the Fe Absorb to obtain connectors from the existing ACM welds (elements) in the component, Con_Rear_Truss. 1.

Enter the Automated Connector Creation and FE Absorption dialog from the menu bar by selecting C o nne cto rs > Fe Abs o rb.

2.

Set FE Configs: to cus to m .

3.

Set FE Type: to o ptis truct 69- 71 a cm .

4.

Toggle Elem filter: from All to Se le ct.

5.

Click the Elem filter: Elements selector twice. A HyperMesh menu with an elems selector appears.

6.

Select e le m s > > by co lle cto r and select the component, Con_Rear_Truss.

Altair Engineering


331

7.

Click pro ce e d to return to the dialog.

8.

Activate the M o v e co nne cto rs to FE co m po ne nt option.

9.

Click Abs o rb to absorb the elements into connectors. Connectors are generated at the locations of the ACM welds. They are realized and are 2t connectors. Also, the connectors are organized into the C o n_R e a r_Trus s , the same component to which the ACMs belong.

10.

Click C lo s e to close the dialog.

332


Altair Engineering

HM-3410: Creating Area Connectors In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Apply an adhesive connection to the left rails.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_1.hm. Area connectors must be meshed in order to work properly. When the connector’s location is existing FE mesh elems, the connector automatically gets meshed to match the elements chosen. However, after creating an area connector on surfs, lines, or along nodes, you must then use the automesh options (which display when you select one of these locations types) to create a mesh on the connector area.

a re a

Create and realize bolt connectors in a single process.

cre a te

Create, but do not realize, area connectors.

re a liz e

Create FE representations of previously-created area connectors.


Open the model file, frame_assembly_1.hm.

2.


3.

Go to the Pre fe re nce s menu, click Us e r Pro file s ....

4.

Select R AD IO SS, then B ulk D a ta .

5.



Go to the menu bar select Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > C o nne cto r.

2.

Review the layout of the Connector Browser. The Connector Browser allows s to view and manage the connectors in their model. The top portion of the browser is called the Link Entity Browser and it contains a listing of the components being connected with the connectors. The lower portion is called the Connector Entity Browser and it contains a list of the connectors in the model. The connectors will be grouped based on the type of connection.

Altair Engineering


333

Step 3: Create an adhesive connection between component Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2 on the top flange. 1.

From the Model Browser, display only the elements for components, Left_Rail_1 and Left_Rail_2.

2.

Zoom into an area displaying the two flanges and inspect the elements to be ed.

3.

Create a new component by right-clicking in the Model Browser and select C re a te > C o m po ne nt.

4.

Name the new component Left_Rail_Adhesive. Ensure the new component is the current component.

5.

Right-click in the Connector Browser in the connector window and select C re a te > Are a .

6.

that location: is set to e le m s .

7.

Pick one element on the top flange of Left_Rail_1. The element should be highlighted.

8.

Click e le m s and select the by fa ce option – the whole flange should be highlighted.

334


Altair Engineering

9.

For connect what:, select co m ps and pick Le ft_R a il_1 and Le ft_R a il_2.

10.

Click s e le ct.

11.

Set tolerance= 10. The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of itself.

12.

Click type= and select a dhe s iv e s .

13.

that the adhesive type is set to shell gap – this option projects directly to the shell component and takes no of the thickness of the shell components.

14.

Click cre a te .

15.

Inspect the new adhesive, note that an area connector has been created, and then click re turn.

16.

Access the Unrealize from the menu bar by selecting C o nne cto rs > Unre a liz e .

17

Select the previously created connector.

18

Click unre a liz e .

19

Click re turn.

Altair Engineering


335

20.

Access the Area , realize sub.

21

Click co nne cto rs and select the unrealized, yellow connector.

22.

that the adhesive type is set to (T1+ T2)/ 2 (instead of shell gap) and increase the coats= 3. This type takes into the thickness of each shell part and increases the number of hexas through thickness from 1 to 3.

23.

Click re a liz e .

For the other set of flanges you will manually create an area connector and mesh it accordingly.

Step 4: Create an adhesive connection between component Le ft_Ra il_1 and Le ft_Ra il_2 on the bottom flange. 1.

that you are still in the Area .

2.

Access the area sub.

3.

Select no de s for the location.

4.

Click no de lis t and select by pa th.

336


Altair Engineering

5.

Select the row of nodes on the outer flange on part, Left_Rail_1 by first selecting the left most node on the bottom flange of Left_Rail_1 and then selecting the right-most node on the bottom flange.

5.

Define width = 10.

6.

Define offset = 3.

7.

Select comps Le ft_R a il_1 and Le ft_R a il_2.

8.

Click s e le ct.

9.

Click cre a te . The default mesh size for these mesh independent area connectors (when choosing by nodes/lines/surfs) is 10. However, you can specify a different elem size if needed.

10.

Go to the edit sub.

11.

Select the newly created area connector.

12.

Select the element size= 3.

13.

Click m e s h.

Altair Engineering


337

Note the connector unrealizes if there is a pre-exising mesh. 14.


15.

Select the connector.

16.

Change the ty pe from (T1+ T2)/ 2 to co ns t_thickne s s and enter 0.3.

17.

Click re a liz e .

Inspect the new adhesive created. Note when creating area connectors from elements it will automatically mesh the area connector using the current mesh. If the area connector is created from nodes, lines, or surfaces then a manual mesh can be applied if the default is unsuitable from the area sub.

18.

Return to the main menu.

338


Altair Engineering

HM-3420: Creating Bolt Connectors In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Apply a bolted connection to the two rear trusses.

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_2.hm. The Bolt creates connectors based on holes within the connected components, using spiders or washers at each end of an RBE connector. When the Bolt is active, only bolt-type connectors display in the graphics area; graphics for other connector types are suppressed until you exit the . The Bolt contains three subs:

bo lt

Create and realize bolt connectors in a single process.

cre a te

Create, but do not realize, bolt connectors.

re a liz e

Create FE representations of previously-created bolt connectors.


Retrieve the model file, frame_assembly_2.hm.

2.


3.

Go to the Preferences menu and click Us e r Pro file s .

4.

Select R AD IO SS, then B ulk_D a ta .

5.


Altair Engineering


339

C reate a bolted connection between the two rear truss parts.


Turn on the display of the Model Browser by selecting Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > M o de l.

2.

Select the M o de l Vie w ( Hierarchy tree.

3.

the entity selection is set to Elements and Geometry (

4.

Right-click on a s s e m _5 and select Is o la te .

) in the Model Browser and expand the Assembly

).

This will only display the components that are in the assem_5 assembly. 5.

Set Con_Rear_Truss to be the current component by right-clicking on it in the Model Browser and selecting M a ke C urre nt.


From the menu bar select Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > C o nne cto r.

2.

Review the layout of the Connector Browser. The Connector Browser allows s to view and manage the connectors in their model. The top portion of the browser is called the Link Entity Browser and it contains a listing of the components being connected with the connectors. The lower portion is called the connector entity browser and it contains a list of the connectors in the model. The connectors will be grouped based on the type of connection.

Currently there are no components or connectors listed because there are no connectors in

340


Altair Engineering

your model.

Step 4: Create a bolt connector. 1.

Access the Bolt by right clicking in the Connector Browser in the connector window and selecting C re a te > B o lt.

2.

that location is set to no de s and select the node on the edge of the hole in the component, Rear_Truss_1.

3.

For connect what: click on co m ps and select R e a r_Trus s _1 and R e a r_Trus s _2.

4.

Click s e le ct.

5.

In the tolerance= field, type 50. The connector will connect any selected entities within this distance of itself.

6.

Set type= to bo lt (ge ne ra l). Re-realizing the connector will allow you to see the different bolt types.

7.

Click re a liz e & ho le de te ct de ta ils to open the options.

8.

In the max dimension = field, type 60 to ensure that the diameter of the picked hole will be captured.

Altair Engineering


341

9.

Click cre a te . Ensure the display of the current component is turned on.

Bolted connection

9.

Click re turn to access the main menu.

342


Altair Engineering

HM-3430: Part Replacement Through Connectors In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Replace the rear truss component, Rear_Truss_1, with a new, similar part and then update the affected connectors. Export the connector information Export the FE deck and view the connector information in the deck After the modeling of the assembly is complete, a design change might be made to any one of the parts. When this occurs, you must replace the current part(s) in the model with the new, similar one(s) and update the affected connections (welds).

Exercise

This exercise uses the model file, frame_assembly_3.hm. A new part is needed in the assembly. This exercise will illustrate how to delete the original component, import the new part, and update the connections. You will also export the connector information to a single file. Then you will also export the entire FE input deck and observe how the connector information is preserved.


Open the model file, frame_assembly_3.hm.

2.


3.


4.

Select R AD IO SS, then B ulkD a ta .

5.

Click O K to set the profile.


From the menu bar select Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > C o nne cto r B ro ws e r.

2.

Review the layout of the Connector Browser. The Connector Browser allows s to view and manage the connectors in their model. The top portion of the browser is called the Link Entity Browser and it contains a listing of the components being connected with the connectors. The lower portion is called the connector entity browser and it contains a list of the connectors in the model. The connectors will be grouped based on the type of connection.

Step 3: Import rear_truss_1_new.hm to set up the link update.

Altair Engineering


343

1.

From the Model Browser, isolate the component Rear_Truss_1.

2.

From the menu bar select File > Im po rt > M o de l.

3.

At the top of the browser window, select Im po rt H M m o de l.

4.

Under File selection, click the file open icon ( rear_truss_1_new.hm.

5.

Click Im po rt.

), and import the file,

The rear_truss_1_new is on top of the rear_truss_1.

Step 4: Using the Connector Browser, update the connector links to the new component. 1.

In the Link Entity Browser in the Connector Browser, right-click R e a r_Trus s _1 and then click Find Atta che d.

2.

Right-click any of the highlighted connector names in the Connector Browser and click Upda te Link.

344


Altair Engineering

3.

Click the field in the Search column for Link Select.

4.

Click co m po ne nt and select R e a r_Trus s _1.

5.

Click pro ce e d to select the component.

6.

Click the field in the Replace column for Link Select.

7.

Click co m po ne nt and select R e a r_Trus s _1.1.

8.

Click pro ce e d to select the component.

9.

Click Upda te to update the connector links.

Step 5: Realize the connectors in the component C o n_Re a r_T russ. 1.

Set the current component to Con_Rear_Truss.

2.

Enter the Spot by right clicking in the connector window and selecting C re a te > Spo t.

Altair Engineering


345

3.


4.


5.

that type=: is set to we ld.

6.

that tolerance = is set to 10.

7.

Toggle the m e s h de pe nde nt option and that adjust realization is selected.

8.

Click re a liz e to realize the connectors.

9.


Step 6: Save the connector information to an XML file. 1.

At the bottom of the Connector Browser, click E xpo rt co nne cto rs (X M L) (

2.

A dialog opens. Select the location where you would like to save the XML file and click Sa v e .

3.

Open the XML file in a text editor. Inspect the file and observe how the connector information has been saved. In the future, you can use the XML file to import connectors.

).

Step 7: Export the finite element deck and observe how the connector information is preserved. 1.

From the menu bar select File > E xpo rt > So lv e r D e ck:

3.

Set File type to R AD IO SS.

4.

For Template, select B ulk D a ta s ta nda rd fo rm a t.

5.

Click the file open icon ( ) next to File and select a name and location for the file to be saved to. Be sure to use the .fem extension.

6.

Click

7.

Make sure the option for Include connectors is checked.

8.

Click E xpo rt.

9.

Open the .fem file you just saved in a text editor. Scroll to the very bottom. This is where all the connector information has been saved. The information has been saved as comment cards so that when you run the analysis, the connector information is not read. But when the input deck is importing back into HyperMesh, the connector information is read.

346


next to Export Options to view the additional export options.


Altair Engineering

Morphing HM-3510: Freehand Morphing HM-3520: Sculpting HM-3530: Changing a Curvature Using Map to Geometry HM-3540: Changing a Profile Using Map to Sections HM-3550: Morph Volume HM-3560: Basics of Domains and Handles HM-3570: Altering Cross-Sections Using Domains HM-3580: Morphing About an Axis Using Domains HM-3590: Morph Adhesive Layers HM-3600: Morph Tube to Different Configurations HM-3610: Shaping a Dome Using Cyclic Symmetry HM-3620: Shaping a Bead Using Cyclic Symmetry HM-3625: Morph a Symmetric Part onto a New Geometry HM-3630: Morphing with Shapes HM-3640: Interpolating Loads Using Shapes HM-3650: Creating Shapes Using Record HM-3660: Maintaining Area Using Constraints HM-3670: Positioning a Dummy Using Limiting Constraints HM-3680: Preserving a Shape Using Cluster Constraints HM-3690: Remeshing Domains After Morphing

Altair Engineering


347

HM-3510: Freehand Morphing Exercise: Translating Nodes to Increase the Length of a Propeller Blade

In this tutorial, you will increase the length of a propeller blade by 100 units, using freehand morphing.

Figure 1: Original blade

Figure 2: Blade after morphing

Step 1: Load the model. Open the HyperMesh file, propeller.hm.

Step 2: Morph the blade. 1.

Click M o rphing > Fre e H a nd, then select the move nodes sub.

348


Altair Engineering

2.

that the morphing method is set to tra ns la te .

3.

For the tra ns la te value, key in z= -100.

4.

Open the Vie w folder in the Model Browser.

5.

Click

6.

For m o v ing no de s and fixe d no de s select the nodes as displayed in Figure 3.

next to Vie w1 to set the view.

Figure 3: Node and element selections.

7.

For affected elements select the elements that lie between fixed nodes and moving nodes.

8.

For m v bia s and fx bia s keep the default value (1.00).

9.

Click m o rph to alter the blade of the propeller.

Summary

The length of the propeller blade has increased by 100. The fixed nodes do not move. The affected elements were stretched evenly to maintain element quality. The stretching of the elements takes place between the moving nodes and the fixed nodes.

Altair Engineering


349

HM-3520: Sculpting Exercise: Conforming a Seat to a Dummy Profile

The objective of this exercise is to take a dummy pelvis profile and imprint it onto a seat.

Figure 1: Seat before and after sculpting

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file, dummy_position_solid.hm.

Step 2: Morph the seat. 1.

Click M o rphing > Fre e H a nd, then select the sculpting sub.

2.

Change the sculpting tool to m e s h.

3.

For the sculpting tool:, choose the e le m e nts in the collector dum m y (Figure 2).

4.

For affected elements: choose the e le m e nts in the collector s e a t (Figure 2).

5.

For the base point as well as the tool path > node list, choose a node on the dummy (Figure 2).

6.

Define a sculpt direction for your seat using N1 N2 (Figure 2).

7.

Set your taper angle to 85 (degrees).

8.

that m e s h co m pre s s io n is set to co m pre s s by fa cto r.

9.

Set m e s h co m pr= to 0.5.

350


Altair Engineering

Figure 2: Setting up the model for morphing

10.

Click m o v e + to complete the morphing operation.

Figure 3: Seat after sculpting

11.

Review the obtained mesh quality.

Altair Engineering


351

Summary

Using just a few steps you have been able to take a fairly complicated profile and impose it on to another mesh.

352


Altair Engineering

HM-3530: Changing a Curvature Using Map to Geometry Exercise: Changing the Curvature of a Bumper to a Curved Line

In this exercise, you will use the line diffe re nce approach to morph a bumper to conform to a new section line.

Figure 1: Bumper before and after morphing

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file, bumper_morphing.hm.

Step 2: Morph the bumper. 1.

Click M o rphing > M a p to G e o m e try to open the Map to Geom

2.

Change the geometry selector to line diffe re nce .

3.

Select the fro m line (Line A) and the to line (Line B ) as shown in figure 2.

4.

Toggle the morphing entity (2nd column) from m a p do m a ins to m a p no de s .

5.

Select no de s > > dis pla y e d.

6.

Use no fixe d no de s (2nd column, 2nd row).

7.

Use m a p by line a xis morphing with a 1.0 mvbias and fxbias (column 3).

Altair Engineering


353

Figure 2: The fr o m line and the to line

8.

Click m a p.

Summary

The profile of the bumper is changed to follow the new section line.

354


Altair Engineering

HM-3540: Changing a Profile Using Map to Sections Exercise: Changing the Profile of the Roof of a Car

In this tutorial, you will use m a p to s e ctio ns to change the profile of the car roof.

Figure 1: C ar model.

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file, car_section.hm.

Step 2: Morph the roof. 1.

Click M o rphing > M a p to G e o m e try to access the Map to geom .

2.

Change the mapping section type to m a p to s e ctio ns .

3.

Under map to sections, toggle line s to line lis t.

4.

Switch m a p do m a ins to m a p e le m e nts (2nd column).

5.

Toggle no fixe d no de s to fixe d no de s (2nd column).

6.

Keep ble nd a ll option selected.

7.

Keep ro ta te no de s active.

8.

Keep the 3rd column selector set to m a p by line no rm a l.

Altair Engineering


355

9.

Click first line lis t button and select Line A and Line B on the model.

10.

Under to: click the second line lis t button and select Line A’ and Line B ’ on the model. Lines should be selected in the same order.

11.

Under map to elements click the e le m s button and select elements by co lle cto r.

12.

Pick collector R o o f. (This may be located on the second page of collectors)

13.

Click s e le ct.

14.

Click the X Z R ight Pla ne Vie w (

15.

For fixed nodes use Shift + Left Mouse Button to select all the nodes as shown in figure 2.

) icon to set the view

Figure 2: Selection for fixed nodes

16.

Click m a p.

Summary

The roof of the car has been morphed while the mesh quality has been maintained.

356


Altair Engineering

HM-3550: Morph Volume Exercise: Changing the Shape of the B-pillar with the Help of Morph Volume

This exercise shows how to smoothly change the shape of a B-pillar via morph volumes.

Figure 1: B-Pillar before and after morphing

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file, body_side.hm.

Step 2: Create morph volumes. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu in the menu bar and pick C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s

2.

Switch the creation method to pick o n s cre e n.

3.

For handle placement, select co rne rs o nly .

4.

Keep the a uto - ta nge nt check box selected.

5.

Draw a window by clicking at the four places shown in Figure 2.

Altair Engineering


357

Figure 2: Points for creating the morph volume

Note: A morph volume is created, enclosing the area.

Step 3: Split the morph volumes. 1.

Click the s plit/ co m bine sub in the Morphing .

2.

the split toggle is set to s plit m v o ls : by e dge s

3.

Select an edge of the morph volume close to location 1 (Figure 3).

Figure 3: Locations to split the morph volume

The green colored cross moves to the location of the black dot.

358


Altair Engineering

4.

Click s plit. The morph volume is split into two. Follow the same steps to create another split at location2.

Step 4: Change the profile of the b-pillar. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu and pick M o rph. Click the m o v e ha ndle s sub if not already open.

2.

Set the morphing method to tra ns la te .

3.

For direction use a lo ng xy z .

4.

Key in the following values:

x val = 0 y v a l = 100.00 z val = 0 5.

Select the eight handles by window as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: Select handles for morphing

6.

Click m o rph.

Rotate the model to observe that the b-pillar is morphed.

Altair Engineering


359

Summary

The b-pillar is morphed in a smooth fashion with minimum distortion to the elements.

360


Altair Engineering

HM-3560: Basics of Domains and Handles Exercise: Using Domains and Handles

In this exercise you will create domains and handles, and morph the model.

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open and review the HyperMesh model morphing_1.hm.

Step 2: Auto generate 2-D domains and handles. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu in the menu bar and pick C re a te > D o m a ins .

2.

Change the create method to a uto functio ns .

3.

Click ge ne ra te . Based on the model’s geometric features, all of the model’s elements are organized into various domains and local handles are created and associated with the domains.

Step 3: Move elements into a new 2-D domain. 1.

Set the selector to 2D do m a ins . Toggle to the elems selector if not already there.

2.

Click

3.

Using e le m s > > by windo w, select the elements indicated in figure 1.

Altair Engineering

to clear the elements that were already selected.


361

Figure 1: Elements to select to move into a new domain

5.

that pa rtitio n 2D do m a ins is active.

6.

Click cre a te to create the domain. Local handles are created for the new domain. You should now have two local domains. Elements can only belong to one domain at a time. Thus, the elements you selected were moved into the new domain. This functionality makes it very easy to group elements into different domains.

Step 4: Split the edge domain of the radius to have more control when morphing. 1.

Click the edit edges sub in the Morphing > Domains .

2.

that the s plit option is selected.

3.

With the do m a in selector active, select the edge domain of the part’s radius as indicated in the Figure 2. The no de selector automatically becomes active once the edge domain is selected. Click the do m a in selector to make it active and see that you selected the desired edge domain.

Figure 2: Edge domain to select

4.

Click the no de selector to make it active.

5.

Select the node on the positive Y-axis end of the radius, as indicated in the image Figure 3.

362


Altair Engineering

Figure 3: Node selection to split the edge domain of the radius

6.

Click s plit to split the edge domain at the node.

7.

Repeat the above process to further split the edge domain of the radius, this time at the node indicated in the Figure 4.

Figure 4: Node selection to further split the edge domain of the radius

8.

When complete, click re turn to exit the .

Step 5: Add local handles to the 2-D domain on the part’s left side. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu, and pick C re a te > H a ndle s .

2.

For na m e = , enter local.

Altair Engineering


363

3.

Click the attached to: do m a in selector to make it active.

4.

Select the 2-D domain on the part’s left side by selecting its red icon, as indicated in the following image.

Figure 5: Adding handles to a 2-D domain

5.

Click the by nodes: no de s selector to make it active.

6.

Select the two nodes as indicated in the previous image.

7.

Click cre a te to create the handles and add them to the 2-D domain.

8.


Step 6: Perform basic morphing to understand how domains and handles interact with each other and the mesh. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu, and pick M o rph.

2.

Select the m o v e ha ndle s sub if not already there.

3.

Change the mode to inte ra ctiv e if not already set.

4.

With the ha ndle s selector active, select the two handles on the right-hand end of the part, as indicated in figure 6. If you select one or more handle, those handles follow the handle you drag (in Step 6.10, following).

5.

Switch from o n do m a ins to o n pla ne .

6.

Click the N1 selector to make it active.

7.

For N1, N2, and N3, select any three nodes on the model to define a plane.

364


Altair Engineering

8.

Click m o rph. The message, “ pic k ha ndle s a nd m ov e t o ne w loc a t ion” appears in the status bar.

9.

Click on and drag one of the selected handles to morph the part. As you drag the handle, the mesh’s size and shape is adjusted. Notice that the following occurs as the selected local handle is moved: The handles selected in step 6.2 above follow the handle you are dragging. All of the elements belonging to the selected local handle’s 2-D domain are affected by moving that local handle. The 2-D domain’s non-selected local handles act like anchors (they do not move). The nodes on the edge domains and between any two non-selected local domains do not move. None of the elements in the other 2-D domain are affected.

10.

Release the mouse button to complete the morphing operation.

Figure 6: Example result of morphing the model

11.

Click undo . The HyperMorph module allows for multiple levels of undo and redo for all morphing operations. This functionality is available for any particular HyperMesh session and its current model as long as the session and its model remain open.

12.

Click

13.

With the ha ndle s selector active, select one or more global handles.

14.

Click m o rph.

15.

Click on and drag any global handle to morph the part.

Altair Engineering

to clear the selected handles.


365

Summary

The following occurs as the selected global handle is moved: The handles selected in Step 6.2 above follow the handle you are dragging. The non-selected global handles act like anchors (they do not move). All of the elements, local handles and edge domains are affected.

366


Altair Engineering

HM-3570: Altering Cross-Sections Using Domains Exercise: Increasing the Gauge Thickness of the Spring Wire In this tutorial, you will use domains and handles to increase the gauge thickness.

Figure 1: Before and after morphing

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file, spring.hm.

Step 2: Change the gauge thickness. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu and pick C re a te > D o m a ins .

2.

Switch domain type to 2D do m a ins .

3.

elements toggle is set to a ll e le m e nts .

4.

that only the pa rtitio n 2D do m a ins option is active.

5.

Click cre a te .

6.

Click the M o rphing menu and pick M o rph. Enter the alter dimensions sub if not already there.

7.

Change the morphing method to ra dius .

Altair Engineering


367

8.

Change the ce nte r ca lcula tio n to by no rm a ls .

9.

Keep all the other settings.

10.

For do m a ins (under e dge a nd 2D ) select the 2D domain and the two edge domains as shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Domains to select for altering the gauge radius

When the circular edge domain is selected, the radius box populates with the current radius value. 11.

In the ra dius field, type 12.

12.

Click m o rph.

Summary

The gauge thickness of the spring wire is changed from 7.5 to 12.0.

368


Altair Engineering

Altair Engineering


369

HM-3580: Morphing About an Axis Using Domains Exercise: Changing the Radius of the Spring Coil

In this exercise, you will increase the radius of the spring coil.


Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file, spring.hm.

Step 2: Change the coil radius. 1.


2.

Switch domain type to 2D do m a ins .

3.

that the elements toggle is set to a ll e le m e nts .

4.

that only the pa rtitio n 2D do m a ins option is active.

5.

Click cre a te .

370


Altair Engineering

6.

Click the M o rphing menu and pick M o rph. Enter the alter dimensions sub if not already there.

7.

Change the morphing method to ra dius .

8.

Change the ce nte r ca lcula tio n to by a xis .

9.

Change the axis to the z - a xis .

Figure 2: Domains and base node to select for altering the coil radius

10.

For do m a ins (under e dge a nd 2D ) select the 2-D domain and the two edge domains.

11.

For the base node for the z - a xis select the node as shown in Figure 2.

12.

Keep the default settings for the remaining options.

13.

Activate a dd to curre nt.

14.

In the ra dius field, type 20.

15.

Click m o rph.

Summary

Altair Engineering


371

Twenty units are added to the coil radius.

372


Altair Engineering

HM-3590: Morph Adhesive Layers Objective

Use morphing to change the thickness of the middle layers of a four-layered solid, while maintaining the thickness of the outer layers.

Tools

Domains will be created using 3D do m a ins > by co m po ne nt. Thickness will be altered using a lte r dim e ns io ns .

Altair Engineering


373

Step 1: Open the file. 1.

Open the file, Morph_Adhesive_Layers.hm.

Step 2: Create domains and handles. 1.


2.

Switch the domain type to 3D do m a ins .

3.

Toggle the element selector to a ll e le m e nts .

4.

Activate the div ide by co m ps and pa rtitio n 2D do m a ins options. The should appear as in the following image:

5.

Click cre a te to create the domains.

6.

Click re turn to exit the Domains .

Step 3: Display only the morph faces of interest. 1.

Using the Model Browser, hide all the components except ^morphface.

2.

Mask all ^morphface elements except those on the outer layer and the layer between the Outer comp and the Adhesive_Outer to leave all the elements shown in the following image. HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select e le m e nts > > by fa ce , and then select e le m e nts > > re v e rs e . This will reverse the selection to the

374


Altair Engineering

elements you do not want and will allow you to mask those elements with the m a s k button.

3.

To reduce the number of domains and handles shown on the screen, click the M a s k tab.

4.

Click the + next to Morphing to expand it.

5.

Click the + in the Show column for Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles for only the displayed elements.

6.

Hide the ^morphface component in the Model Browser.

Step 4: Increase the thickness of the outer adhesive layer by 5 units. 1.

Click the M o rphing menu and pick M o rph to open the Morph .

2.

Open the alter dimensions sub.

3.

Change the dimension type to ra dius .

Altair Engineering


375

4.

Activate the a dd to curre nt checkbox.

5.

For do m a ins , select the curved edge domains as well as the 2-D domains representing the curved surfaces as seen in the following image.

6.

Set the ce nte r ca lcula tio n to by a xis .

7.

For the axis, use the z - a xis .

8.

For B select the temp node that represents the center of the cylinder.

9.

In ra dius = box, change value to 5 units.

10.

Click m o rph.

11.

Go to the s a v e s ha pe sub.

12.

For na m e = enter sh1.

13.

Switch to a s no de pe rturba tio ns .

14.

Click s a v e .

15.

Click undo a ll to revert back to the original model configuration.

16.

Show all components except the ^ m o rphfa ce component.

17.

Go to the a pply s ha pe s sub.

18.

For shapes select s h1.

19.

Click s e le ct.

20.

Click a nim a te . This takes you to the Deformed Shape .

21.

Change the animation scale from m o de l units to s ca le fa cto r.

22.

Set the s ca le fa cto r to 1.

376


Altair Engineering

23.

Click line a r to start the animation.

24.

Once you are done viewing your animation and ing that it is as intended, you can return to the main area.

With this step you have successfully completed morphing one of the middle layers of the fourlayer model. Optional: Using the process shown above, increase the thickness of Adhesive_Inner component by 5 units.

Altair Engineering


377

HM-3600: Morph Tube to Different Configurations Objective

Use morphing to create multiple configurations of a model.

Tools

Domains, morph

Figure 1: Tube to morph

Step 1: Open the file. 1.

Open the file, tube.hm.


From the menu bar, click M o rphing > C re a te > D o m a ins .

2.

Go to the cre a te sub.

3.

Switch the domain type to 3D do m a ins .

4.


5.

Activate the pa rtitio n 2D do m a ins option.

6.

Click cre a te .

378


Altair Engineering

Step 3: Partition the outer domain. 1.

Make sure you are still in the D o m a ins > cre a te sub.

2.

In the Model Browser, hide the component s o lid.

3.

Using the Mask ( ^morphfaces.

), display only the outer elements of the component

HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select e le m e nts > > by fa ce , and then select e le m e nts > > re v e rs e . This will reverse the selection to the elements you do not want and will allow you to mask those elements with the m a s k button. 4.

Click re turn to return to the Domains .

5.


6.

Click the + next to Morphing to expand it.

7.

Click the + in the Show column for the Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles for only the displayed elements.

8.

Change your view to a left view.

9.

Change the domain type to 2D do m a ins .

10.

Change the elements selector from a ll e le m e nts to e le m s .

11.

Select the elements as displayed in the following picture.

Figure 2: Elements to partition

Altair Engineering


379

12.

Click cre a te to create the new domain.

13.


Step 4: Increase the outer diameter of the middle section of the tube. 1.

Click M o rphing > M o rph to open the Morph .

2.

Go to the alter dimensions sub.

3.

Set the dimension type to ra dius .

4.

Set the ce nte r ca lcula tio n to by e dge s .

5.

Switch the mesh to wireframe.

6.

Select the two edge domains and the 2D domain as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3: Select the following Edge and 2D domains.

7.

Set the ra dius = value to 27.

8.

Click m o rph to morph the part.

9.

Remain in this for the next section.

380


Altair Engineering

Figure 4: New profile of the part

Step 5: Offset the inner diameter of the tube. 1.

Click unm a s k a ll

2.

Use the Mask to display only the tube inner elements of the component ^ m o rphfa ce s .

to display all the elements.

HINT: Select a couple of elements on the face you want to keep. Select elements by face followed by elements reverse. This will reverse the selection to the elements you do not want and will allow you to mask out those elements. 3.

Click re turn to return to the Domains .

4.


5.

Click the + next to M o rphing to expand it.

6.

Click the + in the Sho w column for the Local Domains/Handles to display the domains and handles for only the displayed elements.

7.

Click M o rphing > M o rph to open the Morph .

8.

Go to the alter dimensions sub, set the dimension type to ra dius .

9.

Select do m a ins > > dis pla y e d. This selects the two inner edge domains as well as the 2D domain for the tube inner.

Altair Engineering


381

Figure 6: edge domains on the inner radius

10.

Change the center calculation: to by a xis .

11.

For the axis, switch to the y - a xis .

12.

For base point, select the temp node at the center of the tube arc.

13.

For ra dius = enter 3.

14.

Check a dd to curre nt.

15.

Click m o rph to morph the inner diameter of the tube.

Figure 7: Tube with offset inner

Summary Using morphing operations, dimension changes have been successfully performed on a tubular mesh.

382


Altair Engineering

HM-3610: Shaping a Dome Using Cyclic Symmetry Exercise: Using Cyclical Symmetry to Assist in the Morphing of a Bottle

In this exercise you will create a dome shape at the bottom of the bottle using morph volumes.


Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file bottle.hm


From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s .

2.

Switch cre a te m o rphv o l to cre a te m a trix.

3.

Set:

x de ns ity = 3 y de ns ity = 8

Altair Engineering


383

z de ns ity = 5 buffe r % = 5 4.


5.

Toggle global system to lo ca l s y s te m .

6.

For syst, select the system located at the top of the bottle.

7.

Use the default values for the remaining settings.

8.

Click cre a te to create the morph volumes. Note that morph volumes are created, encoming the bottle, with red colored handles created at the corners of each morph volume.

9.


Step 3: Create symmetry. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te >Sy m m e trie s :

2.

Under domain, activate m o rph v o lum e s . Symmetries can either be linked to domains or to morph volumes. Here you are associating the symmetries to the morph volumes.

3.

Change 1 plane to cy clica l.

4.

Change 180 degrees to s e t fre q.

5.

Set # o f cy cle s to 8.

6.

For syst select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.

7.

Click cre a te . Note that a cyclical symmetry is created.

8.


Step 4: Create the dome. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s , and then select the update edges sub.

2.

Toggle update nodes to upda te e nds .

3.

Change the view to the bottom view by selecting the XY Bottom Plane View

4.

that the options by edges and free are selected (see image below).

384


.

Altair Engineering

5.

Using the image below as reference, select the line to the left of the tangency at the top of the center circle.

Figure 2: Updating tangencies, selecting line

6.

After selecting the line, select the tangency (shown below).

Figure 3: Updating tangencies, select tangency

Notice that after selecting the tangency, the two arrows are replaced with a single arrow.

Altair Engineering


385

7.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 on the three other tangencies shown in the image below:

Figure 4: Updating tangencies, additional tangencies to update

8.

When finished, click re turn to exit the .

9.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > M o rph and then select the move handles sub:

10.

Select the handles at the bottom of the bottle, as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 3: Handles to translate

11.

Switch the morphing method from interactive to tra ns la te .

12.

Switch to a lo ng xy z

13.

Set z val = 10

14.

Click m o rph. Since you have symmetries defined, translating a single handle on the inner ring at the bottom, ensures that a similar behavior is imparted on all the handles symmetrically

386


Altair Engineering

associated to it. 15.

To reduce the number of domains and handles shown on the screen, click the M a s k tab. If this isn’t displayed, select Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > M a s k.

16.

Click the - in the H ide column to turn off the display of all morphing entities.

17.

Rotate the model to view the changes made.

Figure 6: Morphed model

Summary

Using morph volumes with appropriate tangencies, and by creating symmetries you are able to create a dome-shaped feature at the bottom of the bottle.

Remarks

Altair Engineering


387

There are four different methods to define the continuity between the morph volumes. Free makes morph volume edges independent of other edges. Fixed connectivity allows you to prescribe the angle at the end of an edge. Master-slave maintains tangency between two morph volume edges while keeping the master edge independent of the slave edge. (When the master edge moves, the slave edge follows, but when the slave edge moves, the master edge does not have to follow.) Continuous maintains tangency between two morph volume edges while allowing both edges to affect each other. The default setting in morph volume is always set to tangent which is continuous edge connectivity. This definition can always be changed in the update edges sub, based upon the morphing needs.

388


Altair Engineering

HM-3620: Shaping a Bead Using Cyclic Symmetry Exercise: Creating a Circular Bead on the Bottle

Figure 1: Adding beads to the bottle

In this exercise you will first create a bead using the default continuous edge connectivity. You will then update the edges to free and see how it affects the bead creation.

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file bottle.hm


From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s .

2.

Switch create morphvol to cre a te m a trix.

3.

Set:

Altair Engineering


389

x de ns ity = 3 y de ns ity = 8 z de ns ity = 5 buffe r % = 5 4.


5.

Toggle global system to lo ca l s y s te m .

6.

For s y s t, select the system located at the top of the bottle.

7.

Use the default values for the remaining settings.

8.

Click cre a te to create the morph volumes. Note that morph volumes are created encoming the bottle, with red colored handles created at the corners of each morph volume.

9.



From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te >Sy m m e trie s .

2.

Under domain, activate m o rph v o lum e s . Symmetries can either be linked to domains or to morph volumes. In this case, you are associating the symmetries to the morph volumes.

3.

Change 1 plane to cy clica l.

4.

Change 180 degrees to s e t fre q.

5.

Set # of cycles to 8.

6.

For syst select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.

7.

Click cre a te . Note that a cyclical symmetry is created.

8.


Step 4: Split the morph volumes. 1.

On the toolbar, click XZ Left Plane View

.

2.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s , then select the split/combine sub.

3.

Set the toggles to s plit m v o ls and by e dge s .

390


Altair Engineering

4.

Set s ingle s plit to 0.8.

5.

Select an edge of Morph Volume 1 (Figure 2).

6.

Click s plit.

7.

Set s ingle s plit to 0.2.

8.

Select an edge of Morph Volume 2 (Figure 2).

9.

Click s plit.

10.


Figure 2: Splitting morph volumes

Step 5: Morph the part. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > M o rph, then select the move handles sub.

2.

Switch the morphing method from interactive to tra ns la te .

3.

Switch the translate option to a lo ng xy z .

4.

Set x- v a l = -5.0.

5.

For system =, select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.

6.

Select a handle as shown in figure 3.

7.

Click m o rph.

Altair Engineering


391

Figure 3: Selecting a handle for morphing

As the bead is created, the upper and lower portions of the bottle deform too (figure 4). This is not the intention, as you want to create a bead without affecting the other parts of the bottle.

392


Altair Engineering

Figure 4: Morphing using continuous morph volumes

8.

Click undo to undo the morphing operation.

Step 6: Update the morph volume edges. To stop this bulging effect of the upper and the lower portions of the bottle, you will use the free edge connectivity between these morph volumes. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s , and then select the update edges sub.

2.

Toggle update nodes to upda te e nds .

3.

Switch edge tangency to fre e .

4.

Update the edges, working your way around the bottle (see figures 5 and 6 below).

Altair Engineering


393

Figure 5: Selecting edges to update the tangencies

Figure 6: C hanging the tangencies from continuous to free

5.



From the menu bar select M o rphing > M o rph, then select the move handles sub.

2.

that the morphing method is translate.

3.

Switch the translate option to a lo ng xy z .

4.

Set x- v a l = -5.0.

5.

For system =, select the cylindrical coordinate system located at the top of the bottle.

6.

Select the handle as shown previously in figure 3.

7.

Click m o rph.

394


Altair Engineering

Figure 7: Bead created with free edge connectivity

Summary Using morph volumes with appropriate tangencies and symmetries you were able to create a bead on the given bottle.

Altair Engineering


395

HM-3625: Morph a Symmetric Part onto a New Geometry Objective

Update the mesh to a new geometry quickly using symmetry.

Tools

3-D domains, symmetry, interactive morphing.

Figure 1: Mesh to morph

Step 1: Load the model. 1.

From the menu bar, select File > O pe n > M o de l and load the file fe_only.hm.

2.

From the menu bar, select File > Im po rt > G e o m e try and load the file new_design. igs.

396


Altair Engineering


From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > D o m a ins .

2.

Switch the domain type from global domains to 3D do m a ins .

3.


4.

Activate the partition 2D domains option.

5.

Click cre a te to create the domains.

6.

Select re turn to exit the .

Step 3: Create symmetries. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > Sy m m e trie s to enter the Symmetry .

2.

Switch the symmetry type to cy clica l.

3.

Switch the symmetry angle from 180 degrees to s e t fre q.

4.

Set the # of cycles to 18.

5.

Click s y s t.

6.

Select the center point of the gear.

7.

Click do m a ins > > a ll.

8.

Click cre a te .

9.

Click re turn.

Step 4: Morph the mesh to the new geometry. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > M o rph , then select the move handles sub.

2.

Zoom in to one of the cogs of the gear as in the following image:

Altair Engineering


397

Figure 2: Mesh, domains handles and the new geometry

3.

Switch the morphing method to m o v e to po int.

4.

With from: handle active, select the node depicted in the following image.

5.

With to: point active, select the point on the geometry you want to move the handle to, as depicted in the following image:

Figure 3: Morphing handle to point

As the handles are moved, you will see that the mesh starts conforming to the new geometry.

398


Altair Engineering

Figure 4: Mesh mapped onto the new geometry

6.

In the same manner, move the following handles:

Figure 5: Handles to map

7.

Return to the main menu.

Altair Engineering


399

Figure 6: Updated (morphed) mesh

Summary Notice how each cog on the gear is updated. Taking advantage of the symmetry in this part, you are able to morph it much quicker.

400


Altair Engineering

HM-3630: Morphing with Shapes Exercise: Morphing a Yoke via Morph Volumes and Shapes

In this exercise you will increase the diameter of one of the prongs of a yoke using morph volumes. You will reflect the shape on to the other prong and finally position the combined shapes from one yoke to the other.

Figure 1: Yoke model

Step 1: Load and review the model. 1.

Open the HyperMesh file yoke.hm.

2.

In the Model Browser, right-click component yoke_2, then select H ide ; make sure component yoke_1 is in Show mode.

Altair Engineering


401

Step 2: Convert hexas to morph volume. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s , then select the co nv e rt sub.

2.

Select e le m s > > by co lle cto r.

3.

Select he xa s . Make sure that all inner nodes is checked.

4.

Click s e le ct.

5.

Click co nv e rt.

Figure 2: C onverting hexas volumes to morph volumes

Note that all the seven hexa elements are converted into morph volumes.

Step 3: Increase the prong diameter. 1.

In the Model Browser , right-click Ta g and select Sho w to display all the tags.

2.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > M o rph, then select the move handles sub.

3.

Set the m o de s e le cto r to m o v e to no de .

4.

Click o ptio ns and make sure morphing>mvols: is set to a ctiv e (toggle if it is set to ina ctiv e ).

5.

Click re turn.

6.

For handle, click Handle 1, and for node, click tag 1’.

7.

Repeat this process for the other 35 handles.

402


Altair Engineering

Figure 3: Using tags to change the morph volumes

Step 4: Save the morphed shape. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > Sha pe s , then select the save as shape sub.

2.

For name = e nte r Prong1.

3.

Toggle as handle perturbations to a s no de pe rturba tio ns .

4.

Click cre a te and select Y e s to the message which appears.

5.

Click undo a ll to bring the model to its original position before morphing.

Step 5: Create coordinate system. You need to reference a coordinate system in order to create symmetry. 1.

In the Model Browser, right-click and select H ide for Shape and Morphing Volume. Right click on y o ke _1 and select Sho w.

2.

From the menu bar, select G e o m e try > C re a te > Sy s te m s > Axis D ire ctio n to open the Systems , create by axis direction sub.

Altair Engineering


403

3.

Click o rigin and select the no de labeled "origin."

4.

For X-axis, select the no de labeled "X."

5.

For XY plane, select the no de labeled "Y."

6.

Click cre a te .

7.

Click re turn.


From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > Sy m m e trie s .

2.

For name =, enter symm1.

3.

Under domains, click the check-box for m o rph v o lum e s . (make sure it is active).

4.

Set 1 pla ne and keep the rest of the default settings.

5.

Click s y s t and select the newly created coordinate system.

6.

Click cre a te .

7.

Click re turn.

Step 7: Reflect shape. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > Sha pe s .

2.

Change the sub to a pply s ha pe s .

3.

Under shapes, change apply shapes to re fle ct s ha pe s .

4.

Change apply only to a pply & cre a te .

5.

Keep the default auto-envelope.

6.

Click s ha pe s and select the newly created shape from the previous section.

7.

Under reflect using: click s y m m e trie s and select the newly created symmetry.

8.

Click re fle ct.

404


Altair Engineering

Note that a reflected shape has been created and applied on the other prong. The name of the shape, created by reflecting, has the same name as the original shape with a suffix “1.”

Step 8: Position the shapes onto the other yoke. In this step, you will position the shapes of the two prongs of the yoke onto the opposite yoke. 1.

In the Model Browser, right-click Title and select Sho w.

2.

In the Model Browser right-click y o ke _2 and click Sho w.

3.

In the apply shapes sub, under shapes, change reflect shapes to po s itio n s ha pe s .

4.

Change the selector from scale to no s ca le .

5.

Click s ha pe s and select the two shapes present in the model.

6.

Under from: select the three nodes named from_N1, from_N2 and from_N3 for N1, N2 and N3.

7.

Under to: select the three nodes named to_N1, to_N2 and to_N3 for N1, N2 and N3.

Altair Engineering


405

8.

Click po s itio n.

9.

Click re turn.

Note that the two or more shapes have been created and applied to the other yoke. The name of the first new shape (on the other yoke) will have a suffix “2” because it is the second copy of the first shape and the second shape will have a suffix of “11” as it is the first copy of the reflected shape.

406


Altair Engineering

HM-3640: Interpolating Loads Using Shapes Exercise: Using Shapes to Interpolate Loads

Shapes are one of the most versatile types of the morphing entities. Loads can be converted into shapes and vice versa. When you position shapes, they act on a volume equivalent to the initial volume, but at the new location. In this regard, shapes can be used to interpolate loads on a mesh given the loading at the boundaries of a volume. In this exercise you are given a temperature distribution at points defined by a cube (hexa element). You will use shapes to interpolate the temperatures to the tube lying inside the cube.

Figure 1: Model

Altair Engineering


407

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file s_bend_tube.hm

Step 2: Convert temperatures to shapes. 1.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > C re a te > Sha pe s , then select the Convert sub.

2.

Switch the conversion type to te m pe ra ture to s ha pe s .

3.

For loadcols, select te m pe ra ture .

4.

Click s e le ct.

5.

Click co nv e rt.

Figure 2: Temperature converted in shape vectors

Note that the temperature loads have been converted into shape vectors. The shape vectors are proportional to the temperature loads on the corners of the cube and the distances from those corners. The name of the converted shape is the same as the temperature load collector.

Step 3: Translate the shape.

408


Altair Engineering

1.

Click the a pply s ha pe s sub.

Figure 3: The base and the node for translating the shape

2.

Change the operation to tra ns la te s ha pe s .

3.

Change apply only to cre a te ne w.

4.

For envelope, use a uto - e nv e lo pe .

5.

For shapes, select te m pe ra ture .

6.

Click s e le ct.

7.

For from: base, select the node shown in Figure 3.

8.

For to: nodes, select the node shown in Figure 3.

9.

Click tra ns la te . The shape has been transferred to the tube. You selected the same base and to node, effectively selecting a translate distance of 0. A new shape is created with the suffix 1 (temperature1).

Step 4: Convert shape vectors to temperature loads.

Altair Engineering


409

1.

Click the convert sub.

2.

Switch the conversion type to s ha pe s to te m pe ra ture s .

3.

For shapes, select te m pe ra ture 1.

4.

Click s e le ct.

5.

Click co nv e rt. The shape has been converted into temperature load.

Step 5: Check the result. 1.

In the Model Browser, right-click and select H ide for Sha pe .

2.

In the Model Browser, right-click component cube and select H ide .

3.

In the Model Browser, right-click Lo a dC o lle cto r and select H ide .

4.

From the B C s menu, select C o nto ur Lo a ds . Make sure you expand the Contour Loads utility appropriately to visualize all the buttons.

5.

From the list of loads, select te m pe ra ture 1.

6.

Click Acce pt. This takes you to the Contour .

7.

Select s im ula tio n = te m pe ra ture 1.

8.

Select da ta ty pe = Te m pe ra ture .

9.

Click co nto ur.

410


Altair Engineering

Figure 4: The contoured temperature results

Summary Using shapes you have been able to interpolate temperatures from the corners of a volume on to an object located in that volume.

Altair Engineering


411

HM-3650: Creating Shapes Using Record Exercise: Recording Shapes

The Record gives you the flexibility of making changes to the mesh using s outside the HyperMorph module and saving them as shapes. In this exercise you will change a bead using the Node Edit > align node sub and record the shape function. You will then reflect the shape to the other side of the mesh to complete the mesh update.

Figure 1: Location to record the nodal movements on and reflect

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file floor.hm.

Step 2: Start recording nodal movements. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > Fre e H a nd, then select the record sub.

2.

Click s ta rt.

3.

Click re turn.

412


Altair Engineering

Step 3: Change the bead profile. 1.

From the menu bar, select G e o m e try > E dit >No de s > Align to enter the align node sub.

2.

Select the nodes shown below for the 1st end and 2nd end.

Figure 2: first set of nodes to align

3.

Select the nodes between the selected nodes to align the nodes to the 1st end: and 2nd end: nodes.

4.

Repeat the same process to align the next row of nodes (figure 3).

Figure 3: Second set of nodes to align

5.

Select the nodes between the selected nodes to align the nodes to the 1st end and 2nd end nodes.

6.

Repeat the same process to align the next row of nodes (figure 4).

Altair Engineering


413

Figure 4: Third set of nodes to align

7.


Step 4: Stop the recording. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > Fre e H a nd, then select the record sub.

2.

Click finis h. This stops the record process.



2.

Set name= Morph1.

3.

Toggle save option to a s no de pe rturba tio ns .

4.

Click s a v e .

5.


Step 6: Create coordinate system. 1.

From the menu bar select G e o m e try > C re a te > Sy s te m s > Axis D ire ctio n.

414


Altair Engineering

2.

For origin select the node with tag or i gi n. For x-axis select the node with tag x-axis. For xy-plane select the node with xy-plane.

3.

Click cre a te .

4.



From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > Sy m m e trie s .

2.

Set name = symm1.

3.

For symmetry type use 1 pla ne .

4.

For align with use x- a xis .

5.

Select the s y s t created in step 6.

6.

Click cre a te . Note that 1 plane symmetry is created with a square symbol.

7.


Altair Engineering


415

Step 8: Reflect shape. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > Sha pe s , then select the apply shapes sub.

2.

Under shape change the option to re fle ct s ha pe s .

3.

Under reflect shapes change the option to a pply & cre a te .

4.

For shape, select M o rph1.

5.

For symmetries, select s y m m 1.

6.

Click re fle ct.

Summary The shape (Morph1) is reflected to the other side. Also, the reflected shape has the same name with the suffix 1. The changes that you made on one side are thus transferred to the other side.

416


Altair Engineering

HM-3660: Maintaining Area Using Constraints Exercise: Using Morph Constraints to Keep the Area of a Windshield Constant while Changing its Shape In this exercise will change the shape of the windshield while keeping its area constant.

Figure 1: Windshield mesh

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file windshield.hm.

Step 2: Create a shape to define the degree of freedom for the mesh. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > Fre e H a nd and select the move nodes sub.

2.

Switch the method to tra ns la te .

3.

Key in x = 0; Y = -5 (negative 5); Z=0

Altair Engineering


417

4.

Under moving nodes: click no de s > > by s e ts and select m o v e _no de .

5.

Click s e le ct.

6.

Under fixed nodes: click no de s > > by s e ts and select fix_no de .

7.

Click s e le ct.

8.

Under affected elements: click e le m s > > dis pla y e d.

9.

Click m o rph.

10.


11.

For name =, enter Shape1.

12.

Toggle the save option to a s no de pe rturba tio ns .

13.

Click s a v e .

14.


This initial shape defines the direction in which the nodes have the freedom to move, as the shape of the windshield is changing, thus enabling us to keep the area at a constant.

Step 3: Create a constraint. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph C o ns tra ints .

2.

Set na m e = const1.

3.

Change the constraint type to a re a .

4.

For s ha pe s , select Shape1.

5.


6.

Switch the area option to e qua l to .

7.

Click ca lcula te to calculate the area of the mesh: Note that the value shows in the area box is: 1.085e+06. This is the actual surface area of the windshield which will be maintained.

8.

Click cre a te .

418


Altair Engineering

Note that the constraint is created. The symbol for the constraint is a matching-mesh. 9.

Right-click Sha pe and select H ide in the Model Browser.

10.

Right-click M o rphingC o ns tra int and select H ide in the Model Browser.

Step 4: Create morph volume. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s .

2.

Switch the method to cre a te m o rphv o l.

3.

Toggle entity type to e nclo s e e le m s .

4.


5.

Toggle coordinate system to glo ba l s y s te m .

6.

Click cre a te . The morph volume is created.


From the menu bar select M o rphing > M o rph and select the move handles sub.

2.

Change the morph type to m o v e to no de .

3.

For from: handle, select handle1 (Figure 2).

4.

For from: node, select node1 (Figure 2).

5.

Repeat the process for the other handles and nodes.

Altair Engineering


419

Figure 2: From handles and from nodes


Click the s a v e s ha pe radio button.

2.

Set name = Shape2.

3.

Toggle the save option to a s no de pe rturba tio ns .

4.

Click s a v e .

Step 7: Check the result. 1.

Right-click M o rphingVo lum e in the Model Browser and select H ide .

2.

Go to Vie w > To o lba rs , make active C he cks toolbar , select the M a s s / Are a C a lc ( ) icon.

3.

For comps, select winds hie ld.

4.

Click s e le ct.

420


Altair Engineering

5.

Click ca lcula te . The final area of the windshield is 1.085e+06, which is the same as the initial area. So, even though the profile of the windshield has changed, its area has not. As the height of the windshield reduced, it expanded in the direction provided by Shape1.

Summary Using morph constraints, you able to change the shape of the windshield, while keeping its area constant.

Altair Engineering


421

HM-3670: Positioning a Dummy Using Limiting Constraints Exercise: Using Limiting Constraints and Freehand Morphing to Position a Dummy and Morph the Seat In this exercise, you will learn to position the H-point of the dummy on a seat cushion. This helps to reduce design and remeshing of the seat based on the pre-stress analysis. To do this exercise you will be using a limiting constraint and freehand morphing.

Figure 1 Model with Seat cushion and dummy

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file dummy.hm

Step 2: Create constraints. 1.


2.

Set name= const1.

3.

Set type of constraint to o n e le m e nts .

4.

Set the option under nodes to bo unde d.

5.

Set project along: to N1,N2 along negative z (choose from side of cushion).

422


Altair Engineering

6.

Set distance= 2. This will ensure that there is a distance of 2 units between the dummy and the seat after the morphing is complete.

7.

Use no de s > > by co lle cto r and select cus hio n.

8.

Click s e le ct.

9.

Use e le m s > > by co lle cto r and select dum m y .

10.

Click s e le ct.

11.

Click cre a te . Constraints with a diamond shape are created.

Figure 2 Morphing C onstraints on Seat cushion and dummy


Right-click M o rphingC o ns tra int in the Model Browser and select H ide .

2.

From the menu bar, select M o rphing > Fre e H a nd and select the move nodes sub.

3.

Switch moving method to tra ns la te .

4.

For moving nodes, use no de s > > by co lle cto r and select cus hio n.

Altair Engineering


423

5.

Click s e le ct.

6.

For fixed nodes, use no de s > > by co lle cto r and select dum m y .

7.

Click s e le ct.

8.

For affected elements, use e le m s > > by co lle cto r and select cus hio n.

9.

Click s e le ct.

10.

For the translate magnitude, set x=0 y =0 z = 80

11.

Click m o rph. The top surface of the cushion has conformed to the shape of the dummy. The distance between the dummy and the seat-cushion is 2 mm.

Summary Using limiting constraints, you are able to move a mesh such that it moves an ading mesh along with it, thus preventing penetration between the two of them.

424


Altair Engineering

HM-3680: Preserving a Shape Using Cluster Constraints Exercise: Using Cluster Constraints to Preserve the Wheel Shape while Lengthening the Body of a Truck

When circular features are stretched, they become elliptical in shape. In some cases as in the wheels of a truck, this effect is not desirable. In such cases, using cluster constraints will allow you to translate the features, along with the morph, while maintaining its circular shape. In the exercise you will be changing the length of the cab while preserving the shape of the wheel. To facilitate the morphing process you will be employing constraint and symmetry.

Figure 1: Truck model

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file truck.hm.

Step 2: Create a coordinate system. 1.

Using the menu bar select G e o m e try > C re a te > Sy s te m s > Axis D ire ctio n.

2.

For origin select the node with tag origin.

3.

For x- a xis , select node with tag x-axis.

4.

For xy-plane, select node with xy-plane.

Altair Engineering


425

5.

Click cre a te to create the coordinate system.

6.

On the toolbar, select X Z R ight Pla ne Vie w (

7.


)

Step 3: Create and split the morph volume. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > M o rph Vo lum e s .

2.

Switch the creation method to cre a te m o rphv o l.

3.

Set entity type to e nclo s e e le m e nts .

4.


5.

Set system to glo ba l s y s te m .

6.

Set buffer % = 5. The morph volume is created.

7.

Click cre a te to create the morph volume.

8.

Click the s plit/ co m bine sub.

9.

Toggle the operation to s plit m v o ls .

426


Altair Engineering

10.

Toggle to split the morph volume by e dge s .

11.

Toggle the type of split to s ingle s plit.

12.

Set single split = 0.44.

13.

Select the morph volume in the graphics window.

14.

Click s plit to split the morph volume. The original morph volume is now split into two morph volumes.

15.


Step 4: Create a Symmetry. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > Sy m m e trie s :

2.

For name =, enter symm1.

3.

Under domain, check the box for morph volumes. Symmetry can be linked to either domains or morph volumes. In this exercise since you are dealing with morph volumes you will use the check to link the symmetry to the morph volume.

4.

Switch the symmetry type to 1 pla ne .

5.

For syst, select the coordinate system created in step 4.2.

6.

Click cre a te to create the symmetry. A 1 plane symmetry with a square symbol has been created.

7.


Altair Engineering


427


From the menu bar select M o rphing > M o rph, then click the move handles sub.

2.

Switch the morphing mode to tra ns la te .

3.

Switch the along option to a lo ng xy z .

4.

Set the following values: X val = 500 Y val = 0 Z val = 0

5.

Select two handles as shown in figure 3.

6.

Click m o rph to morph the front half of the truck.

Figure 2.1 Front half of the truck to morph

Figure 2.2 Front half of the truck morphed

The front end is stretched 500 units. Since the front wheels are also the part of the morph volumes they became elliptical after morphing. This is not desirable. You will undo

428


Altair Engineering

this morphing, constrain the wheels and re-do it.

Figure 3: undesired morphing of the front wheel

7.

Undo a ll morphs.

Step 6: Create a cluster constraint. As seen in the previous image, the front wheels, after morphing, become elliptical. To fix this issue, you will be employing a particular type of constraint, called a clus te r constraint, which helps to keep the original shape of a portion of the model while morphing. 1.


2.

Set name = const2.

3.

Switch the constraint type to clus te r.

4.

Select no de s > > by co lle cto r .

5.

Select co m ps > > by id.

6.

Use id = 1-8 and then hit ENTER on the keyboard.

7.

Click s e le ct to select the components.

Altair Engineering


429

8.

Click cre a te to create the cluster constraint. The cluster constraints are created on the nodes of the selected components.

Figure 4

9.


10.

In the Model Browser, right-click M o rphingC o ns tra int and click H ide to turn off the constraints.

Step 7: Morph the part. Repeat the procedure in Step 5 to morph the front of the truck by 500 units. The front end is stretched 500 mm. The front wheels are moved in the morphing process while maintaining their circular shape.

430


Altair Engineering

Summary Using cluster constraints and morph volumes you are able to stretch the cab of the pickup without distorting the wheels.

Altair Engineering


431

HM-3690: Remeshing Domains After Morphing Exercise: Remeshing Domains After Morphing

Depending on the morphing being performed, there is a possibility that the mesh can get distorted. For such cases, HyperMorph provides a remeshing capability. The advantage of this remeshing is that the newly created elements are automatically a part of the original domain. This provides continuity to the morphing process along with proper element quality.

Figure 1: Model

Step 1: Load and review the model. Open the HyperMesh file arm2D.hm.

Step 2: Set the morph options. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > As s ign > M o rph O ptio ns .

2.

Select the auto qa sub.

3.

Switch auto quality check to 2D ja co bia n.

4.

Set limit = to 0.7.


From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > D o m a ins .

2.

Switch the creation type to 2D do m a ins .

432


Altair Engineering

3.

Switch from a ll e le m s to e le m s .

4.

Use e le m s > > by s e ts and select s e t_1.

5.

Click s e le ct.

6.

Click cre a te to create the domain.

7.

Use e le m s > > by s e ts and select s e t_2.

8.

Click s e le ct.

9.

Click cre a te to create the domain. Note that two 2D domains are created.

Step 4: Translate the washer. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > M o rph, then select m o v e ha ndle s .

2.

Switch the mode to tra ns la te .

3.

Switch the along option to a lo ng v e cto r.

4.

Select N1 and N2 as shown in figure 2.

Altair Engineering


433

Figure 2: Selecting N1 and N2 for the translate vector

5.

Set dist = 0.25.

6.

Select the two handles on the washer.

7.

Click m o rph to morph the washer. The elements outside the washer get compressed as the washer moves. Also, as the elements fail (jacobian < 0.7) they are highlighted (figure 3).

434


Altair Engineering

Figure 3: Elements after morphing and quality check on Jacobian 2D

Step 5: Remesh the domain. 1.

From the menu bar select M o rphing > C re a te > D o m a ins and then select the update sub.

2.

Switch the update option to re m e s h 2D / 3D .

3.

Switch new mesh type: to qua ds .

4.

Select both 2-D domains on the model.

5.

Click ca lc a v g to get the average element size .

6.

Click re m e s h to remesh the domain.

Altair Engineering


435

Figure 4: Updated mesh and quality check

The mesh is updated.

Summary Using this technique, you can update the mesh in regions that might have undergone excessive elemental deformation during morphing. Since the domains and handles are maintained, it allows you to conduct further morphing if need be.

436


Altair Engineering

Analysis Setup HM-4000: Setting up Loading Conditions HM-4010: Formatting Model for Analysis HM-4020: Obtaining and Asg Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam HM-4030: Defining Composites HM-4040: Working with Loads on Geometry HM-4060: Working with Include Files HM-4070: OptiView

Altair Engineering


437

HM-4000: Setting up Loading Conditions In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create constraints (RADIOSS SPC) on the channel’s geometry lines Create a force (RADIOSS FORCE) on the bracket to simulate a pressing load on it Define a load step (RADIOSS SUBCASE) Export the model to a RADIOSS bulk data input file Submit the RADIOSS bulk data input file to RADIOSS Review the resulting HTML report file The purpose for using a finite element (FE) pre-processor is to create a model, which can be run by a solver. A finite element solver can solve for responses of parts to loading conditions on them. The loads can be in the form of boundary constraints, forces, pressures, temperatures, etc. In this exercise, you will gain an understanding of the basic concepts for creating a solver input file by using a template. More specifically, learn how to define loading conditions on a model, specify solver specific controls and submit an input file to a solver from HyperMesh.

Exercise: Setting up Loading Conditions

This exercise uses the model file, channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm. It contains the bracket and channel assembly in the following image.

438


Altair Engineering

Step 1: Retrieve and view the HyperMesh model file, channel_brkt_assem_loading.hm. Step 2: Load the RADIOSS (Bulk Data) profile. 1.

From the Preferences menu, click Us e r Pro file s .

2.

Select R AD IO SS.

3.

From the drop down, select B ulkD a ta .

4.

Click O K to close the dialog.

Step 3: Create two load collectors named pre ssing_lo a d and co nstra ints. 1.

From within the Model Browser right click and select C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto r.

2.

For Name: enter pressing_load.

3.

Set Card image: to no ne if it is not.

4.

Select your desired color by clicking on the active color.

5.

Click C re a te to create the load collector pressing_load.

6.

Repeat steps 1 – 5 and create another load collector called constraints.

Step 4: Apply constraints (RADIOSS SPC) to the channel’s line geometry. 1.

next to Vie w2 to use a Defined

In the View folder in the Model Browser click view.

Note:

Setting this view will set Component & Load Collectors displays back to what they were when the view was saved. The load collectors that we created in step 3 are now turned off because they did not exist when the view was saved. You will need to turn these back on to see the display of the BCs when you create them in the next steps.

2.

Use the Model Browser to display the geom ( pressing_load and constraints.

) for the load collectors

3.

Use the Model Browser to display the geom (

) for the component channel.

4.

Use the menu bar to enter the Constraints by selecting B C s > C re a te > C o ns tra ints .

5.

Go to the cre a te sub, if not already selected.

Altair Engineering


439

6.

Switch the entity selector to line s using the down arrow on the left side of the yellow entity button.

7.

Select the six lines on the perimeter of the channel’s bottom surface as shown in the following image.

8.

Activate degrees of freedom (dof) 1 through 6. For a RADIOSS linear static analysis, dof 1, 2, and 3 represent translations in the global x-, y-, and z-directions respectively. Dof 4, 5, and 6 represent rotations about the global x-, y- and z-axis, respectively.

9.

Set load types = to SPC .

10.

Click cre a te to create the constraints on the lines.

11.

For size = enter 5. The display size of the constraints is reduced.

12.

Activate the option, la be l co ns tra ints . A label is displayed for each constraint. The labels identify what dofs are assigned to the constraints.

13.


Step 5: Map the constraints (RADIOSS SPC) on the geometry lines to the channel nodes associated to the lines. 1.

Access the Loads on geom from the menu bar by selecting B C s > Lo a ds o n

440


Altair Engineering

G e o m e try . 2.

Select lo a dco ls > > co ns tra ints .

3.

Click s e le ct to complete the selection of load collectors.

4.

Click m a p lo a ds . A constraint is at each node associated to the geometry lines.

5.


6.

In the Model Browser, turn off the display of geometry for all component collectors.

Step 6: Prepare to create forces (RADIOSS FORCE) on the bracket for the pressing load case. next to Vie w3 to see a

1.

In the Views folder in the Model Browser click Defined view.

2.

In the Model Browser, right-click on the pre s s ing_lo a d load collector and select M a ke C urre nt. The pressing_load load collector is now the current load collector, and any loads created will be placed in this collector.

3.

Also within the Model Browser, that the display for the pressing_load is on. Right-click on pre s s ing_lo a d and select Sho w.

Step 7: Create two forces (RADIOSS FORCE) on the bracket for the pressing load case. 1.

Access the Forces through the menu bar by selecting B C s > C re a te > Fo rce s .

2.

Go to the create sub.

3.

With the nodes selector active, select the two nodes as indicated in the following image.

Altair Engineering


441

4.

For magnitude =, enter 5.

5.

Switch the direction selector from N1, N2, N3 to y - a xis .

6.

Set load types = to Fo rce .

7.

Click cre a te to create the forces.

8.

For magnitude % = specify 200.0. The display size of the force is increased.

9.

Activate the option label loads. Each force displays the label FORCE = 5.00e+00.

442


Altair Engineering

The two forces created for the pressing load case

10.


Step 8: Define the load step for the pressing load case. 1.

Access the LoadSteps through the menu bar by selecting Se tup > C re a te > Lo a dSte ps .

2.

For na m e = , enter pressing_step.

3.

Activate the SPC and LO AD options.

4.

Click the "=" next to SPC.

5.

In the lower right corner, switch name to na m e (id). This shows the names of the load collectors with their ID numbers in parenthesis.

6.

Select the co ns tra ints load collector. Note that the field next to the = now has a value of 2, which is the ID of the constraints load collector.

7.

Click the = next to LOAD and select the pre s s ing_lo a d load collector.

8.

Set the type: to line a r s ta tic.

9.

Click cre a te to create the load step, pre s s ing_s te p.

Altair Engineering


443

10.


Step 9: Display and mask the load step (the load collectors defined in the load step). 1.

Using the Model Browser, turn the display of the load step pressing_step off. Notice the load collectors constraints and pressing_load are no longer displayed.

2.

Turn the display of the load step pressing_step back on.

444


Altair Engineering

HM-4010: Formatting Model for Analysis In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create a solver input file by using a template Review entities in HyperMesh to see how they will appear in the solver input file Define materials and properties Select solver element types for HyperMesh element configurations The purpose for using a finite element (FE) pre-processor is to create a model that can be run by a solver. HyperMesh interfaces with many FE solvers and all of them have unique input file formats. HyperMesh has a unique template(s) for each solver it s. A template contains solver specific formatting instructions, which HyperMesh uses to create an input file for that solver.

Exercise: RADIOSS Linear Statics Setup for a Shell Assembly

This exercise uses the file, channel_brkt_assem_Analysis.hm. It contains the bracket and channel assembly in the following image.

Step 1: Retrieve and view the file, channel_brkt_assem_analysis.hm. Step 2: Load the RADIOSS (Bulk Data) profile.

Altair Engineering


445

1.

From the Preferences menu, click Us e r Pro file s

2.

Select R AD IO SS.

3.

From the drop-down menu, select B ulkD a ta .

4.

Click O K to close the dialog.

Step 3: Review a bracket element to identify what type of RADIOSS element it is and to see how it will be formatted in the RADIOSS input file. 1.

Access the Card Editor by going to the C o lle cto rs toolbar and selecting C a rd

E dit (

).

2.


3.

In the graphics area, select an element of the (blue) bracket.

4.

Click e dit. The card image for the element appears above the menu area. It indicates the element is a RADIOSS CQUAD4 or CTRIA3, depending on whether you selected a quad or tria element. EID is the element’s ID. PID is the ID of the element’s property. G(X) is the grid (node) ID that makes up the element. Options specific to the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 appear in the menu area.

5.

Click re turn to return to the Card Edit .

Step 4: Review and edit the existing steel material’s card image by accessing the card editor from the Model Browser. This material is defined for the channel. 1.

In the Model Browser, open the M a te ria l branch of the browser list to show the material steel.

2.

Right-click s te e l and select C a rd E dit. The card image for the material appears. It indicates the material is of RADIOSS Bulk Data type MAT1.

3.

Under Poisson’s Ratio [NU], change the value from 0.3 to 0.28.

4.

Click re turn to accept the change and return to the main menu.

Step 5: Define a material collector named aluminum for the bracket. This material is defined for the channel. 1.

Right-click in the white space of the Model Browser.

446


Altair Engineering

2.

Select C re a te > M a te ria l. The Create material popup dialog appears.

3.

For Name: enter aluminum.

4.

Set Card image : to M AT1.

5.

Make sure Card edit material upon creation is selected.

6.

Click C re a te to create the material and edit it. The card image for the new material appears.

7.

Click [E ] and enter 7.0e4 in the field that appears. This is Young’s Modulus.

8.

Click [NU] and enter 0.33 in the field that appears. This is Poisson's Ratio.

9.


Step 6: Define a property collector (PSHELL card image) that will be assigned to the channel component collector. 1.

Right-click in the white space of the Model Browser.

2.

Select C re a te > Pro pe ry . The Create property popup dialog appears.

3.

For Type: select 2D .

4.

For Name: enter channel.

5.

Set Card image : to PSH E LL.

6.

Select the M a te ria l tab at the top of the window.

7.

Activate the Assign material option.

8.

For Name: select s te e l.

9.

that Card edit property upon creation is activated and then select C re a te . This will open the card editor .

10.

Click [T] and enter 3.0 into the field that appears. This will assign a 3.0 unit thickness.

11.

Click re turn.

Altair Engineering


447

Step 7: Assign the cha nne l property to the channel component. 1.

Within the Model Browser, right-click on cha nne l and select As s ign.

2.

From the Property drop down menu, select cha nne l.

3.

Select O K to assign the property.

Step 8: Update the bracket property to have a PSHELL card image, a thickness of 2.0, and the aluminum material. 1.

Within the Model Browser, right-click on the property bra cke t and select E dit.

2.

In the Edit property window, within the Property tab, set the Type: to 2D .

3.

Set the Card image to PSH E LL.

4.

Select the Material tab and activate the As s ign m a te ria l option.

5.

Set Name: to a lum inum .

6.

Select Upda te .

7.

Within the Model Browser, right click on the property bra cke t and select C a rd E dit. Notice the material ID MID is 2, which is the ID of the aluminum material you created earlier and assigned to the bracket component.

8.

For the thickness [T] enter 2.0.

9.

Click re turn to return to the Properties .

10.

Click re turn .

Step 9: Calculate the section properties for the bar elements (RADIOSS CBEAM) by using HyperBeam. 1.

From the menu bar select Pro pe rtie s > H y pe rB e a m .

2.

Go to the s ta nda rd s e ctio n sub.

3.

Leave the standard section library set to HYPERBEAM and set the standard section type: to s o lid circle .

4.

Click cre a te to invoke the HyperBeam module. The HyperBeam module appears and the HyperMesh session is not visible. (HyperMesh is visible again upon exiting HyperBeam.) The solid, green circle represents the cross section. Under the local coordinate system you should see the number, 10.0000, which is the circle’s radius.

448


Altair Engineering

HyperBeam module with the standard solid circle section

5.

In the lower left side under Parameter Definition, click in the Va lue field next to Radius (r) and update the value to 3. In the section property display area, the values are automatically updated to reflect the circle’s new diameter.

6.

In the Model tree area, right click on the section’s name, circle _s e ctio n.1 and select R e na m e .

7.

Rename the section by entering 6mm_Beam_Sect.

8.

From the HyperBeam File pull-down menu, select E xit.

9.


Step 10: Create a property collector named ba rs_pro p for the bar elements (RADIOSS Bulk Data). 1.

Create a new property collector by right-clicking in the Model Browser and selecting C re a te > Pro pe rty .

2.

Enter the name bars_prop.

3.

Set the Card Image: to PB E AM .

4.

Click on the Material tab and select Assign material.

5.

For Name: select s te e l.

6.

Activate the option Card edit property upon creation.

7.

Click C re a te to create the property and edit it.

Altair Engineering


449

8.

At the top of the card image, select be a m s e c > > 6m m _B e a m _Se ct. The parameter fields in the PBEAM card are automatically populated by the data in the beam section 6mm_Beam_Sect.

9.


Step 11: Update the CBEAM elements in the bolts component to use the PBEAM Property. 1.

Within the Model Browser, right click on the component bo lts and select As s ign.

2.

Select ba rs _pro p for the Property.

3.

Click O K.

Step 12: Define a H3D file to be output from RADIOSS by using the co ntro l ca rds . 1.

Access the Control Cards from the menu bar by selecting Se tup > C re a te > C o ntro l C a rds

2.

Select the control card FO R M AT. You may need to click ne xt to get to the second page of cards. Notice in the card image the one FORMAT line is set to H3D. This specifies RADIOSS to output results to a Hyper3D (H3D) file, which can be viewed in HyperView Player. Also, an HTML report file will be output and the H3D file will be embedded in it.

3.

For number_of_formats =, specify 2. A second FORMAT line appears in the card image.

4.

Click H 3D in the second line of the card image and select H M . This specifies RADIOSS to output the results to a HyperMesh binary results file, allowing the results to be post-processed within HyperMesh.

5.

Click re turn to exit to the Control Cards . Notice the FORMAT button is green. This indicates the card will be exported to the RADIOSS input file.

6.


Step 13: Export the model to an RADIOSS Bulk Data input file. 1.

From the menu bar select File > E xpo rt > So lv e r D e ck.

2.

In the File: field, type channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

450


Altair Engineering

Note that the extension for an RADIOSS Bulk Data input file is .fem. 3.

Click E xpo rt to export the model as an RADIOSS .fem input file. This exports the model as an input file for the solver specified by the current profile.

Step 14: Review the contents of the file channel_brkt_assem_loading. fem. 1.

Using any text editor (Notepad, Wordpad, Vi, etc.), open the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

2.

Near the top of the file, notice as shown in the following image: The line FORMAT HM which you specified in HyperMesh The load step (RADIOSS Bulk Data SUBCASE) named pressing_step which you defined in HyperMesh Under the load step, the load collector ids (RADIOSS load and constraint set identification numbers)

3.

Search for "FORCE." Notice the load set identification number for each force (RADIOSS FORCE). It is either 1 or 2 as shown in the following image. These numbers correspond to the numbers under the load steps in the file.

4.

Search for "SPC" (HyperMesh constraint). Notice the constraint set identification number for each constraint (RADIOSS SPC). It is 2 as shown in the following image, which lists a few of the constraints. This number corresponds to the number under the load steps in the file.

Altair Engineering


451

5.

Search for the load collector name "pressing_load." Notice the load collectors, pressing_load and constraints. Also, notice their collector ID and color ID. When the model is imported into HyperMesh, the loads are organized into these load collectors and have these IDs and colors.

6.

Close the file channel_brkt_assem_loading.fem.

Step 15 (Optional): Save your work. With the exercise completed, you can save the model as a HyperMesh file, if desired.

452


Altair Engineering

HM-4020: Obtaining and Asg Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam In this tutorial you will learn how to: Obtain beam section properties for various types of beam cross-sections using HyperBeam, a module within HyperMesh Populate the fields of property collectors with these beam properties Assign the property collector to a beam element you create In FEA, beams are typically modeled as 1-D elements. This tutorial is particularly useful for becoming familiar with the modeling of beam sections for 1-D elements (beam, bar, and rod) in HyperMesh. The focus is on obtaining and asg beam-section properties, not on creating beam elements themselves.

Exercise: Obtaining and Asg Beam Cross-Section Properties using HyperBeam

This exercise uses the model file, hyperbeam.hm.

Model geometry

The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections used in this tutorial: standard, shell, and solid. The model consists of a solid cylinder attached to a hollow trapezoidal structure, which is further ed to an irregularly shaped solid component (see

Altair Engineering


453

previous image).


Open the file hyperbeam.hm from \tutorials\hm.

2.

From the menu bar select Pre fe re nce s > Us e r Pro file s and select O ptiStruct.

3.

Click O K.

The model geometry represents different types of cross-sections: standard, shell, and solid. You will create a standard circular section to represent the cross-section of the cylinder, a shell section created with lines to represent the cross-section of the hollow trapezoidal feature, and a solid section created with lines to represent the cross-section of the solid irregular feature. The model is organized into four collectors: one contains all the surfaces, two contain the lines for the shell-section and the solid-section, respectively, and the last component stores beam elements.

Step 2: Model a standard circular section using HyperBeam. In this step, use the standard section sub of the HyperBeam to quickly model a solid circular section. To define a circular cross-section, HyperBeam requires the diameter of the cross-section as input. Measure the diameter of the section before invoking HyperBeam using the Distance from the Geom page. 1.

Create three nodes on the circle defining the base of the solid cylinder using the nodes from the Geom page by doing the following: -

From the menu bar select G e o m e try > C re a te > No de s > E xtra ct o n Line .

-

With the lines selector active, select the circular line defining the base of the cylinder.

-

Set number of nodes = to 3.

-

Click cre a te . This generates three nodes on the line, two of which are located at the same location (since the circular line is a line that closes upon itself). With the two independent locations left, you can measure the diameter.

454


Altair Engineering

Nodes on circle to measure diameter

2.

Use the Distance to measure the distance between the two nodes diametrically opposed by doing the following: -

From the menu bar select G e o m e try > C he ck > No de s > D is ta nce .

-

Select the two nodes sub.

-

For N1 and N2, pick the two nodes that are diametrically opposed. The distance between the two nodes, which is the diameter of the circle, is displayed in the distance = field and reads 110 units.

3.

Create a solid circle standard section in the HyperBeam by doing the following: -

From the menu bar, select Pro pe rtie s > H y pe rB e a m .

-

Select the standard section sub.

-

Set the standard section library to H Y PE R B E AM and set the standard section type to s o lid circle option from the pop-up menu.

-

Click cre a te . The HyperBeam window launches with a solid circle cross-section displayed in the center pane. The left pane (HyperBeam view) lists the cross-sections defined in the model and the right pane (Results window) displays the results for the various beam properties computed for the dimensions displayed.

Altair Engineering


455

HyperBeam window (standard section)

Note: For detailed information on HyperBeam, see the Hy pe rBe a m section in the Hy pe rM e sh Use r's Guide > M ode l Se t up > Prope rt ie s online help. 4.

Modify the diameter of the cross-section and assign the value measured earlier by doing the following: -

Click the Value field shown for Radius (r) in the Parameter Definition area.

-

Type 110 and press ENTER. The value of the diameter and the quantities computed for the cross-section are updated and displayed in the Results window. These properties are calculated based on the dimensions that were input. The formulae for calculating these properties can be found in the Cross-se c t iona l Prope rt ie s a s Ca lc ula t e d by Hy pe rBe a m section in the HyperMesh Hy pe rM e sh Use r's Guide > M ode l Se t up > Prope rt ie s > Hy pe rBe a m online help. HyperBeam calculates, for example, the area of this cross-section, its moments of inertia and its torsional constant.

Note:

Alternatively, you could drag the graphical handles that represent the diameter of the cross-section until the diameter changes to the desired value.

5.

Assign the name “Solid Circle” to this cross-section in the HyperBeam view by doing

456


Altair Engineering

the following:

6.

-

In the HyperBeam view, right click the name of the cross-section under the auto1 folder and select R e na m e .

-

Type Solid Circle and press ENTER. Use the File menu to Exit HyperBeam and return to HyperMesh. The information that was computed is automatically stored in a beamsect collector with the name you specified for the section. This beamsect collector is later used to populate the fields of a property card.

Note:

Since geometry information was available, this cross-section could have been defined as a solid section using the solid section sub. A standard section was used instead because it did not require selection, although it required a diameter measurement.

You may save your HyperMesh model to your working directory at this point. In this step, a beam cross-section for standard sections was created using HyperBeam. You also learned how to specify the dimensions for the standard section, and how to save this section for subsequent use.

Step 3: Model a shell section. In this step, the shell section sub of the HyperBeam is used to model a beam section for the trapezoidal feature of the geometry. Use the lines in the pre-defined component shell_section to define the section. Note that these lines are located at the mid-plane of the trapezoidal geometry. In addition to these lines, HyperBeam also requires the thickness of the feature as input to calculate the shell section properties.

Shell section lines

You can use various s, such as the Distance , to find the thickness of this feature. The thickness of the feature is equal to 2 units. 1.

Create a shell section using the lines in the shell_section component by doing the following:

Altair Engineering


457

-

From the menu bar, select Pro pe rtie s > H y pe rB e a m .

-

Select the shell section sub.

-

Set the entity selector to line s .

-

Click line s and select by co lle cto r.

-

Select the s he ll_s e ctio n collector from the list and click s e le ct.

-

Set cro s s s e ctio n pla ne : to fit to e ntitie s .

-

Set s e ctio n ba s e d no de to s pe cify no de to make this option active.

-

In the graphics area, hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse on top of one of the mid-plane lines, as shown in the image above.

-

Click s pe cify no de > > ba s e .

-

Click anywhere on the highlighted line to define the base node.

-

Click re turn.

-

Set part generation: to a uto .

-

Click cre a te to bring up the HyperBeam window. Note: The cross section plane: option allows the software to define the plane for calculating beam cross-sectional properties based on the entity (lines/element) selection. A -controlled plane can also be defined by changing the cross-section plane using the toggle. When using the fit to entities: option you can select a reference node for the plane if you want properties about a point other than the section centroid. This is done using the plane base node: option. This node defines the origin of the coordinate system that serves as the reference when computing the various beam cross-section properties. All the properties are calculated both about the centroid and about the node you select.

458


Altair Engineering

Shell section

The coordinates of the centroid are calculated with respect to the -defined coordinate system appearing at the node location specified earlier. The coordinates of the shear center are calculated both from the centroid and from the origin of the section. Local Ys and Zs are the coordinates of the shear center with respect to the origin of the section, while principal Vs and Ws are the coordinates of the shear center from the centroid of the section. 2.

Modify the thickness of the cross-section and assign the value of 2 units by doing the following: -

Right click in the Model Browser on shell_section.1 and select E dit. This opens the following window:

Altair Engineering


459

-

In the Part thickness field, type 2 and press ENTER. The values for the beam properties computed in the Results window are updated.

-

Click Upda te and then E xit to close the window.

3.

Rename the section, “Trapezoidal Section.”

4.

Exit from HyperBeam using the File menu.

In this step, a beam cross-section representing a shell section was created using HyperBeam, and the thickness for the shell section was assigned. Note that the shell section is defined with only one thickness as it is defined as one part. For shell sections comprised of multiple parts, each part is assigned an independent thickness. You may save your model to your working directory.

Step 4: Create a solid section using surfaces. In this step, model the irregular solid feature of the geometry as a solid section using the solid section sub of the HyperBeam . The input for a solid section can be 2-D elements, surfaces, or a set of lines that form a closed area. Use the surfaces in the solid_section collector to define the solid section. 1.

Create a solid section using the surfaces in the solid_section component by doing the

460


Altair Engineering

following: -

Within the HyperBeam , select the solid section sub.

-

Set the entity selector to s urfs .

-

Pick the highlighted surface in the following image.

-

For the section base node option, select s pe cify no de .

-

Click on specify node and then select a node within the area formed by the surfaces by holding the left mouse button down until a line or the surface highlights, then clicking anywhere on the highlighted entity.

Defining the solid section

-

Set analysis type: to firs t o rde r. This option tells HyperBeam to use first order (linear) elements to calculate the properties of the section.

-

Click cre a te to launch HyperBeam. HyperBeam meshes the area enclosed by the selected curves with quadrilateral elements, and the properties are calculated using these elements.

Altair Engineering


461

Solid section

3.

Rename the section "Solid Section" and save your data.

4.

Exit HyperBeam and save your data.

Step 5: Assign beam properties to a property collector and a beam element. In HyperMesh, you can easily assign the beam properties computed in HyperBeam and stored in a beamsect collector to your solver beam property card. To achieve this, simply create a property collector with the solver beam property card of interest, and assign the beamsect collector to the property collector. When creating an actual beam element, simply assign the property collector to the element itself. 1.

Create a property collector with a PBEAM card and assign the Solid Circle beamsect collector to it by doing the following:

-

Create a property collector using the Model Browser by right-clicking and selecting C re a te > Pro pe rty . Set the Name to standard_section, Card Image set to PB E AM , and assign the Material as s te e l.

-

In the card previewer, click be a m s e c twice and select So lid C ircle from the list of beamsect collectors defined in the model. The properties calculated using HyperBeam are automatically assigned to the PBEAM card. Observe that the values of the parameters (A, I1a, I2a, I12a, J, etc.) are extracted from the properties of the selected section.

462


Altair Engineering

2.

Create a beam element in the Bars with a direction vector set to the global xaxis and using the standard_section property by doing the following: -

From the menu bar, select M e s h > C re a te > 1D E le m e nts > B a rs

-

Click pro pe rty = and select s ta nda rd_s e ctio n.

-

Click the lower-left switch and select v e cto rs as the option to define the orientation of the beam.

-

Set the direction to x- a xis .

-

Click no de A to make it active.

-

In the graphics area, hold the left mouse button down and place the cursor on top of the line that runs though the cylinder until it is highlighted.

-

Release the left mouse button and select two nodes at the ends of the line for node A and node B.

C reating a beam element

The beam element is created and placed into the beam component. Note:

When creating beam elements, the z-axis is defined by the two nodes selected as node A and node B. The direction of the cross-section (x- or yaxis) is defined either by using components, vectors, or a direction node. Due to the nature of this solid circle, how you define the x- or y-axis is unimportant.

Changes made to a beamsect collector (for example, through editing of a crosssection) are also automatically applied to any property collector referencing this beamsect collector.

Step 6 (Optional): Save your work. Summary In this tutorial, you experimented with the tools and techniques for modeling beam crosssection and obtaining their properties using HyperBeam. You learned how to edit cross-

Altair Engineering


463

sections and assign their properties to property collectors, which can then be assigned to 1-D elements. For more details on how to create 1-D elements, review the tutorial, Creating 1-D Elements. Additional techniques for creating 1-D elements from connector entities are discussed in the tutorial, Creating Connectors.

464


Altair Engineering

HM-4030: Defining Composites In this tutorial, you will learn how to assign element material orientation using the following: System ID Vector Angle

Step 1: Retrieve the model file, composites.hm. 1.

Retrieve the file, composites.hm.

2.

From the Preferences menu, select Us e r Pro file s .

3.

In the pop-up window, select the R AD IO SS radio button.

4.

From the drop-down list box, select B ulkD a ta .

5.

Click O K.

6.

On the Vis ua liz a tio n toolbar, click Sha de d E le m e nt a nd M e s h Line s (

).

Step 2: Update all the elements to the correct element types for RADIOSS (Bulk Data). 1.

From the menu bar, select M e s h > As s ign > E le m e nt Ty pe .

2.

Click the e le m s selector and select a ll. All element types (1-D, 2-D, and 3-D) are selected.

3.

Click upda te to update the element types.

4.


Step 3: Assign element material coordinate direction using system ID. 1.

Go to the Composites on the 2D page.

2.

Go to the material orientation sub.

3.


4.

Under Material orientation method, toggle to by s y s te m ID .

5.

Select s y s te m and select the rectangular system on top of ball (system ID = 1).

6.

Click color and choose the display color of the review vectors or lines.

7.

Set size = 2.0.

Altair Engineering


465

This value specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are when displayed. 8.

Click a s s ign.

9.

On the Collectors toolbar, click C a rd E dit (

10.


11.

Select any element in the model.

12.

Click e dit.

13.

Review the card.

).

This function assigns the ID of the coordinate system to the selected elements. This can be verified by reviewing the MCID field of the CQUAD4 card populated with System ID 1 for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) profile. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh also projects the x-axis of the selected coordinate system onto the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate system. If you later modify the system, the element material coordinate directions change implicitly. 14.

Click re turn to exit the Card Previewer.

15.

Click re turn to exit the Card Edit and return to the Composites .

Step 4: Assign element material coordinate direction using a system axis. 1.

If not already there, go to the Composites , material orientation sub.

2.


3.

Under Material orientation method, toggle to by s y s te m a xis :

4.

Select s y s te m and select the rectangular system on top of ball (system ID = 1) .

5.

Set the switch under system to lo ca l 2- a xis .

6.

Set size = 2.0. This value specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are when displayed.

7.

Click co lo r and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.

8.

Click pro je ct.

9.

On the collectors toolbar, click C a rd E dit (

10.


11.


466


).


Altair Engineering

12.

Click e dit.

13.

Review the card. This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which for RADIOSS (Bulk Data) is defined as the angle between the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) and the projection of the selected local axis onto the surface of the shell element. This can be verified by reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated with an angle (in degrees) for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) profile. Each element in this case will have a unique THETA value as defined by the projection. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh also projects the local axis of the selected coordinate system onto the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate system.

14.


15.


Step 5: Assign element material coordinate direction using a vector. 1.


2.


3.

Under Material orientation method, toggle to by v e cto r.

4.

Set the switch to v e cto r.

5.

Select the radial r vector from the spherical coordinate system on the bottom of the ball; the r-axis will flash once when you click on it.

6.

Click B and select the origin of the local spherical system as the base.

7.


8.

Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.

9.

Click pro je ct.

10.

On the Collectors toolbar, click Card Edit (

11.


12.


13.

Click e dit.

14.

Review the card.

).

This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which for RADIOSS (Bulk

Altair Engineering


467

Data) is defined as the angle between the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) and the projection of the selected vector onto the surface of the shell element. This can be verified by reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated with an angle (in degrees) for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) profile. Each element in this case will have a unique THETA value as defined by the projection. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh also projects the selected vector onto the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate system. 15.


16.


Step 6: Assign element material coordinate direction using an angle. 1.


2.


3.

Under Material orientation method, toggle to by a ngle .

4.

Enter angle = 45.00.

5.


6.

Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.

7.

Click s e t.

8.


9.


10.


11.

Click e dit.

12.

Review the card.

).

This function assigns a material angle of 45 degrees to the selected elements, which for RADIOSS (Bulk Data) is defined as the angle 45 degrees from the vector direction connecting node1 and node2 of the shell element (that is, the element coordinate system x-axis) using right hand rule. In order to use right hand rule, the normal direction of the element must be known and can be determined from the Tools page, Normals . This can be verified by reviewing the THETA field of the CQUAD4 card populated with a 45-degree angle for the currently loaded RADIOSS (Bulk Data) profile. Each element in this case will have a THETA of 45 degrees. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the CQUAD4 and PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. For visualization purposes HyperMesh defines a vector using RADIOSS (Bulk

468


Altair Engineering

Data) convention on the face of the shell elements to define the x-axis of the material coordinate system. This option should be used only in situations where great care has been taken to assure that the node1-node2 direction of the shell elements are initially aligned properly. 13.


14.


Step 7: Review ply directions. 1.

Go to ply directions sub within the Composites . Make sure zone based model is selected.

2.

Select e le m s > > by co lle cto r.

3.

Select the yellow_sample collector.

4.

Click s e le ct.

5.

Set ply = 1. This defines the ply number to review. The yellow_sample collector has a PCOMP card image assigned to it with the following laminate definition (45/60/90)s. The PCOMP definition assigned to the y e llo w_s a m ple collector can be reviewed through the card editor, as follows:

6.


7.

Set the entity selector to pro ps .

8.

Click pro ps .

9.

Select y e llo w_s a m ple .

10.

Click s e le ct.

11.

Click e dit.

12.

Review the card.

).

The first ply defined on the PCOMP card is the most negative z-axis ply as determined from the element normal. All ply angles on the PCOMP card are relative to the material coordinate direction set in the above exercises using right hand rule. In order to use right hand rule, the normal direction of the element must also be known and can be determined from the Tools page, Normals . For RADIOSS (Bulk Data), refer to the PCOMP(G) bulk data cards in the Bulk Data Section of the RADIOSS Reference Manual. 13.


14.


15.

Set s iz e = 2.0.

Altair Engineering


469

This value specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are when displayed. 16.

Click co lo r and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.

17.

Click re v ie w.

18.

Additional ply angles can be reviewed by reselecting elements, entering a ply ID, and clicking re v ie w. Elements that do not have ply angles assigned will not be displayed. Ply directions are set through card images in solver template; an example is PCOMP card for RADIOSS (Bulk Data).

470


Altair Engineering

HM-4040: Working with Loads on Geometry In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Create loads and boundary conditions on geometry Map the loads from geometry to elements Export to a solver deck Modify the mesh and remap the loads to the new mesh

Exercise: Working with Loads on Geometry This exercise uses the model file, c-channel0.hm.

C -channel model in shaded mode

Step 1: Retrieve the model file, c-channel0.hm. In this tutorial, you will experiment with the export of the loads applied to geometry entities. Therefore, you will need to have a template loaded. In this section, retrieve the c-channel model and load the OptiStruct profile. By loading this profile, the template will be automatically loaded. You will also apply some constraints, forces and pressure load to your model, and you will need load collectors to organize them. 1.

Open the model file c-channel0.hm. The model geometry is of a C-channel with two reinforcement ribs. The various surfaces are organized into several component collectors.

2.


3.

Select O ptiStruct.

4.

Click O K.

Altair Engineering


471

Step 2: Create three load collectors for constraints, forces, and pressure loads. 1.

In the Model Browser, right-click in the white space of the browser list and click C re a te > Lo a dC o lle cto r.

2.

In the Name: field, type constraints.

3.

Select a color.

4.

For Card image: select no ne .

5.

Click C re a te .

6.

Similarly, create two more load collectors with names pressure and forces, assign colors to them, and select no card images. Different boundary conditions can now be created.

Defining loads and boundary conditions on geometry. You can apply loads to geometric entities in a way similar to the manner in which loads are applied to mesh by using the following s from the Analysis page: Forces, Moments, Constraints, Pressures, and Temperatures. In this step, you will apply constraints, pressure, and forces to geometric entities in the model. Constrain the bottom portion of the c-channel using line data. Then create pressure loads on the top surfaces. Finally, add forces at the eight corners of the surfaces defining the top of the c-channel (see following image).

472


Altair Engineering

C onstraints on lines, pressures on surfaces and forces on fixed points

Step 3: Fully constrain the bottom eight lines of the c-channel using the Constraints . 1.

In the Model Browser right-click the co ns tra ints load collector and pick M a ke C urre nt .

2.

From the menu bar select B C s > C re a te > C o ns tra ints to open the Constraints .

3.

Select the cre a te sub.

4.

Set the entity selector to line s .

5.

Select the eight lines defining the bottom portion of the c-channel.

Lines to constrain

6.

For size=, enter the value 1. This is the size of the icons that will be used to represent the constraints in the graphics area.

7.

Clear the label constraints check box.

8.

Constrain dof1, dof2, dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6 by checking their respective boxes. Dofs with a check will be constrained, while dofs without a check will be free. Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom. Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom.

9.

For load types =, select SPC .

10.

Click cre a te . This applies these constraints to the selected lines. They display as a triangular icon.

Altair Engineering


473

Checking the box for label constraints displays what degrees of freedom are constrained. 11. Click re turn to exit the .

Step 4: Apply a pressure of 25 units normal to the top three surfaces using the Pressures . 1.

Set pressure as your current load collector by right-clicking it in the Model Browser and selecting M a ke C urre nt.

2.

From the menu bar select B C s > C re a te > Pre s s ure s to open the Pressures .

3.


4.

Set the entity selector to surfs and pick the three surfaces defining the top of the cchannel.

Surfaces to apply pressure to

5.

For magnitude = enter the value –25 for the pressure. Specifying a negative magnitude ensures that the pressure load is pushing down on the surfaces. By default the pressure load is created normal to the surfaces.

6.

Toggle the display of the pressures from magnitude % = to uniform size =. An arrow is used for the graphical display of pressure loads. The size of the arrow can be input as a value or as a percentage of the actual pressure load applied. In this exercise, you will specify its length as a certain number.

7.

For uniform size = enter the value 1. This is the size the arrows will have in the graphics area.

8.

Clear the label loads check box.

474


Altair Engineering

In this exercise, you will not display the actual value of the pressure load in the graphics area. 9.

For load types =, select PLO AD .

10.

Click cre a te . This applies the pressure loads to the selected surfaces. They are represented with an arrow as well as a label. This label can be template based (PLOAD4 here) or follow the HyperMesh terminology (P) as specified in the modeling sub of the Options .

11. Click re turn to exit the .

Step 5: Create forces at the eight corners of the three top surfaces. 1.

In the Model Browser, set the current load collector to forces.

2.

From the menu bar select B C s > C re a te > Fo rce s to open the Forces .

3.


4.

Set the entity selector to po ints and select the eight fixed points defining the corners of the c-channel’s top surfaces.

Fixed points to apply forces to

5.

Set the coordinate system toggle to glo ba l s y s te m .

6.

Click the vector definition switch and select unifo rm s iz e = .

7.

For uniform size = enter the value 1.

8.

Clear the la be l lo a ds check box.

Altair Engineering


475

9.

For magnitude = enter the value –15. The minus sign is used to specify a direction opposite to the one you will select in the next step.

10.

Click the direction definition switch below magnitude =, and select z - a xis .

11.

For load types =, select FO R C E .

12.

Click cre a te . This creates a number of point forces, with the given magnitude in the z-direction, to be applied to the fixed points selected.

13. Click re turn to exit the .

Loads on geometry

Note:

If you sent some loads into the wrong load collector, use the Organize on loads to move them into the right collector.

In this section you created various types of loads on various geometric entities: lines, surfaces and fixed point. The ultimate goal is to have these loading conditions applied to finite elements. You will now create these elements.

Step 6: Generate elements on the surfaces. Use the Automesh to create a quad dominant (mixed) mesh. The elements generated will be organized into their surfaces’ component collectors to avoid the need of setting

476


Altair Engineering

current component collectors. 1.

Press F12 to go to the Automesh .

2.

Set the entity selector to s urfs .

3.

Click s urfs and select dis pla y e d.

4.

For element size =, enter the value 0.25.

5.

Set the mesh type to m ixe d.

6.

Click the toggle to switch from e le m s to curre nt co m p to e le m s to s urf co m p. This ensures that the elements created go into the surface’s component collector.

7.

Set the meshing mode to a uto m a tic. In this mode HyperMesh will automatically generate a mesh on the surfaces based on the element size and the type of elements selected. No further input is required or can be supplied.

8.

Click m e s h.

9.


10.


).

Meshed c-channel

In this step, you quickly created a shell mesh on the surfaces. You can now try to map the loads that were applied to geometric entities onto these finite elements.

Altair Engineering


477

Step 7: Map the loads from geometry to elements. A load collector, just like component collectors, can store both loads on geometry and loads on finite elements. These two types of loads are separate and independent, and can therefore be manipulated independently. At this time, your load collectors contain loads only in their geom side. By mapping these loads on geometry onto finite elements and using your existing loadcols, you will also populate their elems side. In this step, use the Load on Geom to map the loads from the geometric entities (to which the geometric loads are applied) to the mesh associated with these geometric entities for the constraints and pressure load collectors. 1.

From the menu bar select B C s > Lo a ds o n G e o m e try .

2.

Click lo a dco ls and check the box next to co ns tra ints from the list of load collectors.

3.

Click s e le ct.

4.

Click m a p lo a ds . The constraints previously applied to the lines are now also applied to the nodes of the mesh associated to these lines. These constraints are placed in the same load collector as the ones applied to the geometry, only in the elems portion.

C onstraints mapped to the elements

5.

Repeat 7.1 - 7.4 to map the pressure loadcol to the mesh.

478


Altair Engineering

The pressure loads previously applied to the surfaces are now mapped to the nodes associated with these surfaces. These pressure loads are placed in the same load collector as the ones applied to the geometry.

Step 8: Export the model to a solver deck. When exporting the model using an export template, only the loads on mesh are exported. These loads on mesh may have been applied directly to the mesh, mapped from geometry to the mesh, or both. The Export tab allows you to export loads to an ASCII solver-specific file (according to the loaded export template). The loads are exported as mesh loads. The Custom template allows you to determine which loads are exported. If all is selected, all the loads on geometry that have not been mapped (if any), are mapped to loads on mesh and all the loads on mesh are exported. If displayed is selected, all the displayed loads on mesh (if any) are exported. All the loads on mesh associated with the displayed loads on geometry (if any) are exported as well. If any loads on geometry are displayed and have not been mapped, they will automatically be mapped to loads on mesh and exported as well. In this step, use the Model Browser to ensure that only the already mapped loading conditions are exported. One load collector stores both loads on geometry and loads on mesh. The mesh (or multiple meshes) is associated with the geometrical entities to which the loads on geometry have been applied. Each load type is stored in a dedicated section of the same load collector. The Display allows separate or simultaneous visualization of loads on mesh and loads on geometry. Turn off the display of loads applied to the geometric entities to display only the loads applied to the mesh. 1.

Use the Model Browser to turn off the display of the loads applied to geometric entities. a.

Left-click the geometry display buttons in your Model Browser so your component display changes from this:

to this:

Altair Engineering


479

. 2.

From the menu bar select File > E xpo rt > So lv e r D e ck.

3.

Click the arrows (

4.

Set Export: to D is pla y e d, and export the model to your working directory as an OptiStruct deck.

) next to Export options to expand the dialog.

Since loads applied to geometry were turned off in the Model Browser previously, only the loads mapped previously will be exported. You may open the exported deck in any text editor to that no RADIOSS FORCE card has been exported in the deck. 5.

Specify a file name.

6.

Click E xpo rt to export the file.

In this section you experimented with the behavior of the Export when it comes to loads applied to geometry and elements. You learned that with different combinations of the all/displayed option and loads displayed in the Model Browser, you can control what information gets exported.

Step 9: Modify the mesh and remap the loads to the new mesh. Besides the convenience they offer, loads applied to geometry give you the flexibility of reapplying them as many times as you want to different meshes. This feature is particularly useful when remeshing a model without deleting complicated loads or boundary conditions. After remeshing, loads or boundary conditions that have been applied to geometrical entities can be easily remapped to the new mesh, while loads applied to elements are automatically deleted when the elements themselves are deleted. In this step, remesh the surfaces and remap the loads on geometry to the new mesh. 1.


2.

Click s urfs and select dis pla y e d.

3.

For element size =, enter the value 0.5.

4.

Leave all other options used earlier unchanged.

5.

Click m e s h. The automesher deletes the existing elements before creating a completely new set based on the new element size. As you exit the Automesh , the loads that were applied to the initial mesh are removed since the elements are no longer there.

480


Altair Engineering

New mesh

Step 10: Map all the loads on geometry to the new mesh using the Load on Geom . 1.

From the menu bar select B C s > Lo a ds o n G e o m e try .

2.

Click lo a dco ls and check the boxes next to co ns tra ints , pre s s ure , and fo rce s .

3.

Click s e le ct.

4.

Click m a p lo a ds . The loading conditions initially defined for the geometric entities are now applied to the new mesh. The various loading conditions are placed into the same load collector as the corresponding ones applied to the geometry. Note that you did not have to display these loads to map them. Note: Deleting geometric entities to which loads are applied will also result in the deletion of these loads. It will not affect any loads applied to the mesh, though.

In this step, you experimented with the remapping of loads applied to geometry onto a new mesh. Loads applied on geometric entities can be mapped several times onto the different finite element entities attached to these geometric entities. You took advantage of this in a situation where a mesh had to be changed, and it saved you from having to recreate loads on the elements.

Step 11 (Optional): Save your work. With all of the exercise complete, you can save the model if desired.

Altair Engineering


481

Summary In this tutorial, you used several boundary condition creation s to generate constraints and various loading conditions on geometric entities. You then experimented with the mapping of these loads on geometry onto finite elements. You also familiarized yourself with the rules that govern the export of loads on geometric entities. No consideration to the creation of specific card images that need to accompany the various loading conditions was given. For more information on how to generate the various loading conditions for different solvers, refer to the Modeling / Solver Specific section of the HyperMesh tutorials.

482


Altair Engineering

HM-4060: Working with Include Files In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Import include files Review and manipulate includes Create includes and reorganize the database Locate entities in includes Import new data into includes Export options While HyperMesh s include formulations for several other solvers, LS-DYNA 970 input decks will be used for the purpose of this tutorial. Many FEA solvers allow you to organize your input deck into separate files and provide a mechanism to read all files linked to a single input deck. This capability is commonly known as "includes." HyperMesh provides several options for importing such models, one of which preserves the include structure upon import. The Include view in the Model Browser is available to manipulate these includes. The Include view lets you create, review, edit, organize, and update the contents of any HyperMesh model into various include files. Every entity in HyperMesh then belongs to either the master model or one of its include files.

Step 1: Load the LS-DYNA profile and import the model. Import Solver Deck (

) has the following options for importing include files:

Merge: with this option, all the data in the individual includes are merged into the master model and imported in HyperMesh as a single model. HyperMesh has no knowledge regarding individual include files with this option. Skip: with this option, the INCLUDE statements are simply read as control cards and none of the contents of the include files are processed. The data within the include files is therefore ignored. Preserve: when you select this option, the INCLUDE statements are preserved and the contents of the include files are processed. In addition, the contents of the include files are "marked" to which include file they belong to. When the deck is exported from HyperMesh, if desired, all of the entities that are marked as belonging to include files get written back to that include file. The entire file structure (the master file and all its include files) are rewritten from the HyperMesh database. In this section, load the LS-DYNA profile, then import the LS-DYNA decks (master file and include files) defining the model. Preserve the organization of the data into the various include files. 1.


2.

Select Ls D y na .

3.

Click O K.

Altair Engineering


483

Selecting a solver profile sets the FE input reader to this solver and loads the solver’s FE output template. It also loads a macro menu with numerous tools specific to this interface. The graphical interface is tailored to this solver with names and options renamed or removed to match its terminology as much as possible. 4.

Click Im po rt So lv e r D e ck (

5.

Under Import options, from the Include Files: menu, select Pre s e rv e and import the following file: \tutorials\hm\master.k.

6.

Click Im po rt.

).

This loads the master.k deck into HyperMesh as well as the include files, wheels.key, frame.key and engine.key, which are also present in the same directory.

Truck model

In this section, the truck model defined with a master deck and several include files was imported into HyperMesh while preserving the organization of the data between the various files.

Step 2: Review the model organization using the Include view in the Model Browser. The Include view, , is located in the Model Browser It allows you to create, review, edit, organize, and update the contents of a model into various include files. A context sensitive pop-up menu provides many other Include view functionalities. For a complete description of the options available, refer to the Model Browser's include view in the online help. In this section, launch the Include view, review the structure of the model and its organization into the various includes, and experiment with some of the display and configuration options available. 1.

From the Model Browser, select the Include Vie w

484


.


Altair Engineering

This is a tree-like organization of the database structure. The Master Model is at the top level of the include browser. Data, which does not have any references to an include file, is stored in the master model. Each include file is represented with an icon ( ) along with its name (file name). Each include can be expanded to reveal its contents. The contents of each include is organized (grouped) into folders containing each type, next to which appears the total number of entities of that type. Each of the folders can be expanded to review the individual entities in that folder. The browser can be configured to show only specific entities of interest. 2.

Expand the engine.key include to review its content. This include contains three folders: Component, Material, and Property.

3.

Expand the Component directory from the engine include. This folder contains six component collectors as indicated next to its name.

C omponents content of the engine.key include

4.

Similarly, review the content of the other includes as well as the content of the folders belonging to the Master Model. The wheels.key include contains, for example, components, control volumes, groups, materials, properties, and sets. Note: While most entities are presented in this tree, elements and nodes are not listed, as this would not be practical for larger models.

5.

Right-click white space in the browser and select C o lla ps e All from the context menu to collapse all the trees that you expanded.

6.

Right-click M a s te r M o de l and experiment with the display options Sho w, H ide , and Is o la te .

Altair Engineering


485

7.

Use the Isolate option on each one of the includes to visually review the components they contain.

Displaying only the frame.key include

8.

Use the display options in the Include view to turn on the display of the entire model.

In this section, the Include view was launched and the organization of the model into the various includes was reviewed. The Include view was customized and some of the display options were used to modify the display of the model in the graphics region.

Step 3: Review the various options available in the Include view. The columns within the Include view can be configured so that only the columns the is interested are shown. This step shows you how to configure the browser. 1.

Right click in the Model Browser and select C o lla ps e All.

Notice how there is a column for Export, Include Path and Include Type. 2.

Expand the fra m e .ke y folder.

486


Altair Engineering

Notice how the Export, Include Path and Include Type columns are only relevant for the include files and not for the individual entities within the file. 3.

Right click in the Model Browser and select C o nfigure B ro ws e r. This opens the Browser window folder.

4.

Select the C o lum ns tab.

Within this tab, s can define which columns are displayed in the Include view of

Altair Engineering


487

the Model Browser. 5. Uncheck the option for Include Type and then select O K.

Step 4: Create new includes, reorganize the model, and locate entities in includes. Whether you import includes or are simply starting from a ‘flat’ HyperMesh model, you can create new includes in your database using the Include view, and organize entities into them using the Organize . You can also select entities (using the standard SHIFT and CTRL keys) from the Include view and drag them between two includes or between the master model and an include. To determine which include a specific entity belongs to, you can use the Organize ’s locate function. In this section, create a new include for the doors and organize the corresponding collectors into it using the Organize . Finally, determine which include a certain material belongs to using the locate function. 1.

Right-click M a s te r M o de l and select C re a te > Include File . This adds a new include under the master model with an editable name. Note:

2.

You can add includes under the master model or under includes themselves.

Type in the name doors.key for this new include. This include is now displayed in bold, signifying that it is the current include. Note: You can rename or make current an include using the context menu displayed when you right-click the include.

3.

From the Tool page, select the o rga niz e .

4.

Select the include s sub and set the entity selector to co m ps .

5.

Click de s t = and select the doors.key include as the destination for the components.

6.

From the graphics area, pick the two doors and their windows, or click co m ps to access the list of components and select the components SH E LL: D O O R - LE FT, SH E LL: D O O R R IG H T, and SH E LL: D O O R - W IND O W G - LE FT.

7.

Click m o v e to place these components into the include. An expand/collapse icon is added next to the doors.key include, signifying that data has been placed under it.

8.

Review the components that were placed in the doors.key include.

9.

Right-click doors.key and select Is o la te . The elements are displayed in the graphics area.

488


Altair Engineering

Door and window elements in doors.key.

10.

Change the display back to D is pla y All.

11.

In the Organize , includes sub, set the type of entities to m a ts .

12.

Click lo ca te (the blue button on the right side of the ). This brings up the list of materials available in this model.

13.

Select M ATL1_38. The dest = field is updated to show which include (or master) file this particular material belongs to. In this case, it belongs to the wheels.key include.

In this section, a new include was created in the Include view, and some components from the master model, as well as their corresponding elements, were moved into it. Finally, the locate function was used to quickly identify which include a material belonged to.

Step 5: Import new data into an include and export the model. Initially, the Master Model is always the current file (displayed in bold in the Include view) and any new entity you create or bring in HyperMesh is automatically placed in it. You can use the Make Current option from the Include view context menu to make any include the current include. As you create a new include, this include automatically becomes the current include. The Include File Options… function from the Include view context menu lets you define

Altair Engineering


489

export options for each individual include file: whether the include file should get exported, when the export function is used, and where the file should be exported. Under Export options of Export Solver Deck, models that contain includes:

, you have two options for exporting

Merge: in this case, all the data in individual include files is merged into a single master model during export. The exported file does not contain references to any include files. Preserve: with this option, all the data in individual include files are exported separately to their corresponding files. The references to these includes in the master model file are also maintained. In this section, create a new include in the master model called barrier.dyn and import a barrier model into it. Review the include file options for each one of the includes in the model and modify them as needed. Finally, export the model preserving the includes. 1.

In the Include view, right-click M a s te r M o de l and select C re a te > Include File .

2.

Name the new include barrier.dyn. Notice how this new include is displayed in bold, signifying that it is now the current include and any new data created or brought into HyperMesh will be placed in it.

3.

Select Im po rt So lv e r D e ck

.

This posts Import menu in HyperMesh browser area. 4.

Click File : ( .

) and import the file \tutorials\hm\barrier.dyn

The barrier is imported into HyperMesh.

490


Altair Engineering

Truck and barrier

5.

Review the content of the barrier.dyn include. Notice how barrier.dyn is displayed as bold and both barrier.dyn and doors.key are non-italicized, while e ngine .ke y , fra m e .ke y , and w he e ls.ke y are all italicized. This is a visual representation of the export option that is set for each of these three includes.

6.

Right-mouse click engine.key and select Include File O ptio ns . This displays the Include File Options dialog:

The File path: option lets you type in or browse for the directory in which the include is to be exported. The Do not export option lets you specify whether the include should get exported or not when the model is exported out of HyperMesh. This box is automatically checked when you read includes into HyperMesh that have their permission set to read only, as well as includes that are referenced by the master file using absolute paths. The three files frame.key, wheels.key and engine.key are referenced by the file master.k that we imported initially using relative paths (edit the master.k file to this), but had their permissions set to read only. In order to export these includes, the D o no t e xpo rt box should be unchecked. 7.

Uncheck the Do not export box and click Set for the includes engine.key, frame.key and wheels.key.

8.

Right-click on an include and select E xpo rt All Include s . This displays the Export all includes dialog.

9.

Type in a location and name for the master model and click O K. Or, use the open file icon ( ) to browse for a location, type in the name of the master file and click Sa v e .

10.

Go to the directory you selected and that all the includes have been exported with the names set in the Include view.

Note:

Using this option, all the include files are exported as individual files. This is equivalent to using the Export Solver Deck menu ( ) with the preserve includes option when writing out the master model. When you want to export a single ‘flat’

Altair Engineering


491

file, use the export sub and set the export option to m e rge include s . This concludes this tutorial. You may discard this model or save it to your working directory for your reference. In this tutorial you used the include browser to manage the use of includes in your truck model. Several options for import, display, organization, and export were used.

492


Altair Engineering

HM-4070: OptiView In this tutorial, you will: Import an optimization model Create a new set of optimization entities Organize these into optimization problems Run both problems View results

Exercise

Step 1: Launch HyperMesh and set the profile to OptiStruct. Step 2: Import the cclip.fem file. 1.

Select Im po rt So lv e r D e ck

2.

Select O ptiStruct for the File type.

3.

Click the in the File line to browse to \tutorial\hm\ and select cclip.fem.

4.

Click Im po rt to open the file.

from the Standard toolbar.

Step 3: Create Problem 1 and organize optimization entities. 1.

From the Model Browser, click O ptim iz a tio n Vie w (

2.

Review the Optimization Repository.

).

The Optimization Repository gives an overview of all optimization related entities in the database. Info types and children entities help give a clear snapshot without having to review individual entities.

Altair Engineering


493

Figure 1

3.

Right-click the O ptim iz a tio n Pro ble m s folder and click C re a te > O ptim iz a tio n Pro ble m .

4.

Name this problem Topology.

5.

Drag and drop all the entities from the repository into the newly created problem. You can drag and drop entities from the repository into problems or problems into problems. Any combination of selected entities can be dragged and dropped.

Step 4: Define a new set of optimization entities. 1.

Right-click in the white space of the optimization view in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Fre e Siz e D e s v a r. This will take you into the Free Size Optimization where you can define a free size design variable. Give it a meaningful name so you can easily drag and drop.

2.

Create a free size design variable for the shells property. You can create new response/constraint pairs, or anything else you want to change from problem to problem. For this simple tutorial, we will just compare Topology to Free Size.

Step 5: Create Problem 2 and organize optimization entities. 1.

Create another problem using by right-clicking, choosing C re a te > O ptim iz a tio n Pro ble m . Name this problem Free Size .

2.

Drag and drop all the entities defined in the repository to the newly created problem. Notice that you will have two design variables defined for the Free Size problem.

3.

Right-click on the s he ll design variable under Free Size and click R e m o v e fro m Pro ble m . This will not delete the problem from the repository.

494


Altair Engineering

Figure 2

Step 6: Set problems to export and run. 1.

Right-click on the To po lo gy problem and click Se t E xpo rt. Once problems are defined, only one can be export at a time. The problem set to export is in bold, and furthermore, the entity state browser shows these rules.

2.

Open the OptiStruct .

3.

Set the export options to cus to m .

4.

Save the input file as cclip_topology.fem.

5.

Click O ptiStruct to run the analysis. The Optimization View allows one .hm for all optimization problems, and it is up to the to wisely name each input file.

Altair Engineering


495

496


Altair Engineering

Customization Scripts HM-8010: Add a Button to the Page on the Utility Menu HM-8020: Create a Utility Menu Macro From a Command File HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a Plane HM-8040: Create a Utility Menu Macro from a Tcl Script HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the Page HM-8060: Calculate the Resultant Sum of Forces HM-8070: Create Spline Surfaces on Tria Elements HM-8080: Calculate the Radius of an Arc HM-8090: Create an OptiStruct PSHELL property

Altair Engineering


497

Scripts HM-8010: Add a Button to the Page on the Utility Menu HM-8020: Create a Utility Menu Macro From a Command File HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a Plane HM-8040: Create a Utility Menu Macro from a Tcl Script HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the Page HM-8060: Calculate the Resultant Sum of Forces HM-8070: Create Spline Surfaces on Tria Elements HM-8080: Calculate the Radius of an Arc HM-8090: Create an OptiStruct PSHELL property

498


Altair Engineering

HM-8010: Add a Button to the Page on the Utility Menu In this tutorial you will: Create a new button on the page of the Utility Menu

Tools

The page is available on the Utility Menu. It can be accessed in the following way: 1.

From the menu bar, select Vie w > B ro ws e rs > H y pe rM e s h > Utility

2.

At the bottom of the Utility Menu, click the Us e r button

s may add command files and Tcl/Tk scripts to the page.mac file. When HyperMesh starts, it first looks for the page.mac file in the directory from which it launches and then in the installation directory. UNIX s also have the option of putting the page.mac file in their home directory. The page.mac file controls the display and available operations on the page of the HyperMesh Utility Menu. To invoke a command file or Tcl/Tk script from the page, a button must be defined inside the page.mac file. The *createbutton command is used to define the button and its characteristics. The syntax for this command is: *createbutton(page, name, row, column, width, COLOR, helpString, macroName [ , arg1 … ])

page

The page number on which the button is to appear. For the Us e r page, this value is 5.

name

The text to display on the button, enclosed in quotes: " ".

row

The row in which to place the button. The number of visible rows depends on your monitor’s graphics resolution. A positive value indicates an absolute row number. A 0 indicates the next highest available row. A negative value indicates the number of rows to skip. Rows begin at the bottom of the menu.

column

The column where the button starts (0-10). Columns begin to the right of the menu.

width

The width of the button (max = 10).

Altair Engineering


499

COLOR

The color of the button. The available button colors are: RED, BLUE, GREEN, CYAN, MAGENTA, YELLOW, GRAY, and BUTTON (background). The color name must appear in capital letters.

helpString

The string to be displayed in the menu bar when the middle mouse button is pressed and the button is clicked, enclosed in quotes: " ".

macroName

The command to run when the button is pressed, enclosed in quotes: " ".

arg1…

A list of optional arguments ed to the script.

Exercise

To create a button on the page that will launch the lighting.tcl dialog from the HyperMesh installation:

Step 1: Create the page.mac file. Using a text editor, create a blank page.mac file in the appropriate directory. When HyperMesh starts, it first looks for the page.mac file in the directory from which it launches and then in the installation directory. On Windows, the default launch directory is in the My Documents folder. UNIX s also have the option of putting the page.mac file in their home directory. It is not recommended to modify the page.mac file in the installation directory.

Step 2: Add the command to create the button. 1.

Add the following text to the page.mac file:

*createbutton(5,"Lighting",10,5,5,YELLOW,"Launch the lighting.tcl script","EvalTcl","lighting.tcl") The EvalTcl macro is defined in the globalpage.mac file in the HyperMesh installation. It takes a Tcl script as its argument and executes the script. Notice that the full path is not used to reference the lighting.tcl script. A full path can be specified if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find scripts. s can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable. Relative paths can also be used from these search paths. 2.

Save the modified page.mac file.

500


Altair Engineering

Step 3: Load the updated page.mac file. 1.

Restart HyperMesh from the working directory or reload the current macro menu .mac file. This allows the current session to use the modified page.mac file. To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, from the menu bar select Pre fe re nce s > M e nu C o nfig and click on re trie v e next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from the hm/scripts/<profile name> directory based on the current profile, or load the default hm.mac in the hm/bin/ directory if no profile is loaded.

2.

Click the Us e r button on the Utility Menu. You will see Lighting, the button defined in Step 2. Compare this button to its definition. It is yellow in color, begins in column 5 of row 10, and extends half way across the Utility Menu.

Altair Engineering


501

HM-8020: Create a Utility Menu Macro From a Command File In this tutorial you will: Determine the commands to save the current HyperMesh model Create a Utility Menu macro to execute the command Create a new button on the page of the Utility Menu to run the macro

Tools

In order to execute command file commands or Tcl scripts from a button on any of the HyperMesh Utility Menu pages, a Utility Menu macro must first be defined. A Utility Menu macro contains valid command file or templex commands that execute the appropriate operations, and is defined using the *beginmacro and *endmacro commands. Macros may accept data ed to them using the arguments $1, $2, etc. Each argument specifies where the values should be substituted. These macros are defined within the .mac files, including the page.mac file. The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility Menu macro: *beginmacro(macroname) command statements go here *endmacro() Utility Menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands.

Exercise

Create a Utility Menu macro from a command file that saves the model and add a button on the page that will launch the macro: 1.

Define the task.

2.

Delete the existing command.cmf file. This file is located in either the start-in directory or the current working directory.

3.

Perform the operations in HyperMesh that the script should run.

4.

Extract the commands from the command.cmf file.

5.

Add the commands to the page.mac file.

6.

Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.

502


Altair Engineering

7.

Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the new macro defined in Step 6.

8.

Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified page.mac.

9.

Test the macro.

Step 1: Define the task. The first step in creating a macro is to define the process you want to automate and recognize the individual tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automate saving the current HyperMesh model to a file named temp.hm. The actions necessary to complete this task are: From the menu bar, select File > Sa v e a s > M o de l

.

Use the file browser to locate a directory and enter the name for the filename. Click Sa v e .

Step 2: Delete the existing command.cmf file. The current command.cmf file is located in the current working directory. When first opening HyperMesh, the file is created in the directory HyperMesh is launched from. As soon as you begin working in HyperMesh all executed commands are written to the command.cmf file. If the file already exists, the commands are appended to the file. Deleting the file allows HyperMesh to create a new file and allows the to easily find the relevant commands.

Step 3: Perform the operations in HyperMesh. Execute the full process within HyperMesh. Every command issued in HyperMesh appears in the order executed and is reflected in the command.cmf file. 1.

From the menu bar, select File > Sa v e a s > M o de l

2.

Using the file browser, locate a directory to save the temporary file with the name temp.hm.

.

this is just a temporary file and will be overwritten each time the macro is executed. 3.

Click Sa v e .

Step 4: Extract the commands from the command.cmf file. 1.

Open the command.cmf file using any text editor.

2.

Locate the *writefile command at or near the end of the command.cmf file. This is the command that writes the model file.

Altair Engineering


503

3.

Select and copy this line.

Step 5: Add the commands to the page.mac file. 1.

Open the page.mac file using any text editor.

2.

Paste the *writefile command copied from the command.cmf file inside the page. mac file.

Step 6: Modify as necessary and add Utility Menu macro wrapper commands. 1.

Remove the path in the *writefile command so that it looks like: *writefile("temp.hm",0)

2.

Enclose the commands from Step 5 between the wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command, name the macro macroSave.

*beginmacro(macroSave) *writefile("temp.hm",0) *endmacro()

The macro name macroSave will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field in the *createbutton command. 3.

Add the command *answer(yes) after the *writefile command. The command *answer(yes) automatically answers “yes” if prompted to overwrite the file in the event temp.hm already exists.

4.

Save the page.mac file.

Step 7: Add the macro button. Create a button on the page to execute the macro. 1.

Create a new button in the page.mac file. *createbutton(5,"Save File",20,0,10,GREEN,"Save file","macroSave") This creates a button on page 5 ( page), names it, places it in the 20th row, starts it at column 0, sets the width at 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references the macro macroSave defined in Step 6.

2.


504


Altair Engineering

Step 8: Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified page.mac. To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Pre fe re nce s > M e nu C o nfig from the menu bar and click on re trie v e next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current profile, or load the default hm.mac in the hm\bin\ directory if no profile is loaded.

Step 9: Test the macro. 1.

Click the Us e r button on the Utility Menu. The new button labeled Save File should be on the page.

2.

Click this button to automatically save your file. The file is saved to the directory specified in the *writefile command. In this case no directory is specified so HyperMesh saves the file to the start-up or current working directory. It will always save with the name specified in the macro (in this case, temp. hm).

Altair Engineering


505

HM-8030: Create a Utility Menu Macro to Create Constraints on a Plane In this tutorial you will: Determine the commands to create constraints on a plane Create a Utility Menu macro to execute the commands Create a new button on the page of the Utility Menu to run the macro

Tools

In order to execute command file commands or Tcl scripts from a button on any of the HyperMesh Utility Menu pages, a Utility Menu macro must first be defined. A Utility Menu macro contains valid command file or templex commands that execute the appropriate operations, and is defined using the *beginmacro and *endmacro commands. Macros may accept data ed to them using the arguments $1, $2, etc. Each argument specifies where the values should be substituted. These macros are defined within the .mac files, including the page.mac file. The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility Menu macro: *beginmacro(macroname) command statements go here *endmacro() Utility Menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands. Load collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right-click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto r to create one. To edit the name, color, or card image of a load collector, right click on the load collector name in the Model Browser and select E dit The Constraints can be accessed from the menu bar by selecting B C s > C re a te > C o ns tra ints The Constraints allows you to create and update constraints.

Exercise In this exercise you will create a Utility Menu macro from a command file that creates

506


Altair Engineering

constraints on a plane and add a button on the page that will launch the macro: 1.

Define the task.

2.


3.


4.


5.

Add them to the page.mac file.

6.

Modify as necessary and add macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro.

7.

Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the new macro defined in Step 6.

8.


9.

Test the macro.

Step 1: Define the task. The first step in creating a macro is to define the process you want to automate and recognize the individual tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automatically create constraints on certain nodes. The actions necessary to complete this task are: Create a load collector for the constraints. Enter the Constraints . Apply constraints to the nodes on the end of the beam lying in the YZ plane.



From the menu bar, select File > O pe n > M o de l and load the file, c_channel-tcl.hm.

2.

Right click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto r.

3.

In the Name field enter the name constraints.

Altair Engineering


507

4.

Click cre a te .

5.

Open the Constraints .

6.

Active the cre a te sub.

7.

Click no de s and select the o n pla ne option. The plane that will be selected is the YZ plane. This is accomplished by selecting the xa xis vector, which is normal to the YZ plane. The base node option is then highlighted, allowing a node on one end of the beam to be selected as the base node for the plane. All nodes on that plane are highlighted when select is clicked.

8.

Click cre a te .



2.

Select and copy all lines in the file. Observe the *createmark command and the list of entity ID numbers. A mark is a storage buffer in HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity ID is first entered into the designated mark. There are two marks available to the (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines, surfaces, points, etc…). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to all entities identified in the mark.

Step 5: Add the commands to the page.mac file. 1.

Open the page.mac file using any text editor.

2.

Paste the commands copied from the command.cmf file inside the page.mac file.

Step 6: Modify as necessary and add Utility menu macro wrapper commands. 1.

Enclose the commands in Step 5 between the wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command, name the macro macroEdge_Const as shown, following. Remove any lines copied from the command.cmf file that are not shown in the following.

*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const) *collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",11) *createmark(nodes,1) 3358-3360 3296 3297 3142 etc … *loadcreateonentity_curve(nodes,1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0)

508


Altair Engineering

*endmacro()

The macro name macroEdge_Const will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field in the *createbutton command. 2.

Change the *createmark(nodes,1) command to *createmark(nodes,1) "on plane" 0 0 0 1 0 0 0.5 1 0 "on plane" is one of many selection methods available. This method allows the selection of only entities that lie within a tolerance (in this case, 0.5) of the plane defined at the point (0,0,0) with normal vector (1,0,0). In this exercise, this is the YZ plane. See the Input Colle c t ors online help topic for further details. The final macro should look like:

*beginmacro(macroEdge_Const) *collectorcreate(loadcols,"constraints","",11) *createmark(nodes,1) "on plane" 0 0 0 1 0 0 0.5 1 0 *loadcreateonentity(nodes,1,3,1,0,0,0,0,0,0) *endmacro()

3.



Create a new button in the page.mac file.

*createbutton(5,"Edge Const",18,0,10,GREEN,"Add constraints to outer edge of elements","macroEdge_Const")

This creates a button on page 5 ( page), names it, places it in the 20th row, starts it at column 0, makes it 10 columns wide, gives it the color green, provides a help string and references the macro macroSave defined in Step 6. 2.


Step 8: Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified page.mac.

Altair Engineering


509

To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Pre fe re nce s > M e nu C o nfig from the menu bar and click on re trie v e next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current profile, or load the default hm.mac in hm\bin\ if no profile is loaded.


Click the button on the Utility Menu. The new button labeled Edge Const should be on the page.

2.

Click this button to run the macro that automatically creates constraints on the outer row of nodes. Some commands used in this exercise are very model-specific. For example, creating a load collector named “constraints” may cause an error if the collector already exists. Also, selecting nodes using the by plane option and specifying the YZ plane may not be applicable to a lot of situations. Several options exist to make the *createmark commands general enough to work with any model. For example, to select all the currently displayed elements in the model use the command *createmark(elements,1) "by displayed". Another option is to replace the *createmark command with *createmark. When executed, this command presents the with a selection for the entity specified. For this macro, the *createmark command could be used to allow the to select the appropriate nodes. Additionally, this Utility Menu macro could be converted to a Tcl script that allows for additional logic and error checking controls. This way, the could also be prompted to enter a name for the load collector using hm_getstring. An error check could then be performed to determine if that load collector already exists, and appropriate action would then be taken.

510


Altair Engineering

HM-8040: Create a Utility Menu Macro from a Tcl Script In this tutorial you will: Determine the commands to save the current HyperMesh model Create a Utility Menu macro to execute the commands Create a new button on the page of the Utility Menu to run the macro

Tools

In order to execute command file commands or Tcl scripts from a button on any of the HyperMesh Utility Menu pages, a Utility Menu macro must first be defined. A Utility Menu macro contains valid command file or templex commands that execute the appropriate operations, and is defined using the *beginmacro and *endmacro commands. Macros may accept data ed to them using the arguments $1, $2, etc. Each argument specifies where the values should be substituted. These macros are defined within the .mac files, including the page.mac file. The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility Menu macro: *beginmacro(macroname) command statements go here *endmacro() Utility Menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands.

Exercise

In this exercise you will create a Tcl script from the command file commands, create a Utility Menu macro that runs the Tcl script and add a button on the page that will launch the macro: 1.

Define the task.

2.


3.


4.


5.

Create a Tcl script by converting the commands to Tcl format and modifying as necessary.

6.

Create a new Utility Menu macro that runs a Tcl script.

Altair Engineering


511

7.

Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the macro created in Step 6 with the appropriate Tcl script filename.

8.


9.

Test the macro.

Step 1: Define the task. The first step in creating a macro is to define the process you want to automate and recognize the individual tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automate saving the current HyperMesh model to a file named temp.hm. The actions necessary to complete this task are: From the menu bar, select File > Sa v e a s > M o de l. Use the file browser to locate a directory and enter the name for the filename. Click Sa v e .



From the menu bar, select File s > Sa v e a s > M o de l.

2.

Using the file browser, locate a directory to save the temporary file with the name temp.hm. this is just a temporary file and will be overwritten each time the macro is executed.

3.

Click Sa v e .



2.

Locate the *writefile command at or near the end of the command.cmf file. This is the command that writes the model file.

512


Altair Engineering

3.

Select and copy this line.

Step 5: Create a Tcl script names savefile.tcl, convert the commands to Tcl format and modify as necessary. 1.

Create a new file named savefile.tcl using any text editor.

2.

Paste the *writefile command copied from the command.cmf file inside the savefile. tcl file.

3.

Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. Also remove the “ “. should look like:

The command

*writefile temp.hm 0 4.

Add the command *answer yes after the *writefile command. The command *answer yes automatically answers “yes” if prompted to overwrite the file in the event temp.hm already exists. Notice that there are no parentheses.

5.

Save the savefile.tcl script in the current working directory.

Step 6: Create a Utility Menu macro that runs a Tcl script. 1.

Create a new Utility Menu macro that calls the *evaltclscript command to run a Tcl script, using the macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command, name the macro EvalTcl.

*beginmacro("EvalTcl") *evaltclscript($1,0) *endmacro()

The macro name EvalTcl will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field in the *createbutton command. 2.



Create a new button in the page.mac file. *createbutton(5,"SaveFile TCL",15,0,10,GREEN,"Save file using TCL macro", "EvalTcl","savefile.tcl")

Altair Engineering


513

This creates a button on page 5 ( Us e r page), names it, places it in the 20th row, starts it at column 0, sets its width at 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references the macro EvalTcl defined in Step 6. Notice that the full path is not used to reference the savefile.tcl script. A full path can be specified if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find scripts. s can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable. Relative paths can also be used from these search paths. 2.


Step 8: Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified page.mac. To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open, select Pre fe re nce s > M e nu C o nfig from the menu bar and click on re trie v e next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current profile, or load the default hm.mac in hm\bin\ if no profile is loaded.


Click the button on the Utility Menu. The new button labeled Save File TCL should be on the page.

2.

Click this button to automatically save your file. The file is saved to the directory specified in the *writefile command. In this case no directory is specified so HyperMesh saves the file to the start-up or current working directory. It will always save with the name specified in the macro, in this case temp. hm.

514


Altair Engineering

HM-8050: Create Forces on Nodes and Add a Button on the Page In this tutorial you will: Determine the commands to create forces on nodes Create a Utility menu macro to execute the commands Create a new button on the page of the Utility Menu to run the macro

Tools

In order to execute command file commands or Tcl scripts from a button on any of the HyperMesh Utility Menu pages, a Utility Menu macro must first be defined. A Utility Menu macro contains valid command file or templex commands that execute the appropriate operations, and is defined using the *beginmacro and *endmacro commands. Macros may accept data ed to them using the arguments $1, $2, etc. Each argument specifies where the values should be substituted. These macros are defined within the .mac files, including the page.mac file. The following skeleton code shows the format of a Utility menu macro: *beginmacro(macroname) command statements go here *endmacro() Utility menu macros consist of HyperMesh Tcl modify commands. Load collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto r to create one. To edit the name, color, or card image of a load collector, right click on the load collector name in the Model Browser and select E dit The Forces can be accessed from the menu bar by selecting B C s > C re a te > Fo rce s . The Forces allows you to create and update forces.

Exercise

In this exercise you will create a Tcl script from the command file commands, create a Utility Menu macro that runs the Tcl script and add a button on the Us e r page that will launch the

Altair Engineering


515

macro: 1.

Define the task.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Create a Utility Menu macro that runs a Tcl script.

7.

Add macro button using *createbutton that calls the macro created in Step 6 with the appropriate Tcl script filename.

8.


9.

Test the macro.

Step 1: Define the task. The first step in creating a macro is to define the process you want to automate and recognize the individual tasks to reach the desired conclusion. Here, you want to create a one-button macro to automatically create forces on certain nodes. The actions necessary to complete this task are: Create a load collector for the forces Enter the Forces Apply forces to the nodes of interest



From the menu bar, select File > O pe n > M o de l and then load the file, c_channel-tcl. hm.

516


Altair Engineering

2.

Right click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Lo a d C o lle cto r.

3.

In the Name field enter the name forces.

4.

Click C re a te .

5.

Open the Forces .

6.

Activate the cre a te sub.

7.

Click no de s and select one node in the model.

9.

a.

For the direction of the force choose the z- a xis option.

b.

For m a gnitude = , enter 23.

c.

Toggle from m a gnitude % option to unifo rm s iz e option for load size and set the value to 15.

Click cre a te .


Open the command.cmf file using any text editor or use the Open Command File option in the Scripting Toolbar.

2.

Select and copy the following three lines in the file: *loadsize(1,15,0,1) *createmark(nodes,1) 3237 *loadcreateonentity_curve(nodes,1,1,1,0,0,23,0,0,23,0,0,0,0,0) Observe the *createmark command and the list of entity id numbers. A mark is a storage buffer in HyperMesh. For some actions performed on entities, the entity ID is first entered into the designated mark. There are two marks available to the (1 and 2) for each entity type (elements, nodes, lines, surfaces, points, etc.). At the execution of the command using the mark, the changes apply to all entities identified in the mark.

Step 5: Create a Tcl script named create_force.tcl, convert the commands to Tcl format and modify as necessary. 1.

Create a new file named create_force.tcl using any text editor.

2.

Paste the copied commands from the command.cmf file inside the create_force.tcl file.

3.

Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. The commands should look something like: *loadsize 1 15 0 1

Altair Engineering


517

*createmark nodes 1 3237 *loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 23 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 Simply running the above commands will work without a problem, but note that the *createmark command is hard coded to the single node picked when generating the command file. Also notice that the magnitude is hard coded as well. This is not very useful for a generic utility. 4.

Replace the *createmark command with the *createmark command. The command *createmark presents the with a selection for the entity specified. The commands should now look like this: *loadsize 1 15 0 1 *createmark nodes 1 "Select nodes for load creation" *loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 23 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0

5.

If you want to let the specify the magnitude, prompt the for a value using hm_getfloat. Then replace the hard coded magnitude in the *loadcreateonentity_curve command with the defined value. The commands should now look like this: *loadsize 1 15 0 1 *createmark nodes 1 "Select nodes for load creation" set mag_val [hm_getfloat "Magnitude=" "Enter force magnitude:"] *loadcreateonentity_curve nodes 1 1 1 0 0 $mag_val 0 0 $mag_val 0 0 0 0 0

6.

Save the create_force.tcl script.

Step 6: Create a Utility menu macro that runs a Tcl script. 1.

Create a new Utility Menu macro that calls the *evaltclscript command to run a Tcl script, using the macro wrapper commands *beginmacro and *endmacro. In the *beginmacro command, name the macro EvalTcl.

*beginmacro("EvalTcl") *evaltclscript($1,0) *endmacro()

The macro name EvalTcl will be used to connect the button with the macro via the macroName field in the *createbutton command. 2.


518


Altair Engineering


Create a new button in the page.mac file. *createbutton(5,"Create Force",16,0,10,GREEN,"Create z-direction force on selected nodes","EvalTcl","create_force.tcl") This creates a button on page 5 ( Us e r page), names it, places it in the 16th row, places its start at column 0, gives it a width of 10 columns, applies to it the color green, provides a help string and references the macro create_force.tcl defined in Step 6. Notice that the full path is not used to reference the create_force.tcl script. A full path can be specified if the file is not located in one of the predefined paths that HyperMesh searches to find scripts. s can add additional search paths using the TCL_INCLUDE environment variable. Relative paths can also be used from these search paths.

2.


Step 8: Reload the current .mac file into HyperMesh to load the modified page.mac. To reload the current macro menu .mac file while HyperMesh is open from the menu bar select Pre fe re nce s > M e nu C o nfig and click on re trie v e next to macro file. Make sure to load the proper .mac file from the hm\scripts\<profile name> directory based on the current profile, or load the default hm.mac in hm\bin\ if no profile is loaded.


Click the button on the Utility Menu. The new button labeled Create Force should be on the page.

2.

Click this button to run the Tcl script that automatically creates forces in the zdirection of the selected nodes. The new forces are created on the specified nodes with the given magnitude and placed in the current load collector If no load collector exists, the forces are placed in a load collector called auto1. It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command Window. This allows you to run the Tcl script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can be found in the Cre a t ing T c l Sc ript s and Running T c l Sc ript s sections.

Altair Engineering


519

HM-8060: Calculate the Resultant Sum of Forces In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that: Determines the components of a given set of force vectors Calculates a vector resultant sum of the forces Reports the resultant sum

Tools

The Tcl commands if, foreach and expr will be used to add logic and mathematical functions to the script. The command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data names. Data names are generic references to the information that physically define an entity in the HyperMesh environment. An example of this is the x, y, and z coordinates that define a node location in three-dimensional space. The available data names for each entity can be found in the HyperMesh Reference Guide Data Names topic. Data names are accessed using the hm_getentityvalue command. This command uses the data names available for an entity to return the particular value of interest. The command will return a value that is either a string or a numeric value, depending on the command syntax and the value stored in that particular data name field. The basic syntax of the command is: hm_getentityvalue entity_type id data_name flag where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc.), id is the entity ID, the data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the command should return a numeric value (0) or a string (1). To retrieve the x-component of a force with ID 12, the following command can be used: set force_x [hm_getentityvalue loads 12 "comp1" 0] Note that to assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square brackets.

Exercise

Create a Tcl script to compute the resultant sum of a given selection of forces. This requires that the script read data from the force entities and manipulate the data to calculate the resultant. To calculate the resultant of the forces, retrieve the x, y, and z components of the forces and compute a vector sum. 1.

Define the process.

2.

Determine the data names to use to extract the force components.

3.

Create the Tcl script and add logic as necessary.

520


Altair Engineering

4.

Test the script.

Step 1: Define the process. The script should automate the following process: Prompt the to select a number of forces to calculate the resultant. Make sure the has selected one or more loads. Extract the components of each force. Sum the components. Report the result to the .

Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the force components. The following table lists several relevant data names for force loads: comp1

x component of the vector

comp2

y component of the vector

comp3

z component of the vector

config

The number "1" for forces The number "2" for moments The number "8" for velocities The number "9" for accelerations

entitytype

the type of entity to which this load is applied (1=node, 3=component, 10=set)

node

when a load is applied to a node, this serves as a pointer to the node

inputsystemid

reference system ID

Ste ps 3-9: C re a te the T cl script a nd a dd lo gic a s ne ce ssa ry. A Tcl script to perform this function might be similar to the following:

Step 3: Open a text file and save the file as HM8060.tcl.

Altair Engineering


521

Step 4: Select the desired loads and then add those loads to a list. The *createmark command is used to allow the to graphically select the loads from the HyperMesh interface and add them to the mark. The command below adds the loads to mark 1. Once the loads have been added to mark 1, the load ids are assigned to a list called loads_list, using the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8060. tcl: *createmark loads 1 "Select forces to compute resultant"; set loads_list [hm_getmark loads 1];

Step 5: Initialize the variables for the x, y, and z components. Use the TCL command set to initialize the variables for the x, y, and z components of force to 0. These variables will be used later in the script to compute the resultant force for each component. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL file HM8060.tcl: set x_comp_sum "0"; set y_comp_sum "0"; set z_comp_sum "0";

Step 6: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable loads_list has values. If it does, proceed with the macro. Before calculating the resultant of the forces selected, we should check to make sure that the variable loads_list has values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking that the variable loads_list is not empty. Add the following line to the TCL file to initialize the if loop: if {$loads_list != ""} {

Step 7: Use a foreach loop to iterate through each load in the list loads_list and extract the x, y, and z components using the hm_getentityvalue command and the appropriate data name. Using a foreach loop, each load in the list loads_list will be iterated through. Within the foreach loop, each load is referenced by load_id and then the component value is added to the previous loads component’s value. For example, let’s look at the x component. Using the set command, the variable x_comp_sum is defined as the previous value of x_comp_sum, plus the x component of the current load. The x component of the current load is retrieved by using the hm_getentityvalue command and the data name comp1 (all the available data names for loads are shown in the table above). This process is done for the y and z components as well. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL file: foreach load_id $loads_list {

522


Altair Engineering

set x_comp_sum [expr $x_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue loads $load_id "comp1" 0]]; set y_comp_sum [expr $y_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue loads $load_id "comp2" 0]]; set z_comp_sum [expr $z_comp_sum + [hm_getentityvalue loads $load_id "comp3" 0]]; }

Step 8: Report the Resultant Force to the . Use the command hm_message to report each of the components of the resultant force. Add the following line to the TCL file: hm_message "Resultant force: $x_comp_sum, $y_comp_sum $z_comp_sum ";

Step 9: Complete the if loop and report an error message if no loads are found. To complete the if loop, add an else statement. the if statement checked to see if the variable loads_list was not empty. This else statement returns an error message to the to let them know that no loads were selected. } else { hm_errormessage "No loads selected"; }

Step 10: Test the script. 1.

From the menu bar, select Vie w > C o m m a nd W indo w to display the Command Window at the bottom of the screen.

2.

Click and drag to open the Command Window from the bottom edge of the screen.

3.

Open the file c_channel-tcl.hm.

4.

Use the source command to execute the script. For example: source HM8060.tcl It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command Window. This allows you to run the Tcl script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can be found in the Cre a t ing T c l Sc ript s a nd Running T c l Sc ript s sections.

Altair Engineering


523

There are several important assumptions used when creating this script. The will always select force loads, as opposed to moments, pressures, etc. The forces are applied to nodes, as opposed to comps or sets, and are valid to sum. All of the forces are applied in the same coordinate system so that it is valid to sum the component values directly. If any of these assumptions are not true, the values returned by the script may be invalid. Additional conditional logic can be programmed to check for each of these situations and an error message can be returned or they can be handled appropriately. 5. The result of the macro is shown in the status bar. Either a message with the resultant force is shown or else there is a note saying that no loads were selected.

524


Altair Engineering

HM-8070: Create Spline Surfaces on Tria Elements In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that creates spline surfaces from the nodes of selected tria elements.

Tools

The Tcl commands if, foreach, and incr will be used to add logic to the script. The command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data names. Data names are generic references to the information that physically define an entity in the HyperMesh environment. An example of this is the x-, y-, and z-coordinates that define a node location in three-dimensional space. The available data names for each can be found in the HyperMesh Reference Guide Data Names topic. Data names are accessed using the hm_getentityvalue command. This command uses the data names available for an entity to return the particular value of interest. The command will return a value that is either a string or a numeric value, depending on the command syntax and the value stored in that particular data name field. The basic syntax of the command is: hm_getentityvalue entity_type id data_name flag where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc…), id is the entity ID, the data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the command should return a numeric value (0) or a string (1). To retrieve the x-component of a force with ID 12, the following command can be used: set force_x [hm_getentityvalue loads 12 "comp1" 0] Note that to assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square brackets.

Exercise

Create a Tcl script that creates spline surfaces from the nodes of selected tria elements. This requires that the script read data from the element entities. To create the spline surfaces, retrieve the 3-node IDs of the tria elements. 1.

Define the process.

2.

Determine the data names to use to extract the element type and node IDs.

3.


4.

Test the script.

Altair Engineering


525

Step 1: Define the process. The script should automate the following process: Prompt the to select a number of tria elements to create spline surfaces from. Make sure the has selected one or more elements. If a selected element is not a tria, skip that element. Extract the node IDs of each element. Create the spline surface from the nodes. Report on the number of spline surfaces created.

Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the element type and node IDs. The following table lists several relevant data names for tria elements: config

The number, “103”

node1

first node (node pointer)

node2

second node (node pointer)

node3

third node (node pointer)


Step 3: Open a text file and save the file as HM8070.tcl. Step 4: Allow the to select the desired elements and then add those loads to a list The *createmark command is used to allow the to graphically select the elements from the HyperMesh interface and add them to the mark. The command below adds the elements to mark 1. Once the elements have been added to mark 1, the element ids are assigned to a list called elems_list, using the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8070.tcl:

*createmark elems 1 "Select tria elements to create surfaces"; set elems_list [hm_getmark elems 1];

526


Altair Engineering

Step 5: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable elems_list has values. If it does, proceed with the macro. Before continuing with the macro, we should check to make sure that the variable elems_list has values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking that the variable elems_list is not empty. Add the following line to the TCL file to initialize the if loop:

if {$elems_list != ""} {

Step 6: Initialize a variable which counts the number of times the foreach loop is entered. The variable success_count is initialized and set to 0. This variable is used to count the number of times the foreach loop (defined in Step 7) is entered. We will use this variable at the end of the script. Add the following line to the TCL script: set success_count 0;

Step 7: Use a foreach loop to iterate through each element in the list elems_list and then set a variable config which stores the element configuration. This is extracted using the hm_getentityvalue command and the appropriate data name. Using a foreach loop, each element in the list elems_list will be iterated through. Within the foreach loop, each load is referenced by elem_id and then the variable config is defined. This variable is set to the result of the hm_getentityvalue which uses the element data name config to report the configuration of the element. A tria element will have an element configuration of 103 while a quad element will have a configuration of 104. Add the following 2 lines to the TCL file: foreach elem_id $elems_list { set config [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "config" 0];

Step 8: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable config has a value of 103. If it does, proceed with the macro. Using an if loop, the variable config is checked to see if it doesn’t have a value of 103. A value of 103 means that the element configuration is a tria element. If the value is not equal

Altair Engineering


527

to 103, the continue statement is used to move outside of the foreach loop. If the value is the config variable is 103, then the macro is continued. Add the following lines to the TCL script: if {$config != 103} { continue; }

Step 9: Set 3 variables which contain the node id of each of the nodes used to define the tria element. Three variables are defined (node1, node2, and node3) which represent the 3 nodes that define the tria element. These 3 nodes will be used to create the spline surface. Using the hm_getentityvalue command and the element data names node1, node2, and node3 along with the pointer id, the node id is retrieved and assigned to the appropriate variable. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script: set node1 [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "node1.id" 0]; set node2 [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "node2.id" 0]; set node3 [hm_getentityvalue elems $elem_id "node3.id" 0];

Step 10: Set the appropriate mode to create the surface. Using the *surfacemode command, the surface mode can be set according to the following: 1 – mesh keep surface 2 – mesh delete surface 3 – mesh without surface 4 – surface only In this example, we only want to create a surface, so mode 4 is used. Add the following line to the TCL script: *surfacemode 4;

Step 11: Create a node mark which contains the 3 nodes defined in Step 9 and then use the *splinesurface command to create a spline surface using the nodes in the mark. Using the *createmark, mark 1 for nodes is created and it contains the 3 nodes defined in the variables node1, node2, and node3.

*createmark nodes 1 $node1 $node2 $node3;

528


Altair Engineering

*splinesurface nodes 1 0 1 1;

Step 12: Increase the variable success_count which is used to count the number of times the foreach loop is entered. Then, close the foreach loop. Using the incr command, the variable success_count is increased. Following this command, a } is used to close the foreach loop. Add the following 2 lines to the TCL script: incr success_count; }

Step 13: Clear the node and element marks, and then use the hm_message command to report the number of spline surfaces created. Using the command *clearmark, mark 1 for the nodes and elements is cleared. Following these commands, the hm_message command is used to report the number of spline surfaces created. The variable success_count is used to do this. Because this variable was increased each time the foreach loop was entered and the element configuration was 103, this variable kept a count of the number of spline surfaces that were created. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script: *clearmark nodes 1; *clearmark elems 1; hm_message "$success_count splines created."

Step 14: Add an else statement which compliments the if statement which checked to see if the elems_list variable was empty. If it is empty, the else statement is executed. The else statement compliments the if statement defined in Step 5 which checks to see if the elems_list variable is empty. If it is empty the else statement is executed. Inside the else statement, the hm_errormessage command is used to report to the that no elements were selected. Following the hm_errormessage command, the if statement is closed using a }. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script file: } else { hm_errormessage "No elements selected"; }

Altair Engineering


529


From the menu bar, select File > O pe n > M o de l and then load the file, spline-tcl.hm .

2.

From the menu bar, select Vie w > C o m m a nd W indo w display the Command Window at the bottom of the screen.

3.


4.

Use the source command to execute the script. For example: source HM8070.tcl It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command Window. This allows you to run the Tcl script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can be found in the Cre a t ing T c l Sc ript s a nd Running T c l Sc ript s sections.

5.

Select a few of the tria elements and observe the spline surfaces that are created.

There are several important things to notice. Only first order tria elements are considered. It is possible to add if/elseif logic to other element configurations. The data names for the nodes associated with an element are pointers. A pointer is used to directly access another data name. This means they “point” to the data names available for nodes. In order to retrieve any data from a pointer, the data name requested for the particular pointer must also be supplied. The additional data names are separated by a period or dot (.). The *entityhighlighting and hm_commandfilestate commands are used to speed up the execution of the script. The *entityhighlighting command disables highlighting entities when the *createmark command is used. The hm_commandfilestate command controls if commands are written out to the command file. It is always important to “reset” these commands after a script is complete or before exiting due to an error.

530


Altair Engineering

HM-8080: Calculate the Radius of an Arc In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that determines the radius of an arc.

Tools

The Tcl commands if and expr will be used to add logic and mathematical functions to the script. The command hm_getentityvalue is used to extract information from HyperMesh entities, based on data names. Data names are generic references to the information that physically define an entity in the HyperMesh environment. An example of this is the x, y, and z coordinates that define a node location in three-dimensional space. The available data names for each entity can be found in the HyperMesh Reference Guide Da t a Na m e s topic. Data names are accessed using the hm_getentityvalue command. This command uses the data names available for an entity to return the particular value of interest. The command will return a value that is either a string or a numeric value, depending on the command syntax and the value stored in that particular data name field. The basic syntax of the command is: hm_getentityvalue entity_type id data_name flag where entity_type is the requested entity type (elements, loads, nodes, etc…), id is the entity ID, the data_name is the data field name of interest, and flag is either 0 or 1 depending on whether the command should return a numeric value (0) or a string (1). To retrieve the x-component of a force with ID 12, the following command can be used: set force_x [hm_getentityvalue loads 12 "comp1" 0] Note that to assign the value from the command to a variable, the command is placed within square brackets.

Exercise

Create a Tcl script that determines the radius of a selected arc. One point on the line and the center of the arc will need to be calculated. 1.

Define the process.

2.

Determine the data names to use to extract the node coordinates.

3.


4.

Test the script.

Altair Engineering


531

Step 1: Define the process. The script should automate the following process: Prompt the to select a line. Make sure the has selected only one line. Determine the center of the arc by creating temporary nodes. Calculate the distance between one end of the arc and the center node using node coordinate data names.

Step 2: Determine the data names to use to extract the node coordinates. The following table lists several relevant data names for nodes: globalx

x coordinate in the global system

globaly

y coordinate in the global system

globalz

z coordinate in the global system


Step 3: Open a text file and save the file as HM8080.tcl. Step 4: Allow the to select the desired line which defines a circle or an arc and then add that line to a variable The *createmark command is used to allow the to graphically select the line which defines a circle or an arc from the HyperMesh interface and add it to the mark. The command below adds the line to mark 1. Once the line has been added to mark 1, the line id is assigned to a variable called line_list, using the TCL command set. Add the following 2 lines to the file HM8080.tcl:

*createmark lines 1 "Select line to find radius"; set line_list [hm_getmark lines 1];

532


Altair Engineering

Step 5: Begin an if loop which checks to see if the variable line_list has values. If it does, proceed with the macro. Before continuing with the macro, we should check to make sure that the variable line_list has values in it. This is done by using an if loop. In the if loop below, we are checking to see if the variable line_list is empty. If the variable is empty, an error message is given to the . Also, using the elseif statement in the if loop, we can check to see if more than one line is selected. If more than one line is selected, an error message is reported. If neither of those conditions are met, the macro proceeds under the else statement. Add the following line to the TCL file to define the if loop: if {$line_list == ""} { hm_errormessage "No lines selected"; } elseif {[llength $line_list] != 1} { hm_errormessage "Only one line may be selected"; } else {

Step 6: Create 3 nodes on the line selected and then create a node at the circle center of the 3 nodes. Add those nodes to a variable. Use the *nodecreateonlines command to create 3 nodes on the line which is in mark 1. This is done with the first command below. Then, use the *createcenternode to create a node at the center of a circle formed by the three nodes that were just created in the *nodecreateonlines command. These three nodes are referenced by using -1. -2, and -3 which reference the last node created, the second to last node created, and the third to last node created. Then, the nodes are added to the nodes mark 1 using the *createmark command. Again, the nodes are referenced using -1, -2, -3, and -4 to add the last 4 nodes created to the mark. Finally, the nodes in mark 1 are added to the variable node_list. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script: *nodecreateonlines lines 1 3 0 0; *createcenternode -1 -2 -3; *createmark nodes 1 -1 -2 -3 -4; set node_list [hm_getmark nodes 1];

Step 7: Use the lindex command to get the node id of the first node in the list node_list. Then get the x, y, and z coordinates for the node. Set a variable called id which contains the node id for the first node in the list node_list. The id for the first node is retrieved using the lindex command which takes the variable

Altair Engineering


533

node_list and using the index 0, retrieves the first node id in the list. Then, using the variable id and the hm_getentityvalue command with the node data names x, y, and z, the x, y, and z coordinates for the node are set to the variables x1, y1, and z1. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script: set id [lindex $node_list 0]; set x1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "x" 0]; set y1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "y" 0]; set z1 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "z" 0];

Step 8: Use the lindex command to get the node id of the last node in the list node_list. Then get the x, y, and z coordinates for the node. Set a variable called id which contains the node id for the last node in the list node_list. The id for the first node is retrieved using the lindex command which takes the variable node_list and using the index 3, retrieves the first node id in the list. Then, using the variable id and the hm_getentityvalue command with the node data names x, y, and z, the x, y, and z coordinates for the node are set to the variables x2, y2, and z2. Add the following 4 lines to the TCL script: set id [lindex $node_list 3 ]; set x2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "x" 0]; set y2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "y" 0]; set z2 [hm_getentityvalue nodes $id "z" 0];

Step 9: Define three variables which are the x, y, and z distance between the two nodes defined in the last two steps. Three variables are defined which are simply the x, y, and z distance between the two nodes defined in Steps 7 and 8. The component difference between each node is calculated using the coordinates defined in Steps 7 and 8 and the TCL command expr. Add the following 3 lines to the TCL script: set dx [expr $x1 - $x2]; set dy [expr $y1 - $y2]; set dz [expr $z1 - $z2];

Step 10: Define a variable called radius which uses the variables dx, dy,

534


Altair Engineering

and dz to calculate the radius of the line which is a circle or an arc. Using the three variables which were defined in the previous step (dx, dy, and dz) the magnitude of the distance is calculated. This distance corresponds to the radius of the arc/ circle which is defined by the line selected. To calculate the radius, the expr command is used. Add the following line to the TCL script: set radius [expr sqrt(($dx*$dx) + ($dy*$dy) + ($dz*$dz))];

Step 11: Clear the nodes in the temporary node mark. To clear all the nodes in the temporary node mark, use the *nodecleartempmark command. Add the following command to the TCL script: *nodecleartempmark;

Step 12: Report to the the radius of the selected line. Using the hm_message command, the value of the variable radius is reported to the . Also, close the if loop which was started back in Step 5. Add the following two lines to the TCL script:

hm_message "Radius = $radius"; }

Step 13: Clear the lines and nodes mark. Using the hm_markclear command, the nodes mark and the lines mark are cleared. Add the following two lines to the TCL script:

hm_markclear lines 1; hm_markclear nodes 1;

Step 14: Test the script.

Altair Engineering


535

1.

From the File menu, load the file, radius-tcl.hm.

2.

From the menu bar, select Vie w> C o m m a nd W indo w to display the Command Window at the bottom of the screen.

3.


4.

Use the source command to execute the script. For example: source HM8080.tcl It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the command window. This allows you to run the Tcl script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can be found in the Cre a t ing T c l Sc ript s and Running T c l Sc ript s sections.

5.

Select different lines to review the calculated radius.

Important things to notice. The *entityhighlighting and hm_commandfilestate commands are used to speed up the execution of the script. The *entityhighlighting command disables highlighting entities when the *createmark command is used. The hm_commandfilestate command controls if commands are written out to the command file. It is always important to “reset” these commands after a script is complete or before exiting due to an error.

536


Altair Engineering

HM-8090: Create an OptiStruct PSHELL property In this tutorial you will create a Tcl script that: Prompts the for a property name and thickness Creates the property collector Assigns the OptiStruct PSHELL card image to the property collector Assigns the thickness value to the property

Tools

The Tcl command if will be used to add logic to the script. The commands *dictionaryload and *attributeupdatedouble are used to assign information to the property collector. Solver-specific data created from the HyperMesh template system is stored in card images. Each piece of data that defines a card image has a text string (data name) and a numeric attribute ID. An example is the Young’s Modulus for a material. Templates exist for each solver ed by HyperMesh and are located in sub-folders under the \templates\feoutput directory. These templates define every solverspecific attribute including data names, attribute IDs, card image formats, and the format of the data upon export. The *defineattribute command is used to define attribute data names and IDs in a template file. In order to determine the commands required to create template-specific data, it is best to run through the process in HyperMesh and to review the commands that are written to the command.cmf file. Property collectors can be created and edited using the Model Browser. Simply right click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Pro pe rty to create one. To change the name, color, or card image of a property collector, right click on the property name in the Model Browser and select E dit

Exercise

Create a Tcl script to create a property collector and assign a thickness. This requires that the script prompt the for a name and a thickness value. 1.

Define the process.

2.


3.


Altair Engineering


537

4.


5.


6.

Test the script.

Step 1: Define the process. The script should automate the following process: Prompt the to enter a name and a thickness value. Make sure a property collector with the supplied name does not already exist. Create the new property collector. Assign the PSHELL card image to the property. Assign the thickness to the PSHELL card.

Step 2: Delete the existing command.cmf file. The current command.cmf file is located in the current working directory. When first opening HyperMesh, the file is created in the directory HyperMesh is launched from. As soon as you begin working in HyperMesh, all executed commands are written to the command.cmf file. If the file already exists, the commands are appended to the file. Deleting the file allows HyperMesh to create a new file and allows the to easily find the relevant commands.


If the RADIOSS BulkData profile is not currently loaded, please load it at this time.

2.

Right click in the Model Browser and select C re a te > Pro pe rty .

3.

Leave Type set to all and in the Name field, enter a name for the property.

4.

For card image=, select PSHELL.

5.

Check the option for Card edit property upon creation.

6.

Click C re a te .

7.

Activate the T field and enter a thickness value.

8.

Click re turn.

538


Altair Engineering



2.

Select and copy all lines in the file.

Step 5: Create a Tcl script by converting the commands to Tcl format and modify it as necessary. 1.

Create a new Tcl file using any text editor.

2.

Paste the copied commands from the command.cmf file inside the Tcl file.

3.

Remove all () and , and replace them with spaces. Also place semi-colons (;) at the end of each line. The commands should look something like: *collectorcreateonly properties "my_prop" "" 11; *createmark properties 2 "my_prop"; *dictionaryload properties 2 "C:/Altair/hw12.0/templates/feoutput/ optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL"; *initializeattributes properties “my_prop”; *attributeupdatedouble properties 1 95 1 1 0 0.25;

These commands can now be run to duplicate the creation of the PSHELL property. However, simply running these commands as-is is not very flexible. The property ID, name and values are all hard coded. The template file location in the *dictionaryload command is also hard coded. Finally, there are a lot of extra commands that set unnecessary attributes. 4.

In the *attributeupdatedouble command, the ID of the property is hard coded. In order to make this flexible, you need to replace the hard coded ID with the ID of the new property collector: (Changes to the above commands are shown below in bold print). *collectorcreateonly properties "my_prop" "" 11; *createmark properties 2 -1 set prop_id [hm_getmark props 2]; *dictionaryload properties 2 "C:/Altair/hw12.0/templates/feoutput/ optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL"; *attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 0.25; Supplying an ID of -1 to the *createmark command can be used to select the most recently created entity.

5.

The template file path is also hard coded. You can make this flexible using the hm_info command:

Altair Engineering


539

*collectorcreateonly properties "my_prop" "" 11; *createmark properties 2 "my_prop"; set prop_id [hm_getmark props 2]; *dictionaryload properties 2 "[hm_info -appinfo SPECIFIEDPATH TEMPLATES_DIR]/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL"; *attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 0.25; The also needs to be prompted to enter a property name and thickness value. You can then substitute those variables in the relevant commands: set prop_name [hm_getstring "Name="]; set prop_thick [hm_getfloat "Thickness="]; *collectorcreateonly properties "$prop_name" "" 11; *createmark properties 2 "$prop_name"; set prop_id [hm_getmark props 2]; *dictionaryload properties 2 "[hm_info -appinfo SPECIFIEDPATH TEMPLATES_DIR]/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL"; *attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 $prop_thick;

6.

Finally, You need to add logic to test in order to make sure that the property name and thickness values are valid: set prop_name [hm_getstring "Name="]; if {$prop_name == ""} { hm_errormessage "No name specified."; return; } elseif {[hm_entityinfo exist properties $prop_name –byname] == 1} { hm_errormessage "Property already exists."; return; } set prop_thick [hm_getfloat "Thickness="]; if {$prop_thick == "" || $prop_thick <= 0.0} { hm_errormessage "Invalid thickness value specified."; return; } *collectorcreateonly properties "$prop_name" "" 11; *createmark properties 2 "$prop_name"; set prop_id [hm_getmark props 2]; *dictionaryload properties 2 "[hm_info -appinfo SPECIFIEDPATH

540


Altair Engineering

TEMPLATES_DIR]/feoutput/optistruct/optistruct" "PSHELL"; *attributeupdatedouble properties $prop_id 95 1 1 0 $prop_thick;


From the menu bar, select Vie w > C o m m a nd W indo w to display the Command Window at the bottom of the screen.

2.

Click and drag to open the Command Window from the top or bottom edge of the screen.

3.

Use the source command to execute the script. For example: source filename.tcl

It is often necessary to debug Tcl scripts using the Command window. This allows you to run the Tcl script and easily review error messages, as well as print out debug information. Additional details can be found in the Cre a t ing T c l Sc ript s and Running T c l Sc ript s sections.

Altair Engineering


541

Post-Processing HM-9000: Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis HM-9010: Free Body Diagram

542


Altair Engineering

HM-9000: Exporting Data for Fatigue Analysis This tutorial demonstrates how to write an input file for a given fatigue solver using the options available on the Fatigue .

Step 1: Retrieve the model file. For this tutorial, retrieve the file, keyhole.hm. This file contains a finite element (FE) model— for which an analysis has already been conducted—to obtain the stress/strain information for durability loads of interest. 1. From the menu bar, select File > O pe n > M o de l. 2. Retrieve the keyhole.hm file.

Step 2: Load the results file. 1.

From the menu bar, select File > Lo a d > R e s ults .

2.

Browse for the keyhole.res file.

Step 3: Export data and write a fatigue solver input deck. 1.

From the Post page, enter the Fatigue .

2.

Toggle FE Analysis Type: to s ta tic/ m o da l. Results contained in keyhole.res were obtained from linear statics analysis. Note: Select the tra ns ie nt dy na m ic option if a dynamic finite element analysis was used to obtain the stress/strain results for the model.

3.

Toggle Output File Format: to a s cii. Note: Select the bina ry option if the fatigue solver allows a binary input file. For more information on fatigue solvers and acceptable input file formats, please see the Fatigue in the Pa ne ls Online He lp.

4.

Click bro ws e and locate the file folder you want store the file in, then enter a name for the output file. This output file is the input file for the fatigue solver.

5.

Click da ta gro up = and select any of the data groups that you want to write to the output file.

Altair Engineering


543

The data groups are organized based on whether nodal or elemental results are available in the results file. Note: For more information on how HyperMesh organizes the analysis results available in the results file, please see the Fatigue in the Pa ne ls Online he lp. 6.

Set select simulation: to a ll. This specifies the data in the results file that is written to the output file. In this case, selecting a ll writes the stress/strain data for the selected nodes or elements for all loadcases represented in keyhole.res. Note: You can write out stress/strain information for a ll of the time steps, or you can choose a ra nge from a starting time step to an ending time step, or you can choose a s e le ctio n of time steps manually from the available list. The next sub-step is to select the entities for which the finite element analysis results file is written. Note: The type of entity you select is based upon the data group you selected. Select no de s if the data group you selected refers to nodal results. Similarly, select e le m e nts if the data group you selected refers to elemental results. Select s e ts to choose a predefined entity set comprised of nodes or elements corresponding to a data group with nodal/elemental results, respectively. If the data group results and the entity type are not the same, HyperMesh displays the error message, "Re sult s file doe sn’t c ont a in noda l v a lue s."

7.

Set the selector to e le m s .

8.

Click e le m s > > by windo w.

9.

Draw the window as shown in the following image.

10.

Click inte rio r.

11.


544


Altair Engineering

12.

Click write . An ASCII file is written to the selected directory. You can read this file into the appropriate fatigue solver to complete the fatigue analysis.

Altair Engineering


545

HM-9010: Free Body Diagram In this tutorial, you will learn how to: Understand applications for and be able to extract resultant forces and moments from HyperMesh free body diagram (FBD) capabilities, including defining cross-sections for which resultant forces and moments are calculated Perform free body diagrams within HyperMesh to understand load paths and export free body loads to detailed models of interest as boundary conditions (BCs) within a submodeling scheme. This process is graphically shown for reference, following.

Global loads model of a generic wing.

Spar2 element set from the global loads model (middle Spar) with free body loads extracted.

546


Altair Engineering

Detailed model of Spar2 with free body loads applied as BC s from global loads model.

Exercises This tutorial contains the following exercises: Exercise 1: Creating Shear Moment Diagrams and Potato Plots from Global Loads Model using Resultant Force and Moment Functionality Exercise 2: Extracting Free Body Loads from Global Loads Model and Transfering to Detailed Model as Boundary Conditions - Submodeling Techniques

Exercise 1: Creating of Shear Moment Diagrams and Potato Plots from Global Loads Model using Resultant Force and Moment Functionality This exercise uses the model file, icw_ex1.hm.

Step 1: Create a coordinate system for spar2. 1.

Open HyperMesh and load the model file, icw_ex1.hm.

2.

Load the R AD IO SS ( B ulkD a ta ) profile: 1. In the Standard toolbar, click Lo a d Us e r Pro file (

) tool.

2. Toggle to RADIOSS and select B ulkD a ta from the pull-down menu. 3. 3.

Click O K. From the menu bar, select To o ls > Se t B ro ws e r. Since you will be working with Spar2 you will need to display the elements which represent Spar2 in the graphics area. Element sets, in addition to components and assemblies, can be used as a model grouping and visualization tool. Elements sets can be created, deleted, made visible, and hidden using Se t B ro ws e r.

Altair Engineering


547

4.

In the Sets tab, expand the E le m e nts folder.

5.

Right-click Spa r2 element set, and select Is o la te . Elements that represent Spar2 are now displayed in the graphics area. To turn on element shading, from the Visualization toolbar, click Sha de d E le m e nts a nd M e s h

Line s (

).

6.

To create nodes on the left end of Spar2, from the menu bar, select G e o m e try > C re a te > No de s > Inte rpo la te No de s to go to the Nodes .

7.

Select the nodes on the top and bottom of the left side, and click cre a te .

8.

Repeat step 1.7 for the right side of Spar2.

9.

Click re turn to exit the Nodes .

10.

From the menu bar, click G e o m e try > C re a te > Sy s te m s > Axis D ire ctio n.

11.

To create a system with origin at the left end and x-axis along the length of the spar, go to the create by axis direction sub.

12.

Click o rigin and select the left-middle node (from step 1.7).

13.

Select the right-middle node (from step 1.8) for x-axis node.

548


Altair Engineering

14.

Select the left-top node for the xy-plane node.

15.

Toggle to re cta ngula r, and click cre a te .

16.

Click re turn to exit the Systems .

Step 2: Create cross-section definitions for Spar2. 1.

From the menu bar, select Po s t > Fre e B o dy > C ro s s - Se ctio n to open the FBD Crosssection Manager tab. Cross-section definitions are determined by the following criteria: An element set that contains the nodes that define the cross-section and determines which "side" the resultant force and moment vectors are to be calculated. Only elements connected to the nodes that define the cross-section, on one side or the other, need to be included in the element set. However, additional elements can be included for visualization purposes with no effect on the calculations. A node set that defines the cross-section geometry. A summation node that can be any node in the model or that can be automatically set to the calculated centroid of the defined cross-section. Centroidal calculations are performed using nodal coordinates that make up the cross-section only, hence element thicknesses associated with the elements attached to the section are not considered.

Altair Engineering


549

As such, there could be slight differences in the calculated centroid and the "true" centroid of the section if thicknesses vary throughout the section or the section is overly idealized. (Optional) A result system that defines the coordinate system for which the resultant force and moment vectors are transformed into and output for the selected crosssection(s). 2.

In the FDB Cross-section Manager , click the arrow for Adv a nce d o ptio ns to display the Auto create cross-section form. You will use this form to create cross-sections along the length of Spar2. Resultant force and moment extractions will be performed on these cross-sections to obtain the necessary data to generate shear moment diagrams and potato plots. There are two options to define cross-sections: a manual method and an advanced method. The advanced method automates the creation of "continuous" cross-sections. The advanced method will be used in this tutorial. See the online help for details about the manual method.

3.

Click E le m e nts twice, and then select all elements that make up Spar2.

4.

Click pro ce e d.

5.

Click No de s twice, select the left-top and left-bottom nodes which define the first

550


Altair Engineering

cross-section for Spar2. 6.

Click pro ce e d.

7.

In the Element set prefix field, enter Spar2_E and in Node set prefix, enter Spar2_N. Since the cross-section manager utility creates the necessary element and node sets, you must define a prefix string for both element and node sets. This string will be appended by an incremental number to give each created set a unique name. Optional input includes numbering offset which defines an initial number for which the appended set numbers will begin.

8.

that the Se ts a ccum ula te box is selected.

9.

Click Acce pt. The spreadsheet populates with the definitions of the cross-sections generated by the Auto cre a te cro s s - s e ctio ns utility.

Altair Engineering


551

10.

Click Adv a nce d o ptio ns to close the Auto create cross-sections form.

11.

Select the D is pla y s e ctio ns check box and then select any section in the spreadsheet to review the selected cross-section. The graphics area will be updated with the element set, node set, sum node, and result system that define the selected cross-section. Optionally, if you select the Sho w m o de l check box, the entire model will be visible in the graphics area with the selected cross-section highlighted in red and the remainder of the model transparent.

12.

Select the first cross-section in the spreadsheet (Spar2_E1; Spar2_N1), hold SHIFT, and select the last cross-section (Spar2_E8; Spar2_N9) to select the cross-sections for updating their result system. To update any single or multiple cross-sections, select the cross-sections from the spreadsheet using CTRL/SHIFT and then select Sum m a tio n No de or R e s ult Sy s te m to update these definitions for all selected cross-sections.

13.

Click R e s ult Sy s te m twice.

552


Altair Engineering

14.

Select the system located at the left-middle end of Spar2 (system 102 created in Step 1), and click pro ce e d. Note: You may have to display the Lo nge ro n2 system collector from the Model Browser (Model tab) to display system 102. All cross-sections update to result system 102. Note that system 102 has the x-axis along the length of the spar, y-axis located at the neutral axis of the beam in the plane of the web, and z-axis perpendicular to the web of the beam. Also note that the sum node is set to the default ce ntro id, which automatically calculates the centroid of each cross-section and at which the resulting resultant force and moment calculations will be performed. The result system is the system for which all resultant force and moment result vectors will be transformed into and output.

15.

Click C lo s e to exit the FBD Cross-Section Manager utility.

Step 3: Extract resultant force and moment data for all cross-sections of Spar2 for all load cases. 1.

From the menu bar, select Po s t > Fre e B o dy > R e s ulta nt Fo rce a nd M o m e nt to open the Resultant Force and Moment tab.

2.

From the .op2 file browser, select icw.op2. The selected .op2 file loads into the HyperMesh database for use with all FBD utilities until another .op2 file is selected. It also populates the Subcases list box with all subcases in the selected .op2 file that contain Grid Point Force (GPFORCE) data. See the FBD documentation in the HyperMesh 's Guide for more details.

3.

In the Loadsteps list, select all the loadsteps using the filter buttons on the top of the list box or with CTRL/SHIFT.

4.

In the Cross-sections list, select all Spar2 cross-sections previously defined using the filter buttons on the top of the list box or with CTRL/SHIFT.

5.

Review the following table for a description of the Output options for the resultant force and moment utility.

Altair Engineering


553

Function

Description

Coordinate System

Defines the coordinate system used for output of node locations (x,y,z) only. The coordinate system does not affect the transformation of the resultant force and moment vector results, which is defined by the result system on each cross-section definition.

Zero tolerance

Defines any number less than this number is set to zero for numerical issues.

Create load collectors

Creates load collectors containing the results of the resultant force and moment calculations so that the results can be visualized in the graphics area as force and moment vectors.

Show summary table

Brings up a window with formatted results similar to the .csv (comma separated) file. Use this output for quick checks of the data without having to open an alternative spreadsheet or text editor program.

Create .csv file

Creates a .csv file with the results of the resultant force and moment calculations, which can be opened directly within standard spreadsheet applications.

Create .fbd file

Creates an .fbd file with the results of the resultant force and moment calculations, which can be directly read into HyperGraph to create shear moment diagrams and potato plots.

6.

Click C o o rdina te s y s te m twice.

7.

Select coordinate system 102 which is located at left-middle end of Spar2, and then click pro ce e d. Note: You may have to display the Lo nge ro n2 system collector from the Model Browser (Model tab) to display system 102.

554


Altair Engineering

8.

Set Zero tolerance to 0.01.

9.

Activate the C re a te lo a d co lle cto rs check box and optionally select a default color for the created load collectors.

10.

Activate the Sho w s um m a ry ta ble check box.

11.

Activate the C re a te .cs v file check box, and click s e le ct fro m lis t. ( ) to select an existing .csv file (append data) or enter a new file name; in this case, enter icw_res_force_moment.csv.

12.

Activate the C re a te .fbd file check box, and click s e le ct fro m lis t. ( ) to select an existing .fbd file (append data) or enter a new file name; in this case, enter icw_res_force_moment.fbd. By default, files are put into the HyperMesh start directory unless you specify another directory or enter a file name.

13.

Click Acce pt to execute the resultant force and moment calculations on all selected cross-sections for all selected subcases. The Resultant Force and Moment Output Summary window displays the resultant force and moment calculations (see the following image). For each cross-section, there is a separate data block grouped by loadstep. The data block contains cross-section nodal forces, moments, and the sum of those nodal forces and moments about the defined sum node, in this case the calculated centroid of the cross-section. Note that the sum of the moment components (Mx, My, Mz) for each node is not the direct sum, as the (rXF) for the force resultant vector about the sum node must also be added to each moment component appropriately. The sum of the forces components (Fx, Fy, Fz) for each node is, however, the simple sum.

Altair Engineering


555

14.

(Optional) Open the .csv (comma separated) file directly with Microsoft Excel by using Windows Explorer and double-clicking the file, icw_res_force_moment.csv. This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but is available for import into standard spreadsheet or text editor programs.

15.

(Optional) Open the .fbd file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd, in any standard text editor program. By default, files are put into the HyperMesh start directory unless you specify another directory or enter a file name. This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but in a compact format for use with HyperGraph in generating shear moment diagrams and potato plots of resultant force and moment data for various cross-sections.

16.

Click C lo s e to exit the R e s ulta nt Fo rce a nd M o m e nt utility. Vector review of the Resultant Force and Moment results in the graphics area is covered in the next step.

Step 4: Use FBD Results Manager to review resultant force and moment vectors in graphics area. 1.

From the menu bar, select Po s t > Fre e B o dy R e s ults M a na ge r to open the FBD

556


Altair Engineering

Results Manager tab. 2.

Click E le m e nt Se t twice.

3.

Click s e t, and select Spa r2_E 2.

4.

Click pro ce e d.

5.

In the FDB Results Manager window, activate the Sho w m o de l check box to display the entire model with the selected element set highlighted in red and all other elements transparent. This feature will help you easily locate the element set within the model.

6.

For Results type, select R e s ulta nt Fo rce a nd M o m e nt. This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with resultant force and moment results and populates the Lo a ds te ps : list box.

7.

For Loadsteps, select SUB C ASE 1. This operation scans the database for available node sets with resultant force and moment results and populates the No de s e ts : list box.

8.

For Node sets, select Spa r2_N3. This operation will scan the database for available force and moment vector results and will enable the check boxes for those force and moment vectors which are available.

9.

For Display options, select Fy (shear—the results coordinate system had y-axis in the plane of the web) and M z (principal bending moment—the results coordinate system had z-axis perpendicular to the plane of the web). To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use the FBD Cross-Section Manager to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element set, node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section. Optionally, select other force components to review their magnitude and direction in the graphics area. Single or multiple force and moment vector results can be displayed in the graphics area to facilitate data mining and reporting.

10.

(Optional) Select Upda te lo a d co lle cto r co lo r and select co lo r to change the color of the selected load vectors. The new color setting applies only to the load components selected and is saved in the database. Therefore, this option can be used to recolor any single or multiple load vectors for any FBD result.

11.

Click Acce pt to visualize the resultant force and moment vectors in the graphics area.

12.

(Optional) Continue to review resultant force and moment vectors following Steps 4.24.14 for additional cross-sections.

13.

Click R e s e t to clear the display and reset the form.

14.

Click C lo s e to exit FBD Results Manager.

Altair Engineering


557

Step 5: Generate potato plots for Spar2 for selected cross-sections. 1.

Click the Add Pa ge

2.

On the toolbar, use the pull-down menu to switch to the HyperGraph 2D client.

3.

From the menu bar, select To o ls > Fre e B o dy D ia gra m s > Po ta to Plo t to open the Potato Plot dialog.

4.

Click fbd file (

to create a new page.

) to load the file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd.

The available cross-sections and loadstpes within the .fbd file are loaded into the form. 5.

From the Sections list, select cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 as the cross-section for which to generate potato plots. Potato plots generate a single plot for each selected cross-section which contains data points for all selected loadsteps Potato plots effectively "take a slice" through shear moment diagrams at a given cross-section for all selected loadsteps. Since Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 is the wing root section for Spar2, it will be the largest loaded section and hence can be utilized to determine the critical loadsteps for Spar2. Potato plots can facilitate critical loadstep determination by identifying maximum and minimum loads on given cross-section. In this case, you are going to be interested in identifying maximum and minimum shear and moment forces, Fy and Mz respectively. There are other methods for determining critical loadsteps and standard practices and methods should be examined and utilized.

6.

From the Loadsteps list, select all loadsteps using filter buttons next to the list box or using CTRL/SHIFT.

7.

On the Potato Plots tab, for X component select Fy (shear).

558


Altair Engineering

8.

For Y Component, select M z (principal bending moment).

9.

Click Add plo t. Note: you can add additional potato plots by selecting alternative X and Y components and clicking Add Plo t. You can also delete defined plots by selecting the plots from the spreadsheet area and clicking D e le te Plo ts .

10.

(Optional) On the Plot Titles tab, enter a Title and Subtitle .

11.

On the Plot Options tab, for Reverse sign select cross-section Spa r2_E 1_Spa r2_N1 in the top drop-down list.

12.

Select R e v e rs e s e le cte d s e ctio n in the bottom drop-down list. The explanation for the reverse cross-section options is discussed in Step 6.11.

13.

Activate the Label points: Lo a ds te p check box.

14.

Click Apply to generate the requested potato plots. Since one cross-section was selected, one plot will be generated (one for each crosssection). Potato plots are typically used to determine the loadsteps from which maximum/minimum behavior occurs. From the resulting potato plot of cross-section Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1 it can be determined that maximum/minimum loadsteps for shear and moment are SUBCASES 9, 11, 14, and 16. These critical loadsteps will be considered in future submodeling procedures as a subset of all the loadsteps used to design the spar. FBD forces will be extracted from these loadsteps in Exercise #2 and applied to a detailed model of Spar2 so that FBD analysis and design of the spar can be performed.

Step 6: Generate shear moment diagrams for Spar2 for selected subcases. 1.

Click the Add Pa ge

Altair Engineering

to create a new page.


559

2.

From the menu bar, select To o ls > Fre e B o dy D ia gra m s > She a r M o m e nt Plo t to open the Shear Moment Plot .

3.

Click fbd file (

) to load the file, icw_res_force_moment.fbd.

The available cross-sections and loadsteps within the .fbd file are loaded into the form. 4.

From the Sections list, select all sections related to Spar2 (Spar2_E1_Spar_N1 through Spar2_E8_Spar2_N9) using filter buttons next to the list box or using CTRL/SHIFT.

5.

From the Loadsteps list, select SUB C ASE 9, SUB C ASE 11, SUB C ASE 14, and SUB C ASE 16 the critical loadsteps determined in Step 6.5.

6.

On the VMT Plots tab, for X component select X . The (X) X component is selected because the resultant force and moment extraction coordinate system was performed with coordinate system 102 which has the x-axis along the length of the Spar. Options for X component include X, Y, or Z coordinates as defined from the coordinate system selected to perform the resultant force and moment extraction (Step 3, part 6).

7.

On the VMT Plots tab, for Y component select Fy and M z to plot the shear and principal bending moment for Spar2. To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use FB D C ro s s - Se ctio n M a na ge r to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element set, node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section and can help in identifying which components of force or moment are required for the desired plot.

8.

(Optional) On the Plot Titles tab, type a Title and Subtitle .

9.

On the Plot Options tab, for Reverse sign select cross-section Spa r2_E 1_Spa r2_N1 in the top drop-down list.

10.

Select R e v e rs e s e le cte d s e ctio n in the bottom drop-down list. The option allows for methods to reverse the sign of the results from any single or multiple cross-sections. The option is useful since, for this particular plot, all crosssections were defined coming from the right. However the first section [Spar2_E1_Spar2_N1], since it has no elements to the left of this cross-section, can only be defined from the left. Cross-sections, defined by the nodes and elements within their respective sets, can be defined coming from the left or right depending on the elements chosen for any given nodal cross-section definition. Therefore any given cross-section can be defined from the left or from the right. The only difference in the results defined either way is that the results will be opposite in sign but equal in magnitude. Either way, for a shear moment diagram, it is important that all selected cross-sections be defined coming from the same direction so that the resulting plot is valid.

11.

that the Envelop results check box is deactivated. If you only want the maximum/minimum selected Y components to be plotted from all selected loadsteps for each cross-section, activate the e nv e lo p check box. For this tutorial, do not activate this check box.

560


Altair Engineering

12.

For Layout, select the layout of plots desired. This option affects the number of resulting plots that will be generated. The options are: One plot per loadstep, One plot per Y Component, and One curve per plot. The total number of curves that are generated is always (Curves = number or loadsteps * number of Y components). In this example, since you selected four loadsteps and two Y components, there are a total of eight curves that will be extracted. The number of plots that these eight curves will be displayed on depends on the layout selection. With the option One Plot per loadstep, there are four plots since there are four loadsteps; each plot with both selected Y components, or in this case shear and moment on a single plot for each loadstep. The results of this layout option are shown in first picture, following. With the option, One Plot per Y component, there are two plots since there are two Y components, each plot with all four selected loadsteps, or in this case shear on one plot and moment on another plot for all four selected loadsteps. The results of this layout option are shown in the second picture, following. Try both options.

13.

Click Apply to generate the shear moment plots. These plots can be used with traditional mechanics of materials calculations such as S = My/I and T = VQ/IT to calculate stresses for various cross-sections. The plots provide the M (bending or Mz) and V (shear or Fy) values to these equations which when coupled with cross-section properties which can be calculated using HyperBeam (from the main menu, select the 1D page, then select H y pe rB e a m ), allows for the calculation of the cross-section stresses.

Altair Engineering


561

Exercise 2: Extracting Free Body Diagrams from Global Loads Model and Transferring to Detailed Model as Boundary Conditions – Submodeling Techniques This exercise uses the model file, icw_ex2.hm.

Step 1: Extract free body diagrams for Spar2 using FB D Fo rce s utility. 1.

If continuing from Exercise 1, proceed; otherwise open HyperMesh and load the model file, icw_ex2.hm.

2.

From the menu bar select Po s t > Fre e B o dy > Fo rce to open the FBD Forces tab.

3.

If the icw.op2 file is currently loaded, proceed; otherwise, from the .op2 file: browser, select icw.op2. The selected .op2 file loads into the HyperMesh database for use with all FBD utilities

562


Altair Engineering

until another .op2 file is selected. It also populates the Subcases list box with all subcases in the selected .op2 file that contain Grid Point Force (GPFORCE) data. See the FBD documentation in the HyperMesh 's Guide for more details. 4.

In the Loadsteps list, select SUB C ASE 9, SUB C ASE 11, SUB C ASE 14, and SUB C ASE 16 , the critical subcases determined in Exercise 1, Step 5.

5.

In the Entity selection area, click E le m e nt Se t twice.

6.

Click s e t, then select the Spa r2 element set.

7.

Click pro ce e d. Elements that represent Spar2 are now displayed in the graphics area. To turn on element shading, click Sha de d E le m e nts a nd M e s h Line s (

8.

).

Click R e s ult Sy s te m twice. The graphic area is updated with all systems in the model.

9.

Select the system located at the left-middle end of Spar2 (system 102 created in Exercise 1, Step 1), and click pro ce e d. Note: You may have to display the Lo nge ro n2 system collector from the Model Browser to display system 102. The result system is the system for which all free body force and moment result vectors will be transformed into and output.

10.

Click Sum m a tio n No de twice, select the left-bottom node, and then click pro ce e d. This summation node is the node for which all free body force and moment vector results will be summed about to generate a single equivalent resultant force and moment vector. Note that for a free body (all loads), the summation about any point must be zero. Therefore, this feature is typically used to that the extraction produced a free body with zero summation. However, if a free body other than (all loads) is performed, the selection of the summation node can be used to determine the equivalent resultant force and moment vector for the extracted free body (applied load only or reaction loads only) which in general will not be zero and can be of interest.

Altair Engineering


563

Review the following table for a description of the O utput o ptio ns for the FB D Fo rce s utility.

564

Output Function

Description

FBD type

Defines the types of grid point forces (GPFORCE) to consider in the free body extraction. GPFORCE data available at any given node includes, element, applied, SPC, and MPC forces. FBD types include; All lo a ds (which considers all GPFORCE data), Applie d lo a ds o nly (which only considers applied forces only), and R e a ctio n lo a ds o nly (which considers SPC and MPC forces only).

Zero tolerance

Defines any number less than this number is set to zero for numerical issues.

Create load collectors

Creates load collectors containing the results of the FBD force calculations so that the results can be visualized in the graphics area as force and moment vectors.

Show summary table

This option brings up a window with formatted results similar to the .csv (comma separated)file. Use this output for quick checks of the data without having to open an alternative spreadsheet or text editor program.

Create .csv file

Creates a .csv file with the results of the resultant force and moment calculations, which can be opened directly within any standard spreadsheet applications.


Altair Engineering

11.

For FB D ty pe , select All Lo a ds .

12.

For Z e ro to le ra nce , type 0.01.

13.

Activate C re a te lo a d co lle cto rs and optionally select a default color for the created load collectors.

14.

Activate Sho w s um m a ry ta ble .

15.

Activate C re a te .cs v file , browse to the desired location, and type icw_fbd_force.csv .

16.

Click Acce pt to execute the FBD forces calculations for all selected subcases. The FB D Fo rce s O utput Sum m a ry window displays the FBD forces calculations (see following image). There is a separate data block grouped by loadstep. The data block contains free body nodal forces, moments, and the sum of those nodal forces and moments about the defined sum node. Note that the sum of the moment components (Mx, My, Mz) for each node is not the direct sum as the (rXF) for the force resultant vector about the sum node must also be added to each moment component appropriately. The sum of the forces components (Fx, Fy, Fz) for each node is, however, the simple sum. In addition, the sum for a Fre e B o dy All Lo a ds result should be, and is, zero about any sum node selected. You can this with the SUM line at the bottom of each data block. For other FBD types, however, the sum about the sum node may or may not be zero, depending on the selections.

17.

(Optional) Open the icw_fbd_forces.csv file directly with Microsoft Excel by doubleclicking the file in Windows Explorer. This file contains the same results as the summary table in the previous image, but is available for import into standard spreadsheet or text editor programs.

Altair Engineering


565

18.

Click C lo s e to exit the FBD Forces utility. Vector review of the FBD forces results in the graphics area is covered in the next step.

Step 2: Use FBD Results Manager to review FBD force vectors in graphics area. 1.

From the menu bar, select Po s t, then Fre e B o dy R e s ults M a na ge r to open the FBD Results Manager tab.

2.


3.

Click s e t, then check Spa r2.

4.

Click s e le ct.

5.

Click pro ce e d.

6.

(Optional) Activate the Sho w m o de l check box to display the entire model with the selected element set highlighted in red and all other elements transparent. This feature will help you easily locate the element set within the model.

7.

For Results type, select FB D Fo rce s

All Lo a ds .

This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with FB D Fo rce s results and populates the Lo a ds te ps list box. 8.

All Lo a ds

For Loadsteps, select SUB C ASE 9. This operation will scan the database for available force and moment vector results and will enable the check boxes for those force and moment vectors that are available.

9.

For Display options, select Fy (shear—the results coordinate system had y-axis in the plane of the web). To determine the result coordinate system applied to a given cross-section of interest, use FB D C ro s s - Se ctio n M a na ge r to review the defined cross-section. This operation will show the element set, node set, results system, and sum node defined for the selected cross-section. Optionally, select other force components to review their magnitude and direction in the graphics area. Single or multiple force and moment vector results can be displayed in the graphics area to facilitate data mining and reporting.

10.

(Optional) Select Upda te lo a d co lle cto r co lo r and select co lo r to change the color of the selected load vectors. The new color setting applies only to the load components selected and are saved in the database. Therefore, this option can be used to recolor any single or multiple load vectors for any FBD result.

11.

Click Acce pt to make visible the FBD force vectors in the graphics area.

12.

(Optional) Continue to review FB D Fo rce s All Lo a d v e cto r re s ults following steps 2.6 – 2.13 for additional loadsteps and force/moment components.

566


Altair Engineering

13.

Click R e s e t to clear the display and reset the form.

14.

Click C lo s e to exit the FBD Results Manager utility.

Step 3: Use FBD Export Manager to export FBD Forces to .fem file. 1.

From the menu bar, select Po s t, then Fre e B o dy E xpo rt M a na ge r to open the FBD Export Manger tab.

2.


3.

Click s e t, then select Spa r2.

4.

Click pro ce e d.

5.

For Results type, select FB D Fo rce s

All Lo a ds .

This operation scans the database for available loadsteps with FBD Forces – All Loads results and populates the Loadsteps list box. 6.

For Loadsteps, Select SUB C ASE 9, SUB C ASE 11, SUB C ASE 14, SUB C ASE 16.

7.

Check the options for C re a te a ppro pria te lo a ds te ps , and for O utput file , browse to the desired location and enter spar2_fbd_forces.fem.

8.

Click Add to E xpo rt. This operation turns on the display of all load collectors associated with the currently selected FBD result type for all selected loadsteps. Additional loadsteps can be selected and accepted, which will append to the current display on each click of a cce pt. In addition, a new element set or FBD result type can be selected and appended to the current display on each click of a cce pt. To clear the display click R e s e t.

9.

Click E xpo rt. This operation will export the currently displayed loads and all other associated/required cards to the output file selected. This file can subsequently be imported into another HyperMesh database (typically called the detailed model) and the loads contained

Altair Engineering


567

therein can be "attached" to the structure of the detailed model as boundary conditions with the addition of a rigid body constraint. This process will be carried out in the next step. 10.

Click R e s e t. This operation clears the current display.

11. Click C lo s e to exit the FBD Export Manager utility. 12.

(Optional) On the File menu, click Sa v e a s icw_final.hm.

13.

From the menu bar, select File , then E xit to exit HyperMesh.

, and save the HyperMesh database as

Step 4: Import FBD forces from .fem file into detailed model and solve. 1.

Load the model file, spar2_ex2.hm.

2.

From the menu bar, select File > Im po rt > So lv e r D e ck to open the Import tab.

3.

Select File type: R AD IO SS (B ulk D a ta ), and browse for file : spar2_fbd_forces.fem.

4.

Click Im po rt. This operation imports the free body loads from the global model into the detailed model of Spar2. The next process is to "attach" the free body loads to the detailed model, perform some clean-up operations, define new loadsteps with the free body loads and a rigid body constraint, and solve the detailed model. This process will be accomplished in the remainder of this step.

5.

From the menu bar, select M e s h, then C he ck, then No de s , then E quiv a le nce to go to the Edges . The nodes of the imported loads are equivalenced with those of the detailed model which are overlaying each other as a consequence of importing the free body loads.

6.

Toggle the selector from co m ps to e le m s .

7.

Click e le m s > > dis pla y e d.

8.

Click pre v ie w e quiv . Eighteen nodes should be found, one at each load.

9.

Click e quiv a le nce to combine nodes that were imported and attached to the loads with those that are a part of the detailed mesh of Spar2. Note that when the detailed Spar2 mesh was constructed, attention to where these interface nodes were located was taken into by placing fixed points on the surfaces at these locations. The fixed points maintain a node at that location from the automesher and thus guarantee that a node will exist where a load is located. This method is only one of several potential methods. Other options could include importing the loads which do not line up with any other nodes in the detailed mesh and then connecting the loads to the detailed mesh with R-type elements (RBE2 or RBE3).

568


Altair Engineering

Several other possibilities could also exist and best methods and practices should be considered depending on the problem type. 10.

Click re turn to exit the Edges .

11.

Click D e le te

12.

Click co m ps .

13.

Select Te m pM a s s .

14.

Click s e le ct.

15.

Click de le te e ntity to delete the TempMass component entity.

16.

Click re turn to exit the Delete .

17.

On the Model tab, select the Lo a dC o lle cto r folder, right-click to bring up the context sensitive menu, and select H ide to remove all loads from the graphics area.

18.

To define a rigid body constraint perform the following:

to open the Delete .

Create a load collector for the rigid body constraint definition. From the menu bar, select C o lle cto rs , then C re a te , then Lo a d C o lle cto rs to to open the Create Load Collector dialog box. In the Name field enter Const. Select co lo r red. Set Card Image to no ne . Click cre a te . Note: this operation sets the current load collector to the newly created Const load collector. The current load collector is the collector which any newly created load (constrains in this case) are placed into. Assign an analysis system to the nodes for which the rigid body constraint will be applied. From the menu bar, select M e s h, then As s ign, then No de Ana ly s is Sy s te m to go to the Sy s te m s : As s ign sub. Select the three nodes highlighted in the following image. Click s y s te m . Select system 102 on left-middle end (x-axis along length, y-axis along web, z-axis normal to web). Note: You may have to display the Longeron2 system collector from the Model browser (Model tab) to display system 102. Click s e t dis pla ce m e nt. Click re turn to exit the Systems .

Altair Engineering


569

Assign a constraint to left-bottom node. From the menu bar, select B C s , then C re a te , then C o ns tra ints to go to the Constraints . Select the left-bottom node. Select do f1, do f2, and do f3. Make sure all other dofs are unselected. Click cre a te . Select the left-top node. Select do f1 and do f3. Make sure all other dofs are unselected. Click cre a te . Select the right-bottom node. Select do f3. Make sure all other dofs are unselected. Click cre a te . Click re turn to exit the Constraints . 19.

To update the loadsteps for all four free body load cases, perform the following: From the menu bar, select Se tup, then E dit, then Lo a dSte ps to go to the LoadSteps . Click na m e = and select SUB C ASE 9. Toggle type to line a r s ta tic. Select SPC , click = , and select C o ns t load collector. Click upda te . Repeat steps for SUBCASE 11, SUBCASE 14, and SUBCASE 16.

20.

From the menu bar, select Se tup > C re a te > C o ntro l C a rds to go to the Control

570


Altair Engineering

Cards . 21.

Click FO R M AT.

22.

For num be r_o f_fo rm a ts enter 2, and then hit ENTER on the keyboard. There are now two FO R M AT buttons.

23.

Click each FO R M AT button and set them to H M and O UTPUT2, respectively.

24.

Click re turn to specify output file formats for HyperMesh .res (HM) and .op2 which can be used in HyperView to post-process the results.

25.

Click GLOBAL_OUTPUT_REQUEST

26.

Click D ISPLAC E M E NT and STR E SS.

27.

Click re turn to request displacement output for both output formats.

28.

Click re turn to exit the Control Cards .

29.

From the menu bar, select File > Sa v e As spar2_ex2_analysis.hm.

30.

From the Analysis page, click R a dio s s to run the model.

31.

For run o ptio ns , toggle to a na ly s is .

32.

For e xpo rt o ptio ns , toggle to a ll.

33.

Click R a dio s s to export the solver deck and run the analysis in RADIOSS using the bulk data format. If o ptis kip appears in the o ptio ns field, clear the field before clicking R a dio s s .

34.

Once RADIOSS finishes, click re turn to exit the R AD IO SS .

35.

In the Po s t menu, click D e fo rm e d and review the results of the analysis.

36.

Click Sim ula tio n = and select SUB 9

37.

Click da ta ty pe = and select D is pla ce m e nts .

38.

Click de fo rm to produce the deformed shape of Spar2 in the graphics area for the selected simulation.

39.

Click re turn to exit the Deformed .

40.

In the Post menu, click co nto ur to go to the Contour and review the results of analysis.

41.

Click Sim ula tio n = and select SUB 9

42.

Click da ta ty pe = and select Vo n M is e s Stre s s .

43.

Select the le ge nd sub.

44.

Toggle find m a xim um to m a xim um = and enter 100000.

Altair Engineering

, and save the model as

Po s She a r Po s M o m e nt Po s T.

Po s She a r Po s M o m e nt Po s T.


571

45.

Click co nto ur to produce the contour plot in the graphics area.

46.

(Optional) Continue to use the co nto ur to review additional results.

47.

Click re turn to exit the C o nto ur .

48.

(Optional) From the menu bar, select File , then Sa v e . This operation saves the current HyperMesh database, spar2_ex2_analysis.hm.

49.

From the menu bar, select File , then E xit to exit HyperMesh.

572


Altair Engineering

Altair Engineering


573

Hypermesh 12 33453e

Overview 5o1f4z

More details 6z3438

Related Documents c2h70

Hypermesh 12 33453e

Hypermesh Book 6o6o21

Hypermesh Basics Tutorials-1 654k15

Hypermesh To Ansys Workbench 6i6z5i

Hypermesh Geometry Cleanup i4o

Hypermesh 12.0 Tutorials-nastran 261p4m

More Documents from "Harshal Jadhav" 6v495o

Hydraulic Formula Calculator 3x4w4

Hypermesh 12 33453e

Pid-legend.pdf 3o286g

Purification Of Water Small Scale b2y73

Kinetic Honda Brochure 6755j

Lean And Jit Mcdonalds 69456m